BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
 PROM THE 
 
 SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 1S91 
 
 /^,UJMJ^. 
 
Date Due 
 
 
 
 
 
 MAY 19 
 
 y4b 4/ 
 
 
 
 M5fi^ 
 
 5J9S0 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iiPR^ 
 
 i^tigiK? 
 
 
 Wi<Hr-^ 
 
 ^f 
 
 
 
 
 /'■'' ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924029871765 
 
Cornell University Library 
 GN681 .Q2 1895 
 
 Pygmies by A. de Quatrefages ... Transi 
 
 olin 
 
 3 1924 029 871 765 
 
Cbe antbropologlcal Series 
 
 EDITED BY PROFESaOR FREDERICK STARR 
 
 OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO 
 
 THE PYGMIES 
 
The Anthropological Series. 
 
 Woman's Share in Primitive Culture. 
 By Otis Tufton Mason, A. M., Ph. D. 
 
 " Professor Mason tells the stoiy of woman's work 
 most interestingly, and his volume is a noble tribute to 
 women." — Boston Advertiser. 
 
 " Mr. Mason's volume secures for woman her glory as 
 a civilizer in the past, and by no means denies her a glori- 
 ous future." — M. i. Tributie. 
 
 The Pygmies. By A. de Quatrefages. 
 Translated by Prof. Frederick Starr. 
 
 IN PREPARATION. 
 The Beginnings of Writing. By W. J. 
 Hoffman, M. D. 
 
 The South Sea Islanders. By Dr. 
 
 SCHMELTZ. 
 
 The Zuni. By Frank Hamilton Gush- 
 ing. 
 
 The Aztecs. By Mrs. Zelia Nuttall. 
 
 New York ; D. Appleton & Co., 72 Fifth Avenue. 
 
THE PYGMIES 
 
 BY 
 
 A. DE gUATEEFAGES 
 
 LATE PROFESSOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY AT THE 
 MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY, PARIS 
 
 TRANSLATED BY 
 
 FREDEEICE STAER 
 
 WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 NEW YORK 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 
 
 1895 
 
I\A \^1)0»i 
 
 Copyright, 1894, 
 By D. APPLETON AND COMPANY. 
 
 Electrotyped and Printed 
 at the appleton prkss, u. s. a. 
 
EDITOE'S PEEFACE. 
 
 No apology is necessary for introducing any work of 
 de Quatrefages to American readers. No man has done 
 more than he to further anthropological study in France ; 
 no man was more respected than he over the whole of Con- 
 tinental Europe ; no European anthropologist's works have 
 been more widely read in America. Since the idea of in- 
 corporating Les Pygmees into the Anthropological Series 
 was reached its learned and respected author has died. 
 It seems proper, therefore, to present here a brief sketch 
 of his life and work. 
 
 Jean Louis Armand de Quatrefages de Breau was born 
 February 10, 1810, in the Department Gard, France. 
 Studying at the College of Tournon, and later at the 
 University of Strasbourg,' he received the degree of Doc- 
 tor of Mathematical Sciences in 1830. Two years later 
 he became Doctor of Medicine, and received a subordinate 
 appointment to the Faculty of Medicine at Strasbourg. 
 Shortly after, removing to Toulouse, he began the prac- 
 tice of medicine. For four years he remained in that city 
 as a practitioner, and at the same time busied himself with 
 scientific work, taking active part in several learned so- 
 cieties, and founding (with a colleague) the Journal de 
 Medicin et de Ghirurgie de Toulouse. In 1840 he removed 
 to Paris, studying in zoology under Milne-Edwards, and 
 taking the degree of Doctor of Natural Science. Particu- 
 larly interested in marine life, he prosecuted important 
 
vi EDITOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 researches and published many papers, some of perma- 
 nent value. In 1850 he was appointed Professor of 
 Natural History at the College of Henry IV ; in 1852, 
 elected member of the Institute ; in 1855, called to the 
 head of the Department of Anatomy and Ethnology at 
 the Museum of Natural History. Here he found his life- 
 work, remaining until his death, busying himself with 
 study, writing, and teaching. 
 
 A man of strong convictions and very conservative, 
 de Quatrefages was ever ready to hear the other side, and 
 ever candid and kindly in argument. He was one of the 
 first to support the Society of Anthropology. Those who 
 know the story of the early days of that great association 
 understand what that means. When the claim for man's 
 antiquity was generally derided, de Quatrefages cham- 
 pioned the cause. A monogenist, a believer in the ex- 
 treme antiquity of our race, he was never won over by 
 any of the proposed theories of evolution. 
 
 The ethnographic works of de Quatrefages are many 
 and valuable. From the list of nearly one hundred and 
 fifty important papers or volumes, we select as most im- 
 portant Les Polynesiens et leur migrations. Crania etJi- 
 nica (written in collaboration with E. T. Hamy), UEspece 
 humaine, Hommes fossiles et hommes sauvages, The Nat- 
 ural History of Man, Introdtiction a Vetude des races 
 humaines, and Les Pygmees. The Natural History of 
 Man and a translation of UEspece humaine have been 
 published in America. 
 
 To the very end of a long life our author lived happily 
 and busily active among his books and specimens. Age 
 touched him lightly. Only a few weeks before his death 
 we visited him, and received from him that gracious, 
 kindly assistance which he ever gave freely to all foreign- 
 ers. At that time, although past fourscore years of age, 
 and though, as he himself remarked, his hand trembled, 
 
EDITOR'S PKEPACE. TJi 
 
 and it was not as easy as formerly for him to write, he 
 was engaged upon an important scientific work. 
 
 He died January 12, 1893, after a brief illness, and 
 in his death France lost an eminent son and science a 
 brilliant leader. 
 
mTEODUCTIOlSr. 
 
 For a long time past the small black races have at- 
 tracted my attention and ray, interest in a special manner. 
 On several occasions, in my courses and in various pub- 
 lications, I have recurred to their history.* 
 
 It has seemed to me that it might be useful to gather 
 and unite these materials in a book which should present 
 a sort of monograph of this human type, very curious for 
 more than one reason. 
 
 These little blacks are to-day almost everywhere scat- 
 tered, separated, and often hunted by races larger and 
 stronger. They are no longer found in certain parts of the 
 globe which they formerly occupied, and they are disap- 
 pearing from many others. N"evertheless they have had 
 in the past their time of prosperity ; they have played a 
 very real ethnologic rSle. Finally, they have become the 
 subject of legends which the poets have collected and 
 which the most serious classical writers have not disdained 
 transmitting to us. 
 
 To make known the scientific truth in regard to these 
 
 * See Gazette medicale, 1863 ; Revue d'anthropologie, 1873 ; Bul- 
 letin de la Sooiete d'anthropologie, 1874 ; Comptes rendus de I'Acad- 
 emie des sciences, 1874 ; Crania ethnica, 1875-'79 ; Journal des 
 savants, 1881-'83 ; Revue d'ethnographie, 1883 ; Horames fossiles 
 et Hommes sauvages, 1884 ; Materianx pour I'histoire primitive et 
 naturelle de I'homrae, 1886 ; Introduction a la histoire des races 
 huraaines, 1887. 
 
X THE PYGMIES. 
 
 fables, to show what the pygmies of antiquity really are, 
 is the principal purpose of this book. 
 
 I have carefully indicated in the footnotes the sources 
 whence I have drawn my facts. But I must thank here 
 Bro de Saint-Pol Lias, E. de la Croix, and Marche and 
 Montano, who have kindly furnished me unpublished ma- 
 terial, and to whom I owe the greater part of the photo- 
 graphs reproduced in the text. The figures of skulls are 
 drawn from specimens in the collections of the museum. 
 
 Although Greek and Eoman antiquity did not know 
 either the Bushmen or the Hottentots, I have felt it my 
 duty to devote a chapter to''them. One cannot separate 
 these two populations, and by its little stature the first 
 well deserves to take its place by the side of the classical 
 pygmies, from whom it is otherwise very distinct. Yet I 
 have confined myself, so far as their physical and ethno- 
 graphic characters are concerned, to simply indicating 
 these. They are described in many works. 
 
 It is otherwise with regard to their religious characters, 
 the importance of which, from many points of view, is 
 more and more recognised. Those of the races of the 
 Cape have remained little known until these last years. 
 Therefore I have made a resume of what Hahn has 
 taught us on this subject, just as I have made known 
 in some detail the discoveries upon this point made by 
 Man among the Mincopies. The comparison of these 
 two mythologies, spontaneously developed among savages 
 located almost at the lowest steps of the social ladder, I 
 hope may interest those who occupy themselves with 
 these questions. 
 
 A. DE QUATREFAGES. 
 Paris, May Si, 1887. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER PAGE 
 
 Intboduction ix 
 
 I. — The Pygmies of the Ancients, according to Modern 
 
 Science 1 
 
 II. — Generai/- History of the Eastern Pygmies . . 30 
 
 III. — Physical Characters of the Eastern Pygmies . 59 
 
 IV. — Intellectual, Moral, and Religious Characters of 
 
 THE MiNCOPIES 89 
 
 V. — Negritos other than the Mincopies .... 144 
 
 VI. — The Negrillos, or Pygmies of Africa . . . 164 
 
 VII. — Religious Beliefs of the Hottentots and the 
 
 Bushmen 188 
 
 Appendix A 339 
 
 Appendix B 247 
 
 Appendix C 249 
 
 Index 251 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTEATIONS. 
 
 FIG. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 1. New Gruin.ean, from the Strait of Bourgat. (After Van 
 
 Vort) facing 30 
 
 3. Skulls of Mincopy and Papuan superposed . . . .31 
 
 3. Group of Mincopies facing 33 
 
 4. Skull of Papuan from Torres Strait. One fourth natural 
 
 size. (Mus. d'hist. nat., No. 4771) 23 
 
 5. Skull of Negrito from the Neighbourhood of Binangonan, 
 
 Luzon. One fourth natural size. (Mus. d'hist. nat., 
 No. 3639) 33 
 
 6. Portrait of Aeta Chief from the Mountains of Mariveles, 
 
 Luzon. (Prom photograph of MM. Montano and 
 Rey) facing 25 
 
 7. Skull of Mincopy from the Grand Andaman. One fourth 
 
 natural size 31 
 
 8. Sakaies of Perak. (After a photograph of M. Bro de Saint- 
 
 Pol Lias, given by M. de la Croix) 33 
 
 9. Sakaie. (After a photograph of M. Bro de Saint-Pol Lias, 
 
 given by M. de la Croix) 34 
 
 10. Djangal of Sirgoudja. (Prom a drawing by Rousselet) facing 38 
 
 11. Profile of Boda, Ghond of Schagpore. compared with that 
 
 of a Mincopy Woman and an Aeta Woman. One fourth 
 
 natural size 39 
 
 13. Skull of Female Negrito of the Cattalam Mountains. One 
 
 fourth natural size. (Mus. d'hist. nat., No. 3502) . . 40 
 
 13. Bust of Orion, Negrito-Papuan of Tidore — Profile. One 
 
 fourth natural size. (Mus. d'hist. nat.. No. 880) . . 43 
 
 14. Negrito-Papuan. (After Crawfurd) 44 
 
 15. Skull of a Negrito-Papuan of Borneo, forming part of a 
 
 Dyak Trophy 45 
 
 16. Young Aeta Girl. (After a photograph of M. Montano) . 71 
 
 xiii 
 
xiv LIST OP ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 FIG. PAGE 
 
 17. Aeta. (After a photograph of M. Montano) . . . 73 
 
 18. Skull of a Mincopy of the Q-reat Andamans . . . .82 
 
 19. William Lanney 86 
 
 30. Truganina, or Lalla Rookh. (After the bust oast by Du- 
 
 moustier) 87 
 
 31. Akoa. (After Admiral Fleuriot de Langle) . . facing 166 
 23. Akka Woman placed beside a Man of Average Height. 
 
 (After Chaille-Long Bey) facing 174 
 
 33. Tebo, Side View. (After photograph of Count Miniscalohi) 175 
 84. Tebo. Front View. (After photograph of Count Minis- 
 calohi) 176 
 
 35. Chairallah, Front View. (After photograph of Count 
 
 Miniscalohi) 170 
 
 36. Bust of Swoon, Hottentot. (From a bust modelled upon 
 
 the living subject. Collection of the Museum) . . 189 
 27. Skull of Hottentot from Cape Colony. (Museum Col- 
 lection) 190 
 
 38. Bust of Yunka, Bushman. (From a mould made upon the 
 
 living. Collection of the Museum) 191 
 
 39. Bust of Soartje Bartmann, called the Hottentot Venus. 
 
 (From a mould taken after death. Collection of the 
 Museum) 193 
 
 30. Skull of Bushman. (Collection of the Museum ) . . .193 
 
 31. Skull of Soartje Bartmann, Bushman Woman. (Collection 
 
 of the Museum) 193 
 
THE PYGMIES. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE PYGMIES OF THE ANCIENTS, ACCORDING TO 
 MODERN SCIENCE. 
 
 Homer and Aristotle : Pygmies of the Nile.— The Marsh of the Nile. 
 —Pliny : African and Asiatic Pygmies.— Buffon : The Apes.— 
 Roulin : Northern Populations. — Beloochistan : Brahouis.— 
 Ctesias : Asiatic Pygmies. — Pomponius Mela : Bast African 
 Pygmies.— Herodotus : "West African Pygmies.— Voyage of the 
 Nasamones. — The Niger. — Negritos and Negrillos. 
 
 There is probably no nation, not a human population, 
 which has not believed in the existence of men of more or 
 less dwarfed stature and has made them play a role in 
 its legends.* One knows that the Greeks have not es- 
 caped the common law, and that Homer has borrowed 
 from beliefs, which were without doubt much older than 
 his time, the beginning of the third chant of the Iliad, 
 " when under the orders of their chiefs they had arranged 
 themselves in battle array, the Trojans advanced noisily 
 like a cloud of birds, making their loud cries heard. So 
 
 * I have no intention of here examining all that has been said on 
 the subject of the pygmies. It is understood that I shall not occupy 
 myself with puerile traditions, nursery tales, which some aijcient 
 authors have transmitted to us on the subject. ... 1 shall confine 
 myself to discussing that which has been said which is nearest true. 
 Readers who wish more may consult Banier." 
 
 1 
 
2 THE PYGMIKS. 
 
 raises itself to heaven the outcry of storks when they flee 
 from winter and the continual rains. They utter shrill 
 cries, they fly over the ocean, they bear carnage and death 
 to the men called pygmies ; and from high in the air 
 they give them dreadful combat." 
 
 The country of the pygmies is not mentioned in this 
 passage. Yet Homer certainly knew of the migration of 
 the storks ; he knew that they passed each year from Eu- 
 rope into Africa and back again ; and as, according to 
 him, these birds met their enemies only after having 
 crossed the sea in order to escape the severity of the 
 bad season, it is evident that it is somewhere in Africa 
 that the poet located the home of these dwarfs, supposed 
 too small and too feeble to resist their winged invaders. 
 
 Although he has spoken of the pygmies in connection 
 with the natural history of storks, Aristotle said noth- 
 ing of the pretended combats which furnished Homer his 
 term of comparison. One may say that he did not believe 
 in it. Behold how he expresses himself : " The storks 
 pass from the plains of Scythia to the marsh of upper 
 Egypt, toward the sources of the Nile. This is the district 
 which the pygmies inhabit, whose existence is not a fable. 
 There is really, as men say, a species of men of little stat- 
 ure, and their horses are little also. They pass their life 
 in caverns."' 
 
 Without being as explicit as one might wish, Aristotle 
 here corrects exaggerations relative to the claimed height 
 of the pygmies. There is a great difference between men 
 of little stature and those miniature human beings among 
 whom storks could carry carnage and death. Upon the 
 other points the founder of natural science is, one might 
 say, upon the line of truth such as it appears to us to-day. 
 
 It is toward the sources of the Nile that he placed the 
 home of the pygmies. It is, in fact, in proceeding almost 
 in the general direction of this river that Schweinfurth 
 
THE PYGMIES OP THE ANCIENTS. 3 
 
 discovered the little men of whom we shall speak farther 
 on. But Aristotle placed these sources in the midst of 
 swamps situated in upper Egypt. We know, but only 
 very recently, that there the course of the Nile was singu- 
 larly cut short. The swamps exist in fact. All explorers 
 of these regions have insisted upon the difficulties which 
 they have experienced in traversing the inextricable laby- 
 rinth of canals encumbered by islands now fixed, now 
 floating, which form the Sett, a true vegetable barrier, 
 of which papyrus * and herminisria \ form, so to speak, 
 the framework, and which more humble plants, particu- 
 larly the pistia, compared by travellers to a little cabbage 
 which grows, in the manner of our water lentils, consoli- 
 date. But these swamps, which commence a little south 
 of Khartoum, become pronounced at about the ninth de- 
 gree of latitude." One knows that it is much farther to 
 the south and beyond the equator that the sources of the 
 Nile are found. It is in our hemisphere near the second 
 degree of north latitude, two or three degrees of longitude 
 west of the African river, and in a totally different basin 
 — that of the Welle — that Scbweinfurth discovered the 
 Akkas, which are apparently the little men of Aristotle."^ 
 Aristotle speaks of the little horses of the pygmies, 
 but no traveller mentions this quadruped as forming part 
 of the fauna of the country. One might be tempted to 
 see in this contradiction a motive for doubting the exacti- 
 tude of the facts conveyed by travellers to the Greek phi- 
 losopher. But it is easily explained. Baker tells us that 
 
 * Papyrus domesHca, L. This so justly celebrated plant appears 
 formerly to have been very abundant over the whole of Egypt. How- 
 ever, Scbweinfurth saw it first on the banks of the Nile, at 9° 30' 
 north latitude.'" 
 
 t Herminisria, Adanson ; JEdemone mirdbilis, Kotschy. This 
 plant grows to a height of fifteen to twenty feet, with a diameter at 
 base of five to six centimetres ; it is very light, more so than cork. 
 2 
 
4 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 the animals of the Bari (a negro tribe of the neighbourhood 
 of Gondokoro) are of very small size — "cows and ewes 
 have dimensions truly Lilliputian."" Probably at the 
 time of the Egyptian domination the horse had reached 
 even into these districts ; and, if it had been so, he must 
 also have suffered the degeneration reported^ by the Eng- 
 lish traveller in the cases of the other domestic mammals. 
 
 Thus Aristotle has been very definite ; that which he 
 said is in part true, and in any case at least reasonable. 
 With Pliny, we meet with uncertainties, exaggerations, 
 and fables. He places the pygmies now in Thrace, not 
 far from the shore of the Euxine Sea;^^* now in Asia 
 Minor, in the interior of Caria. On two occasions he 
 designates India as the country of these little beings ; 
 elsewhere, in speaking of peoples of Africa, which live at 
 the extremity of Ethiopia, he says, " Some authors have 
 also reported that tlie nation of the pygmies was among 
 the marshes which were the source of the Nile." 
 
 One has reproached Pliny for the multiplicity of, the 
 habitats assigned by him to the pygmies ; one has wished 
 to see in this fact one more example of the haste with 
 which he took his notes, and of the conti'adictions into 
 which his manner of working led him. But has one not 
 been too severe in this, and have his words not been mis- 
 understood? In placing pygmies upon geographic dis- 
 tricts so separated from each other, and so distinct, Pliny 
 could not have intended to speak of one single popula- 
 tion. He has evidently believed in 'the existence of these 
 little men upon different parts of the then known world, 
 and admitted in particular Asiatic and African pygmies. 
 Upon this point modern discoveries have shown that he 
 was right. 
 
 Pliny reproduces, however, without any reservation, all 
 that which was said upon the subject of the combats sus- 
 tained by the pygmies against the storks. It is these, so 
 
THE PYGMIES OF THE ANCIENTS. 5 
 
 the barbarians say, which have chased them from Thrace. 
 Thanks to the annual migration of these birds, the little 
 men enjoy each year an armistice. Finally he sums up 
 all this ensemble of beliefs in the following terms : " In 
 India, beyond the mountains, one speaks of the Tris- 
 pithames and of the pygmies, who are no more than 
 three spithames in height (twenty-seven inches, about 
 0-73 metres) ; they have a wholesome climate and per- 
 petual springtime, protected as they are by the moun- 
 tains against the north wind. Homer relates, on his 
 part, that the storks make war against them. It is said 
 that, borne upon the backs of rams and of goats and 
 armed with arrows, they descend all together at spring- 
 time to the seacoast, and eat the eggs and the little ones 
 of these birds ; that this expedition lasts three months ; 
 that otherwise they could not resist the increasing multi- 
 tudes of the storks ; that their cabins are constructed 
 of mud, feathers, and eggshells. Aristotle says that the 
 pygmies live in caverns ; as for the rest, he gives the same 
 details as the others." 
 
 We have just seen how inexact this last assertion of 
 Pliny is, and I need not emphasise the point. But the 
 reports collected by the celebrated Eonian compiler sug- 
 gest other remarks. 
 
 It is difficulc to understand what has caused him to 
 locate the pygmies in Thrace or in Asia Minor. In these 
 countries neither the history of man nor that of animals 
 presents any fact which, twisted by ignorance nor by the 
 love of the marvellous, could have served as a basis for 
 the legends which are here considered. It may be, as M. 
 Maury has pointed out, that one may find the explana- 
 tion of these mistakes in a general fact. The habitation 
 of beings more or less strange, whose existence was ad- 
 mitted by the ancients, was always placed by them at the 
 borders of the then known world, without their troubling 
 
Q THE PYGMIES. 
 
 themselves concerning the precise point or the exact direc- 
 tion. From thence resulted, when one concerned himself 
 ■with this fantastic geography, the vagueness and contra- 
 dictions so often observed, and of which the history of the 
 pygmies furnishes a striking example. 
 
 Unlike the countries to which the preceding reflections 
 are applied, Africa and tropical Asia present certain facts 
 which permit explaining in various ways what the an- 
 cients have said of their pygmies, and these facts proceed 
 from the history of animals as well as from that of men. 
 
 In his History of Birds, and a propos to that of 
 storks, BufEon has discussed the whole of the facts which 
 I have just recalled in order to find out how much of re- 
 ality they contain. But he too much forgot Aristotle, and 
 only really concerned himself with the assertions of Pliny. 
 Comparing what this latter reports of the annual expe- 
 ditions of the pygmies with some facts in the habits re- 
 lated of monkeys, he saw in these last the dwarf men so 
 celebrated among the ancients. " One knows," said he, 
 " that the monkeys, which go in large bands in the greater 
 part of the regions of Africa and India, carry on continual 
 warfare against birds ; they seek to surprise their nests, 
 and without ceasing prepare ambushes for them. The 
 storks, on their arrival, find these enemies, perhaps, assem- 
 bled in great number to attack this new and rich prey 
 with greater advantage. The storks, quite sure of their 
 own powers, trained among themselves to battles, and 
 naturally quite disposed to war, defend themselves vigor- 
 ously. But the monkeys, anxious to carry off the eggs and 
 the young birds, return constantly, and in bands, to the 
 combat ; and as by their tricks, their feints, and move^ 
 ments they seem to imitate human actions, they would 
 appear to ignorant people to be a band of little men, . . . 
 Behold the origin and the history of these fables ! " *^ 
 
 This interpretation of the ancient legend is simple and 
 
THE PYGMIES OP THE ANCIENTS. 7 
 
 natural; it must have presented itself to many minds. 
 Supported by the authority of our great naturalist, it has 
 been generally adopted. Perhaps one should consider it 
 still to contain some truth. It may well be that, under 
 the sway of general beliefs, voyagers have really taken 
 some band of monkeys for a tribe of real pygmies. 
 
 But has not man himself supplied his share of facts, 
 true at bottom and only distorted, to these legends, which 
 have been ti-ansmitted since the time of Homer? Many 
 men of science have replied affirmatively to this question, 
 and proposed solutions quite diverse. One savant, whom 
 all the world has loved for his character as much as it 
 has esteemed him for his so varied and exact knowledge — 
 Roulin — adopted upon this point the opinions of Olaus 
 Magnus and of Paul Jove.^^ Unfortunately, the notes, 
 traced by him on the margin of a copy of Pliny which 
 formed part of the library of the Institute are evidently 
 of very ancient date. They were written apparently long 
 before the discoveries of which I shall speak farther on. 
 The most precise and important information has come to 
 us only after the death of my colleague. He could not 
 then use them in order to explain the words of the author 
 whom he was commentating. Although we cannot ac- 
 cept to-day the theory at which he arrived, it is desirable 
 that I should refer to it. It is always interesting to know 
 the thoughts of an ingenious and fine mind upon a diffi- 
 cult subject. 
 
 For Roulin, at the period when he wrote his reflec- 
 tions, the pygmies of the ancients were our circumpolar 
 population. Although the notes say nothing of it, one 
 could not doubt that the little stature recognised among 
 several of these peoples has been the source of this inter- 
 pretation. One knows, in fact, that the Lapps have long 
 been regarded as the smallest human race. Certain Eski- 
 mo rival them in this respect, and even go further. Hence, 
 
8 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 to see in them the dwarfs of the ancient legends is but a 
 step. Thfe question of country was no hindrance to the 
 partisans of this theory. Have not the pygmies been 
 placed in Thrace and in Scythia as well as in Asia and 
 Africa? Some peculiarities of customs lend themselves 
 to the identification. The author recalls the fact that 
 certain northern populations inhabit alternately each year 
 the interior and the seacoast just as Pliny said the pyg- 
 mies did. It is also to eat the eggs of aquatic birds, of 
 which they destroy an immense number, that these tribes 
 go to the coast. That which the Latin author reports of 
 the huts of the pygmies is explained, moreover, without 
 much difficulty. Eoulin wrote : " Perhaps in the original 
 tradition these huts, in place of being made of mud and 
 of the shells of eggs, were made in the form of hemi- 
 spheres (half eggshells) and of mud. Those of the Eski- 
 mos have this form, but are made of snow." 
 
 Finally, the tradition reports that the storks met their 
 enemies in their annual journeys from north to south. 
 Eoulin replies : " In placing the migration of the storks 
 between these same two points, but making them proceed 
 from the marshes of upper Egypt to Scythia — i. e., towards 
 the frigid zone — it is there that the pygmies are found." 
 
 To discuss the ingenious corrections proposed by Eoulin 
 is to-day useless. I will limit myself to observing that he 
 has neglected another passage, of great importance — in that 
 it permits determining with precision the point where the 
 author places the Asiatic pygmies. One reads, in fact, the 
 following phrase in his description of India : " Immedi- 
 ately beyond the nation of the Prusians, in whose moun- 
 tains they say are the pygmies, one finds the Indus." 
 The mountains here considered were then west of the 
 river ; and as the pygmies betook themselves each year to 
 the seacoast, from which they could not, therefore, be 
 very far distant, one sees that we are here dealing with 
 
THE PYGMIES OF THE ANCIENTS. 9 
 
 the most southern part of the mountainous district of 
 Beloochistan. 
 
 This region is situated at about 35° or 26° north latitude 
 and 63° or 64° east longitude. Travellers do not mention 
 in this district any population of particularly small stature, 
 but I hare elsewhere shown that the most ancient inhab- 
 itants of this country, the Brahouis, who speak a Dravidian 
 language, belong to a great group of crossed races, of which 
 the Negritos form the black element.'^" At the time of 
 Pliny they were certainly less altered than to-day by the 
 mixture of bloods, and must have resembled those Dravid- 
 ians, properly called, whose height descends below 1"?50 
 and seldom rises to l^eS or IfeS. Perhaps even at the 
 epoch when the facts were collected which were trans- 
 mitted by the Eoman writer there existed yet in the prov- 
 ince of Loos, just where Pliny places his pygmies, some 
 tribe of Negritos similar to that of which we are about 
 to speak. However that may be, the Brahouis present a 
 peculiarity of customs which recalls exactly what Pliny 
 atti'ibutes to the pygmies. They change their dwelling 
 twice a year — at the beginning of summer and winter. 
 These annual migrations are compelled by the necessity 
 of procuring good pastures for their animals, which con- 
 sist, as those of the pygmies did, of sheep and goats. 
 
 Everything concurs, then, to make us see in the Bra- 
 houis the descendants of the little men of whom Pliny 
 spoke. But long before him Ctesias had spoken of Asi- 
 atic pygmies, and had referred their habitation much 
 farther to the east. In. the midst of fables, which he ac- 
 cepts without reserve, he has given some important and 
 true facts. Behold how he expresses himself : " There 
 are in the midst of India black men whom one calls pyg- 
 mies. They speak the same language as the Indians, and 
 are very small. The largest are only two cubits (O'PQSi or 
 0?900, according to the value we give to this measure). 
 
10 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 The greater part are only one cubit and a half high. 
 Their hair is very long; it descends as far as to their 
 knees, and even farther. They have a much heavier 
 beard than all other men. When it has attained its 
 growth they no longer wear any clothing ; their hair and 
 their beard take the place of such. . . . They are flat-nosed 
 and homely. They are skilful in using the bow."^' 
 
 Ctesias has no doubt diminished the height of his 
 pygmies into fabulous proportions. Without doubt he was 
 wrong in taking for hair or beard the mantles and other 
 garments of long floating grasses which the women in the 
 neighbourhood of Travancore still wear.'" But what he 
 says of the geographical position, of the colour, and of the 
 use of the bow, does not permit doubt that he had knowl- 
 edge of the Negritos or of proto-Dravidian tribes pre- 
 serving in high degree the characters of the primitive 
 type. It is, in fact, in the heart of India, in the Vindhya 
 Mountains, that M. Eousselet has found the Bandra- 
 Loks}'^^' "*' ^^° The name of this tribe literally signifies 
 man monkeys. They are true Negroes of very small 
 stature, who, in the midst of populations more or less 
 crossed, have preserved unmixed the characters of the 
 type, and are one of the evidences left by the black race. 
 
 Neither Aristotle nor Pliny mention the black colour 
 and the woolly hair, as characters of the dwarfs of whom 
 they speak on hearsay. Ctesias alone is very precise upon 
 the first point. The memory of these peculiarities is evi- 
 dently lost in the long journey which the informants, 
 probably very few in number, must have made from the 
 heart of Africa and from the extremity of India to Greece 
 and Eome. This omission is, moreover, less singular than 
 one would at first be tempted to suppose. The ancients 
 attributed the dark colour and the woolly appearance of 
 the hair of the Negro to the action of the sun, whose heat 
 burned the skin and crisped the hair. They have not. 
 
THE PYGMIES OF THE ANCIENTS. H 
 
 then, been surprised to find in a hot country, by the side 
 of other black men, such as their Indians and Ethiopians, 
 tribes presenting these two characters. The diminution 
 of the stature must have struck them much more strongly, 
 and their very exaggerations show that it has been so. 
 They have done in an opposite direction that which Piga- 
 fetti did with reference to the Patagonians. 
 
 Let us return now into Africa. 
 
 The contemporary of Pliny, Pomponius Mela, has also 
 spoken of the pygmies. The very short passage which he 
 has devoted to them has yet a decided interest. He 
 places beyond the Arabic Gulf, at the head of a little bay 
 of the Eed Sea, the Panchiens, surnamed OpJdophages, 
 because they ate snakes. " In the interior of the land," 
 he says, " one saw formerly pygmies, a race of men of 
 very small stature, which has died out in the wars which 
 it has sustained against the storks in order to preserve its 
 fruits." 
 
 The translator of Pomponius Mela regards the little 
 bend of the Eed Sea which is mentioned here as our 
 Gulf of Aden. But it would seem to me strange that the 
 Latin geographer should have employed this expression 
 in order to designate the great expanse of sea which ex- 
 tends itself along the African coast from Cape Guardafui 
 to the Strait of Bab-el-Mandeb. The Bay of Moscha, which 
 almost buries itself in the lands southwest of the strait, 
 seems to me to correspond much better and in every re- 
 spect to the description of Pomponius. But this bay, situ- 
 ated at about the thirteenth degree of north latitude, lies 
 consequently under the same parallel as the commence- 
 ment of the grassy region of the Nile, but about four de- 
 grees farther north than the labyrinth, whence the river 
 seems to proceed. Pomponious, moreover, does not speak 
 of the Nile ; no more does he say anything regarding the 
 Abyssinian plateau interposed between it and the sea. 
 
12 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 He seems, then, to place his pygmies entirely to the east of 
 this portion of the continent. 
 
 Here again modern discoveries appear to support the 
 ■wisdom of the ancients. The tradition of the eastern 
 African pygmies has never been lost among the Arabs. 
 Always the geographers of that nation have placed their 
 River of the Pygmies much farther to the south. It is 
 in this region, a little to the north of the equator and 
 about the thirty-second degree of east longitude, that 
 the E. P. Leon des Avanchers has found the Wa-Berrihi- 
 mos or Cincalles, whose stature is about I'fSO.* The facts 
 collected by M. d'Abbadie place the Mallas or Maze-Mal- 
 leas, with a stature of l'?50 at about the sixth degree of 
 north latitude.^ Everything indicates that there exist to 
 the south of the country of the Gallas various Negro 
 tribes of very little stature. It seems to me difficult not 
 to refer them to the pygmies of Pomponius Mela, only 
 they have retreated more to the south. Probably this 
 change had already been effected when the Eoman geog- 
 rapher wrote, and one understands how he might have re- 
 garded this race as having disappeared. 
 
 In sketching the history of these little men so cele- 
 brated in antiquity I have been obliged to insist first upon 
 the traditions relative to those whose name Homer has 
 immortalised, and to the populations located either in Asia 
 or in the northeast regions of Africa, which one has con- 
 nected with the pygmies of the Nile. But, about a cen- 
 tury before Aristotle, Herodotus had also spoken of a 
 kind of pygmies, without, however, using that name. 
 Some one must have repeated to him the story of cer- 
 tain pilgrims of Cyrene, who had received their informa- 
 tion from Etearchus, King of the Ammoniens. He had 
 told them that a number of young Nasamones had con- 
 ceived the idea of exploring the deserts of Libya. Pive 
 of them, selected by lot, started out supplied with food 
 
THE PYGMIES OP THE ANCIENTS. 13 
 
 and water. " They first traversed the inhabited country, 
 then the wild region, and finally entered the desert, where 
 they made their journey, directing their way towards the 
 setting sun. After having marched several days in the 
 deep sands, they perceived some trees which rose in the 
 midst of a field. They approached them and ate some 
 fruits which the trees bore. Scarcely had they com- 
 menced to taste them when they were surprised by a 
 great number of men very much below the average 
 height, who seized them and dragged them away with 
 them. They spoke a language unknown to the Nasamo- 
 nes, and did not understand theirs. These men conducted 
 the five young men across a country intersected by great 
 marshes into a town whose inhabitants were black. Be- 
 fore this town flowed a considerable stream, whose course 
 was from the west to the east, and there were crocodiles 
 in it." 
 
 In spite of the brevity of this story it agrees too well 
 with modern discoveries for one to doubt the reality of 
 the facts which it relates. The geographical districts in- 
 dicated by the Nasamones are identifiable still, and the 
 river whose existence they made known is our Djoliba, or 
 Niger, which was alternately believed to be the Nile itself, 
 or a tributary from Lake Tchad, before Mungo Park, 
 Caille, Olapperton, the Lander brotliers, and others made 
 us know its true course. One knows to-day that this 
 river, whose source was discovered very recently by two 
 young Frenchmen, takes its rise in one of the caflons of 
 the mountainous plateau which, in the interior of the 
 country, follows almost parallel the north coast of the 
 Gulf of Guinea. Although Zweifeld and Moustier were 
 not able, on account of having no instruments, to deter- 
 mine exactly the location of Mount Tembi, whence the 
 source of the Niger proceeds, and although they have been 
 able to contemplate it only from a distance on account of 
 
14 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 local superstitions, oue may see, by the map which the 
 Geographical Society of Marseilles has published, that this 
 mountain is very close to 8° 35' north latitude and 13° 45' 
 west longitude. The river, then a small streamlet, flows 
 at first from south to north ; but soon its general direction 
 is due northeast. It remains the same as far as to Timbuc- 
 too, a little beyond 18° (18° 3' 45" north latitude and 40° 
 5' 10" west longitude). There the river bends abruptly 
 and flows almost directly from west to east as far as Bour- 
 roum,* over a distance of more than three degrees of longi- 
 tude, before turning towards the south-southeast to reach 
 the Gulf of Guinea. It is, then, between the first and 
 fourth degree of west longitude that the Nasamones reached 
 the Niger. One can no longer locate the town inhabited 
 by Negroes whither the bold travellers were conducted. 
 We are only sure that it could not possibly be the cele- 
 brated Timbuctoo, the founding of which, according to the 
 annalist of those countries, Ahmed Baba, would date only 
 from the fifth century of the Hegira, or about 1100 A. d. 
 
 Herodotus informs us that the young Nasamones 
 found crocodiles in the stream visited by them. This 
 again is a perfectly correct statement, more so than one 
 at first might think. A priori, one would reasonably sup- 
 pose that the great reptiles inhabiting two rivers so widely 
 separated as the Nile and the Niger would be of different 
 species. It is not so. The question has been specially 
 studied as the result of discussions which arose between 
 Cuvier and Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire— discussions to which 
 the first of these great naturalists attached so much im- 
 portance as to consecrate to it in his Regne animal a note 
 of exceptional length. Cuvier admitted the specific iden- 
 tity of all the crocodiles of the great rivers of Africa. 
 Geoffrey denied this identity, and admitted the existence 
 
 * Situated at the east bend of the River Niger (Barth). 
 
THE PYGMIES OF THE ANCIENTS. 15 
 
 in the Nile aloue of four distinct species. Dameril and 
 Bibrop restudied the subject with materials which were 
 lacking to the two illustrious adversaries, and have proved 
 that Cuvier was right.** The crocodile of the Niger, as 
 that of Senegal, is the same as the crocodile of the Nile. - 
 
 Finally, the Nasamones declared that they were led 
 into a town all of whoso inhabitants were blacks. Here 
 also they have told the truth. Although Timbuctoo was 
 founded by the Tuaregs ; although these, the Berbers 
 and the Peuls, dispute in our days the control of this city 
 and the countries which are bathed by the middle por- 
 tion of the Niger, it is known that these people are for- 
 eigners and have arrived there at an epoch relatively 
 recent. According to Barth, in the tenth century the 
 country of the Negroes extended still, on an average, to 
 the twentieth degree of latitude. At this epoch all the 
 region of which we speak belonged to the black race, and 
 more truly was it so at the time of Herodotus. 
 
 Prom this it results that the black men seen by the 
 Nasamones were true Negroes, and certainly had woolly 
 hair. This point is nevertheless neglected in the recital 
 of the travellers. This fact justifies, as one sees, the in- 
 terpretation which I have given above of the omission of 
 this peculiarity in regard to the little Asiatic blacks. 
 
 Thus, as regards the soil, waters, animals, and men, 
 everything up to this point in the report gathered by the 
 Greek historian is true. What reason have we to doubt 
 that which he reports of the little human race met with 
 by the Nasamones ? None. And even if observation had 
 not confirmed these reports, one should accept them. But 
 modern discoveries have also, upon this point, confirmed 
 the facts transmitted by Herodotus, at least in so far as 
 relates to the existence of this race. 
 
 It is otherwise in regard to its geographical position. 
 This position connects itself, as we have seen, with that 
 
16 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 of a well-determiiied portion of the river. But the most 
 northern station of the western pygmies reported up to 
 the present time is located in the heart of Senegambia, 
 in the Tenda-Maid, near the tenth degree of north latitude 
 and the fourteenth degree of west longitude, that is to 
 say, about eight degrees farther west than the point where 
 the Nasamones were captured by the little men."° 
 
 We find again, then, in relation to western Africa, the 
 same difference between tradition and modern observa- 
 tions which we have had to mention when we considered 
 upper Egypt and eastern Africa. The dwarf race again 
 shows itself farther from us than it must have been at the 
 time of the Greeks. But in the two preceding cases we 
 could attribute this disagreement to an imperfect knowl- 
 edge, which would have reduced the distances. Here, 
 however, this hypothesis is inadmissible. In view of the 
 precision, of Herodotus and of the agreement which his 
 story presents with material facts of a fixed kind, it is 
 necessary to admit either that the little human race seen 
 by the Nasamones still exists to the north of the Niger 
 but has not yet been discovered, or else that it has dis- 
 appeared from these regions. 
 
 Without at all wishing to commit the future, this last 
 hypothesis seems to me to have great probability. With- 
 out doubt it is also necessary to apply it to other coun- 
 tries where the ancients have located their pygmies. The 
 Egyptians knew the Akkas under the name which they 
 still bear, for Mariette Pasha has read this name by the 
 side of a portrait of a dwarf carved upon a monument of 
 the old empire.''* But while admitting that they may have 
 been able to explore the Nile Valley far beyond the barriers 
 which lately arrested us, nothing, I believe, permits us to 
 suppose that they reached the most southern tributaries 
 of this river, or that they have passed to the west, crossing 
 the divide which separates this basin from that of the 
 
THE PYGMIES OP THE ANCIENTS. 17 
 
 Welle. It would seem to me far more reasonable to admit 
 that at the time of Aristotle the Akka tribes stretched far 
 more to the north, and even reached the swampy district 
 of the great river. Their being driven backwards towards 
 the south and west would not be at all surprising. In 
 fact, wherever we follow this little race, whenever infor- 
 mation regarding them is increased a little, they appear 
 to us as having been in the past more prosperous than in 
 our own days, as having occupied formerly a geographical 
 area more vast and more connected than now. 
 
 It is not before the attacks of birds or beasts that these 
 little men withdrew and that their communities broke to 
 pieces. We shall see, on the contrary, that there are 
 among them peoples who know how to attack and con- 
 quer even the elephant. But they were forced to yield to 
 larger and stronger human races. These are, in Africa 
 and Melanesia, the African Negroes and the Papuans ; in 
 Malaysia, the different Malay races ; in India, the races 
 who, in crossing with them, have given birth to the Dra- 
 vidian populations. Wherever one meets with them to- 
 day one sees them retreating, and often dying out. This 
 progressive diminution commenced many centuries ago. 
 To-day there are true pygmies no longer upon many of 
 the points where they formerly prevailed. Very often 
 some feeble tribes alone represent the pure type. But, 
 even in disappearing, these little blacks have left traces in 
 the modern populations. In western Africa, as in the 
 Philippines and in the two Gangetic peninsulas, they 
 have played an ethnological role, at times important, in 
 crossing with superior races and in giving birth to half- 
 breed populations. 
 
 On the whole, the ancients have had information more 
 or less inexact, more or less incomplete, but also more or 
 less true, concerning five populations of little stature from 
 whom they have made their pygmies. Two were located 
 
18 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 in Asia, in the extreme southeast of the then known 
 world ; the third, to the south, towards the sources of the 
 Nile ; the fourth, more to the east, but not far from the 
 preceding ; the fifth, still in Africa, but entirely to the 
 southwest, and in a region where the Nasamones alone ap- 
 pear to have penetrated. Two of these groups, more or less 
 reduced, more or less altered by crossing, are still located 
 in Asia. The three African groups in our days are 
 found at a distance from Greece or Rome greater than 
 the tradition states, but situated very nearly in the same 
 direction. All of them are, moreover, but fragments of 
 two human races well characterised as blacks, occupying, 
 the one in Asia, the other in Africa, a considerable area, 
 and both of them including not only tribes or distinct 
 peoples, but even subraces. 
 
 Prom the first years of my instructing at the museum 
 I have proposed to unite all the black populations of 
 Asia, of Malaysia, and of Melanesia, characterised by 
 smallness of stature and relative gracefulness of limbs, 
 into a Negrito Iranch, opposed to the Papuan Irancli, 
 to which. I referred the Eastern Negroes of large size and 
 of proportions frequently athletic. The Australians, who 
 present in a high degree the characters of a mixed race, 
 and the Tasmanians, who form by themselves a distinct 
 race, remain outside of the two preceding groups."^ I 
 have reason to think that under one form or another this 
 division is to-day generally adopted. 
 
 On his part, Hamy first showed that, contrary to com- 
 mon opinion, there exist in western Africa some Negroes 
 distinguished from the classical type by the shortness of 
 their skulls.'^ In pursuing this line of investigation he 
 recognised that this cephalic character coincided with a 
 noticeable reduction of the stature. Grouping together, 
 in this point of view, observations before scattered and 
 isolated, he showed that Africa, like Asia, possessed a black 
 
THE PYGMIES OP THE ANCIENTS. 19 
 
 subtype, of which one of the most striking characters was 
 a remarkably reduced stature; that the little Negroes, 
 African and Asiatic, so widely separated geographically, 
 resembled each other in several other features, either ana- 
 tomical or external ; that these two groups are in reality 
 two corresj)onding terms, geographically and anthropo- 
 logically. Hamy proposed for these dw^rf African tribes, 
 taken collectively, the name of Negrilles,''*' * This name, 
 which has the advantage of recalling one of the charac- 
 teristic features of the group and the relations which 
 unite it to the Negritos, will, I believe, be readily accepted 
 by all anthropologists. 
 
 * English Negrillos. 
 
CHAPTEE II. 
 
 GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERJST PYGMIES.* 
 
 Papuans.— Melanesia!! migrations.— ^^egritos : Their division into 
 two geographical groups.— Insular group— Diffusions of this 
 type ; its limits.— Mixture of Papuans and Negritos.— Cause of 
 their extinction in Java and at various other points. — Continen- 
 tal group— Malacca : Semangs; crossing. — Annamitio penin- 
 sula : Mo'is. — Gangetic peninsula : Various populations. — General 
 limits.— Negritos and Negrito- Papuans. — Ancient migrations. — 
 Relative antiquity of the island and continental Negritos. — An- 
 cient crossings. — Dravidians. — Errors produced by the exclusive 
 use of linguistics in distinguishing races. — Western limits of 
 the Dravidians, the Eastern Ethiopians of Herodotus. 
 
 I HAVE just recalled the prinoipal divisions to be estab- 
 lished in the totality of the Eastern Negro populations. I 
 only wish, however, to contrast the Negritos and Papu- 
 ans, long regarded as one and the same race. It is easy 
 to summarily characterise these two groups. Both have 
 the more or less black colour and the so-called woolly hair 
 of the true Negroes. But the Papuans are often large, 
 muscular, at times athletic (Fig. 1) ; their skull is at once 
 dolichocephalic and hypsistenocephalic — that is to say, it 
 is relatively long from before backwards, compressed later- 
 ally, and very high (Figs. 3, 4). The Negritos are always 
 of little stature, have rounded forms (Fig. 3), and their 
 
 * This chapter is taken almost verbatim irom an ai-ticle published 
 by me in the Revue d'eth!!ographie, founded and directed by M. 
 Hamy.'*" 
 
 20 
 
i'ro. 1. — JiEW GuiNEAN, FKOM THE Strait OF BocnGAT. (After Van Vort.) 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 21 
 
 skull is brachycephalic or subbrachycephalic * — that is to 
 say, it is relatively short and broad and of little height 
 (Pigs. % and 5). I published, fifteen years since, a general 
 work upon this race — Mudes stir les Mincopies et sur le 
 race negrito en general.^^ Later, M. Giglioli attacked the 
 
 Fig. 2. — Skulls or Mincopy and Papuan Superposed. 
 
 same subject.^" But we do not give the same meaning to 
 the words. The Italian anthropologist comprises in his 
 l^egrito race all populations of little stature — Asiatic, 
 Oceanic, and African, including the Bushmen. The ques- 
 
 * It may not be useless to give the meaning of the words here 
 employed to characterise these skulls. They all express a relation- 
 ship established between certain diameters. This relation is called 
 an index. When the degree of dolichocephaly or brachycephaly is 
 desired, the relation existing between the maximum transverse di- 
 ameter and the maximum antero-posterior diameter taken as unity 
 is found. To measure hypsistenocephaly, the vertical diameter is 
 
22 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 tion of the Negritos has also been treated in a general way 
 by F. A. Allen.' The works of Logan, which will be con- 
 sidered later, although written 
 from a point of view even more 
 general, also touch upon most of 
 the questions raised in this study. 
 The Papuans are exclusively 
 insular. They form a mass of 
 populations as continuous as that 
 sort of a habitat allows. They 
 occupy practically all of New 
 Guinea and all the Melanesian 
 archipelagoes, inlcuding the Fijis. 
 But the type of which we speak 
 is not confined within these lim- 
 its; it has representatives upon 
 many other points, and even to 
 the extremity of the ocean world. 
 Towards the west, conquest, emi- 
 gration or slavery have carried 
 Papuans to Timor, Ceram, Bouro, Gilolo, and even to 
 the eastern shores of Borneo, and have scattered them 
 over various other parts of the great Indonesian archipel- 
 agoes. Towards the north the same causes have carried 
 
 ITia. 4. — Skull of Papuan 
 FROM ToKEES Steait. One 
 fourth natural size (Mus. 
 d'liist. nat, IS'o. 4771.) 
 
 compared with the transverse diameter. A skull is hypsistenooe- 
 phalic when the former equals or exceeds the latter. As to dolicho- 
 cephaly and brachyoephaly, Brooa, I'educing the numbers first 
 adopted by Ketzius to decimal form, and multiplying the transverse 
 diameter by 100, prepared the following table of horizontal cephalic 
 indices, in which the relations are represented by a fractional 
 number : 
 
 Doliohocephals, 75 and below. 
 
 Subdolichooephals, 75-01-77-77. 
 
 Mesatioephals, 77-78-80-00. 
 
 Subbraohycephals, 80-01-83'33. 
 
 Braohyc6phals, 83'34 and upwards, 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. ^3 
 
 them into some of the secondary groups of the Carolines. 
 Towards the northeast they have reached the Sandwich 
 Islands ; towards the south- 
 west, New Zealand, where 
 they preceded the Maoris.* 
 
 Pinart brought back with 
 him from his voyages and 
 gave to the museum a skull 
 which he took from an an- 
 cient tomb on Easter Island, 
 probably contemporaneous 
 with the strange statues no- 
 ticed by all travellers.^" f 
 
 Hamy has shown that this 
 skull in the totality of its 
 cnaracters oeiongs essentially ^^^^ neighboukhood of BmAu- 
 
 to the type of those of the gonan, Luzon. One fourth nat- 
 
 best authenticated Papuans. "™i ^'^^ (^"'- '^'^'^^- "''*•' ^°- 
 
 ^ 3629). 
 
 Finally, Ten Kate has brought 
 
 a Melanesian skull gathered on the little island of Spiritu 
 
 Santo, on the eastern coast of Lower California. 
 
 * The traditions of the Maoris gathered by Sir George Grey, the 
 details given by various travellers and portraits, all witness to the 
 existence of a black ethnological element in New Zealand, but orani- 
 ology alone could permit the determination of its nature. A num- 
 ber of skulls of perfectly determined origin have permitted the solu- 
 tion of this curious problem. The museum possesses one skull from 
 New Zealand which has all the characteristics of the Papuan, and con- 
 trasts in a remarkable manner with Maori skulls, as well as two dried 
 heads, whose tattooing in itself would be proof of their origin, which 
 have the woolly hair of Oceanic Negroes. I will add that the most 
 dolichocephalic skull known was brought from New Zealand and 
 given to Mr. Huxley, who has described iV The horizontal index 
 of this skull is 63'54 ; its vertical index, 113-11. It is then, at once, 
 extremely dolichocephalic and hypsistenocephalic. 
 
 fThe reader who desires further details will find necessary 
 references in the bibliographical notes accompanying the excellent 
 
24 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Thus the Papuan race has extended outwards in all 
 directions, and has had its days of conquest. ■ On the other 
 hand, it has been pressed in upon at various points, espe- 
 cially by the Malay and Polynesian races ; ^'*' "^ but on 
 the whole it has preserved its area entire, and forms a 
 relatively compact mass. Immigrations, either peaceful 
 or v.'arlike, have nowhere affected it in a very marked way, 
 unless at the Fijis, and at the east end of New Guinea. 
 On the contrary, it has by its migrations mingled its blood 
 with that of some very different and remote populations.* 
 
 It is quite the reverse with the Negritos. The area 
 occupied by this race is almost as extended as that of the 
 Papuans, It is even greater, if one cuts off from the Pap- 
 uan area the Sandwich Islands, Easter Islands, and New 
 Zealand ; it is at once insular and continental. But 
 upon the mainland, as well as in the archipelagoes, the 
 Negrito tribes are almost always isolated one from an- 
 other, and as if submerged in the midst of populations of 
 very different ethnic origin. 
 
 Moreover, wherever this contact exists one finds the 
 little blacks located in the least favourable localities of the 
 country where they live. I shall later return to this fact, 
 and to conclusions which must be drawn from it. 
 
 From what I have Just said of their habitat, the Ne- 
 gritos naturally fall into two geographical groups, one 
 continental, the other insular. Let us first consider the 
 latter. 
 
 monograph of Papuan skulls inserted in the work just quoted, a 
 monograph entirely the work of M. Hamy. 
 
 * At the exposition which accompanied the Congress of Geograph- 
 ical Sciences of Paris, in 1875, M. Hamy exhibited a map represent- 
 ing the present distribution of human races in the Indian archi- 
 pelago. He presented a rSsumS of the result of his studies in a 
 communication made to the subsection of anthropology. The lim- 
 its of the Papuan and Negrito races are shown upon it." 
 
Fig. 6. — Pobtbait of Aeta Chief from the Mountains of Mariveles, 
 Luzon. (From photograph of MM. Montano and Key.) 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 25 
 
 When the Spaniards began to settle the Philippines 
 they met in the interior of Luzon, by the side of the 
 Tagals of Malay origin, dark men of -whom some had 
 smooth hair, while others possessed the woolly head-cover- 
 ing of the African Negroes.'^' These last alone were true 
 blacks, whom the conquerors called Negritos del monte 
 (little Negroes of the mountain), on account of their 
 remarkably little stature and their habitat (Figs. 6 and 
 9). The local name was Aigtas or Inagtas, which seems 
 to mean Hacks, and from which is derived that of Mtas, 
 generally adopted. One shortly recognised that this same 
 human race was met with at other points in the archi- 
 pelago, and that it entirely peopled some small islands, 
 among them the island Bougas, which is also called for 
 this reason Isla de los Negros. In these different local- 
 ities the Aetas change their name, and are called Ates at 
 Panay,* Hillrouas and Mamanousa at Mindanao,f etc. 
 
 As the archipelagoes of these eastern seas have become 
 better known, our little black race has been found almost 
 everywhere. Doubts upon some points left by the first 
 information received on this subject have almost always 
 been removed by later observations more and more 
 exact. Thus the existence of Negritos at Formosa has 
 been until recently denied, in spite of the direct testimony 
 of various Dutch and English travellers. But in 1808 
 Schetelig presented to the Ethnological Society of London 
 
 * Rienzi has described, under the name of Melano-Pygmees, two 
 individuals belonging to a. race of Panay less than four feet ten 
 Inches in stature. Their hair not crinkled and their skin less black 
 than that of Negroes, shows crossing ; but the smallness of stature, 
 without being extreme, shows us that this character persists in part 
 in spite of the crossing."' Elsewhere Lafond assigns them a much 
 less stature.^' 
 
 f It is under this last name that Dr Mnntano has discovered Ne- 
 gritos in the peninsula, northeast, near Lake Ma'init. 
 
26 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 two well-authenticated . skulls whose characters leave no 
 ground for objection. There exists a skull,* also, which 
 has enabled Hamy and myself to confirm the testimony of 
 Eienzi, of Lafond de Lurcy, of the Bishop of Labuan, etc., 
 and to affirm that true Negritos inhabit the interior of 
 Borneo.'^ 
 
 Finally, from the testimony of Earl and the various au- 
 thors cited by him, it results that the Negritos inhabit the 
 mountainous parts of the Sandal Islands (Samba), Xulla, 
 Bourou, Ceram, Flores, Solor, Pantar, Lombleu, Ombay, 
 the eastern peninsula of Celebes, etc. 
 
 I have elsewhere indicated the greater part of the 
 principal points where the actual existence of Negri- 
 tos has been established.'^^ I have at the same time 
 remarked that in this maritime world Sumatra and Java 
 are the only large islands where they have left no other 
 traces than some doubtful mixed breeds, and the remains 
 of an industry which appears not to have passed beyond 
 the age of stone. f It is in Java that the destruction has 
 probably been the most sudden and complete. These un- 
 fortunate little Negroes could but disappear before the 
 Malay races, who joined to arms more terrible and to 
 their murderous instincts a civilisation capable of erecting 
 the thousand temples and of carving the bas-reliefs of 
 Bdr6-Boudour.\ 
 
 * This skull forms part of the Museum of Lyons, and I am glad 
 to here thank M. Lortet for placing it at our disposition for descrip- 
 tion and illustration. It bears its own certificate of origin, for its 
 surface is covered with those arabesques and designs which the 
 Dyaks engrave upon the skull of their victims. (Crania Ethnica, 
 p. 195, Figs. 213, 213.) 
 
 \ I now believe that I was too hasty in formerly considering as 
 true Negritos the AUhalo-pygmees, seen at Sumatra by Rienzi. They 
 are probably only mixed-bloods. 
 
 I I cannot write this name without mentioning the magnificent 
 publication of the Netherlands Government so generously placed by 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 27 
 
 The Sunda Islands form the southern limit of the Ne- 
 grito area. On the north, Formosa is the last place where 
 the race of which we speak has preserved all its charac- 
 teristics ; but it reveals its ancient existence beyond this 
 island by the traces it has left among the present popula- 
 tions. In the little archipelago of Loo-Choo,* Basil Hall 
 found at certain points " some men very black by the side 
 of others who were almost white." Ancient traditions in 
 Japan speak of formidable black savages who were sub- 
 dued and driven away only with great difficulty."^ Thanks 
 to the more kindly instincts of the conquerors, these Ne- 
 gritos of the north were not exterminated, as in Java. 
 Kempfer and Siebold have reported the difEerences in 
 colour and hair which certain classes of the population 
 present, and the latter mentions particularly the black 
 colour and the more or less crinkly hair of the inhabit- 
 ants of the southeast coast. 
 
 Long since, I mentioned these characters as confirming 
 the opinion first propounded by Prichard relative to the 
 intervention of a black element in Japan, and this ele- 
 ment can only be referred to the Negrito race. The ex- 
 amination of a Japanese skull from the Broca collection 
 has fully confirmed these conclusions. Studied by Hamy 
 and myself, it has presented a mixture of features, of 
 which the most characteristic clearly betray this ethnic 
 orio-in."''"'"' f The details given by Dr. Maget have fully 
 
 it at the disposition of men whom it interests from any point of 
 view— Boro-Boudour, in the Island of Java, by F. C. Wilson and C. 
 Leemans. Leyden, 1874. This book has now even greater interest 
 than at the time of its publication. The Boro-Boudour appears to 
 have been, if not destroyed, partly ruined since the eruption of 
 Krakatoa. The work of Dr. Leemans has preserved a faithful and 
 detailed representation. 
 
 * Lieu Kiou = Lieou Tohou, Lieu Tchou, Lieou-Tcheou, Riu 
 Kiu.'8< 
 
 t This skull, secured by Dr. Noury, of the navy, in a cemetery of 
 
28 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 confirmed these conclusions. He has discovered and de- 
 scribed veritable Negrito metis living in the midst of 
 Japanese populations. I have found incontestable traces 
 of Negrito blood upon various skulls from the Mariannes."* 
 But in Micronesia the mixture of races seems to stop. 
 The black element which recurs in the Carolines appears 
 to belong essentially to the Papuan type. 
 
 The extension of JSTegritos in Melanesia is much more 
 considerable. Here their tribes are mingled and in con- 
 tact with those of Papuans probably through the whole of 
 New Guinea. To the testimonies I have already cited 
 I can to-day add others. 
 
 Beccari declares that it is not uncommon in New 
 Guinea to meet natives of small stature who, judging by 
 descriptions, might be taken for Negritos. It is true that 
 he has not seen any tribe composed wholly of individuals 
 presenting this character ; * but the map published by one 
 of his compatriots represents the Karons, or Karonis, as 
 occupying a chain of mountains parallel to the north 
 coast of the great peninsula of the northwest; and three 
 skulls of these Karons, studied by Hamy,have shown him 
 the essential characters of the Negrito head.^^' 
 
 M. Meyer, who has sojourned in these regions, has, how- 
 ever, supported the opinion of Wallace and Earl. He con- 
 siders, with them, all the Eastern blacks as of one race. 
 But the German traveller has brought from Kordo, in the 
 island of Mysore, a magnificent collection of skulls, whose 
 characters and measurements he has made known.*"' **^ 
 
 Hamy has discussed this mass of facts, and shown that 
 in themselves the figures published by that author bring 
 one more proof to the support of our common view. If 
 
 criminals at Yokohama, is of perfectly ascertained origin. Hamy 
 has justly remarked that the very place whence it has been taken 
 proves that it has belonged to an individual of the lower classes. 
 * Extract from a letter written at Ternate, March 6, 1876.™ 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 29 
 
 the greater part of the skulls of Kordo are plainly Papuan, 
 if others seem to show mixture, there are still others 
 which show beyond doubt the presence of the Negrito ele- 
 ment, pure or almost pure.^*', The study of the measure- 
 ments taken by Dr. Comrie leg-d to the same conclusion.^' 
 
 Moreover, as the materials become more numerous — 
 thanks to the efforts of courageous travellers — the last de- 
 fenders of the ethnologic unity of the New Guineans are 
 themselves coming around to the opinion which Hamy 
 and myself adopted years ago.^' '°^' '''*• ^"^ 
 
 This mixture recurs in the islands of Torres Strait. 
 The museum possesses a head brought from the island of 
 Toud, or Warrior Island, by the companions of Dumont 
 d'Urville, which reproduces the essential features of the 
 Negrito. It was collected in a tomb where it was mingled 
 with others presenting all the characters of Papuans. We 
 find again, then, at the southern extremity of New Guinea, 
 the juxtaposition of the two races which we established in 
 the northwest. "8- "' 
 
 Thanks to D'Albertis, we follow the Negrito type as 
 far as to Epa, situated upon the eastern coast of the Gulf 
 of Papua, and consequently even into the great elongated 
 peninsula which terminates New Guinea on the southeast. 
 There the Italian traveller saw an individual of mature 
 years, well formed, elegantly proportioned, the body cov- 
 ered with woolly hair, and possessing head hair equally 
 woolly. His skin was extremely black. He presented 
 very little or no prognathism. His stature was, moreover, 
 very small, and was not more than four feet nine inches. 
 In the concurrence of these features it is impossible not 
 to recognise an excellently characterised pure-blood Ne- 
 grito. This individual belonged to a tribe of the interior, 
 living probably among the mountains, represented upon 
 the map as being located to the east of Epa.^ 
 
 Finally, to the southeast of Epa, at Port Jloresby, 
 4 
 
30 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Lawes shows us in the midst of real Papuan tribes a 
 mountain tribe of little stature, decidedly dark, whose feet 
 and hands are remarkably small. All these features are 
 essentially Negrito, and it is more than probable that the 
 Kolari belong to this race.^" 
 
 Although not distinguishing the Negritos from the 
 Papuans, Lawes has, like D'Albertis, the merit of insist- 
 ing upon the variety which the human races of New 
 Guinea present. 
 
 There the area of residence belonging to our little Ne- 
 groes seems to stop. Pickering, who, perhaps, first clearly 
 distinguished them from the Papuans, was mistaken in 
 prolonging it farther to the southeast into the New Heb- 
 rides.^^' The eminent American anthropologist has 
 probably taken account only of some external characters, 
 particularly that of stature. He has not paid attention 
 to the far more important osteological characters, of 
 which one did not appreciate the full value at the epoch 
 when he wrote. Hamy, in the craniological monograph 
 which I have just cited, has studied one by one the skulls 
 proceeding from the different Melanesian islands. Out- 
 side of New Guinea, when the Papuan type is altered it 
 is not by a Negrito, but by a Polynesian element.*" Never- 
 theless, it may perhaps be necessary to extend the south- 
 eastern limit of the Negrito area as far as to the province 
 of Queensland, Australia. There, according to Odoardo 
 Beccari, natives with crinkly hair are found who might 
 indeed be ethnologic neighbours of the more or less mixed 
 islanders of Torres Strait.^* 
 
 The western element of the Oceanic Negritos is much 
 more easy to fix than the preceding. It is in the Bay 
 of Bengal, at the Nicobar Islands, and in the Anda- 
 mans that we find it." In the first of these two little 
 archipelagoes the Negritos have undergone the same lot 
 as in the Indonesian islands. Attacked by the Malays, they 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 31 
 
 have in part been exterminated, and inhabit at present 
 only the mountains of the interior. ^^-^ On the other hand, 
 they have preserved complete independence, and have re- 
 mained pure from all mixture in the Andaman Islands- 
 above all, in the three islands which collectively were for a 
 long time called the Grand 
 Andaman — until the English 
 chose this isolated archipelago 
 as the site of one of their penal 
 establishments. But even this 
 has been of value to us in giv- 
 ing numerous and precise facts 
 regarding the Mincopies. 
 
 Let us now find the traces of 
 these Negritos on the Asiatic 
 continent whose island colonies 
 stretch from Formosa to the 
 Andaman Islands. 
 
 The existence of Negroes — 
 that is, men with black skin 
 and woolly hair — on the conti- 
 nent has been denied, even quite recently, by some emi- 
 nent geographers, yet numerous witnesses, evidently trust- 
 worthy, do not permit a doubt of it. Since 1820, Macinnes 
 and Crawford have described, as presenting the typical 
 characters of the race, two natives of the little kingdom of 
 Kedah, in the peninsula of Malacca."'^" Other travellers 
 were not slow in confirming these details, and Prichard, 
 while fighting a theory to which I shall have to return, 
 admits that the Samangs, Simangs, and Semangs of this 
 region are true Negroes. 
 
 The description which Anderson, former secretary of 
 the government of Penang, has given of one of them is 
 most characteristic. This individual, thirty years old, meas- 
 ured only l'?441 ; his hair was woolly and tufted, his skin 
 
 Fig. 7. — Sktill of Minoopt 
 
 FROM THE GeAND AkDAMAN. 
 
 One fourth natural size. 
 
32 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 was jet-black and glossy, his lips thick, his nose flat, his 
 belly protruding. The author adds that he exactly re- 
 sembled two natives of the Andamaus whom he had pre- 
 viously seen.* These Semangs, then, are not only Negroes, 
 bat true Negritos. This opinion is at present accepted by 
 all anthropologists who have occupied themselves with 
 this question. Eeservation should be made, however, in 
 regard to their purity of blood, and it should be admitted 
 that the type of the Semangs, as well as that of analogous 
 tribes, has often been altered by crossing. 
 
 To the south of Kedah are other savage tribes, whose 
 characters have been variously described by travellers. 
 These variations explain themselves. Here, as well as 
 in the Philippine Islands and elsewhere, the Negro race 
 has been crossed with a population of a different origin, 
 which resulted in numerous half breeds. But even among 
 those tribes where this crossing has taken place there are 
 frequently found individuals who have preserved all the 
 characteristic features of • the type. A photograph by 
 Alph. Pichon, former secretary of embassy, and two 
 other photographs kindly given to me by M. de la Croix, 
 permit affirming this. All three are now part of the col- 
 lection of the museum. 
 
 The first one represents a group of Jakuns, five men 
 and two women, from the neighbourhood of Singapore. 
 One of the two women is essentially Malay, but her wavy 
 hair and some of her features would betray a slight cross- 
 ing; the other woman is an out-and-out Negrito. One of 
 the men has perfectly straight hair; but that of the 
 others, and especially of a warrior and his son, is abso- 
 lutely woolly, and the ensemble of their features reminds 
 one of an Aeta, drawn by Meyer."' "' 
 
 The photographs of de la Croix were taken in the 
 province of Perak by M. de Saint-Pol Lias. They rep- 
 resent two groups of Sakaies, who individually vary in the 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 33 
 
 way which I have just indicated. Five out of ten individ- 
 uals have straight hair (Fig. 9) ; two seem to have crinkly 
 hair ; that of the 
 
 t 
 
 _f 
 
 others is decidedly 
 woolly (Fig. 8). We 
 must add that M. 
 Montane, who had 
 just seen the Negri- 
 tos at Luzon and 
 Miudano, has found 
 all the character- 
 istics of this tribe 
 in some of the Sa- 
 kaies. 
 
 These three pho- 
 tographs are very 
 important, because 
 they testify to the 
 variation in hair in 
 one and the same 
 tribe. This fact ex- 
 plains the differ- 
 ences between de- 
 scriptions and be- 
 tween the opinions 
 of difEerent authors. 
 For instance, in the 
 note which I just 
 quoted, Anderson 
 describes three Sa- 
 kaies belonging to a 
 half-civilised tribe, 
 and speaks of their 
 complexion as being 
 analogous to that of the Malays, of their hair as being 
 
 Fig. 8. — Sakaies of Pebak. (After a photo- 
 graph of M. Bro de Saint-Pol Lias, given 
 by M. de la Croix.) 
 
34 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 tnfted, not woolly, and of a stature varying from I?657 
 
 to 1"°474.* 
 
 It is evident that this description might lead into 
 error, and make us fail to recog- 
 nise the presence of the Ne- 
 grito blood, which is testified 
 to by photography. 
 
 Thanks to it, we can also 
 appreciate at their real value 
 other materials, such as the 
 two photographs of Semangs 
 published by Giglioli, after the 
 photographs of Colonel Yule.^' 
 Neither of them, to judge from 
 the engravings, were pure Ne- 
 gritos. The hair of the man, 
 native of the province of Welles- 
 ley, seems to have been nearly 
 straight or only wavy ; that of 
 the woman, falling almost to 
 her shoulders, seems to be quite 
 crinkly. But there is nothing 
 in either one of them to indi- 
 cate a truly woolly head, and 
 these portraits could furjiish 
 an argument to those who deny 
 the existence of true Negroes 
 in these regions. To my mind, 
 nevertheless, they testify to the 
 presence of Negrito blood in 
 the individuals represented by 
 them ; only the type has be- 
 
 Fio. 9.— Sakaie. (After a photo- come changed by crossing, 
 graph of M. Bro de Saint- rpj^^ ,g mentioned be- 
 
 Pol Lias, given by M. do la jt i 
 
 Croix.) fore are crosses. But in the 
 
GENERAL HISTOEY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 35 
 
 great highland region between Perak, Selangou, and Ke- 
 lantan, in Malacca, there are still one or more witnesses of 
 the ancient population which have remained entirely pure. 
 There are tribes, which the Sakaies treat as savages, inhab- 
 iting caves and using only stone in making their utensils 
 and weapons. These savages are black, have crinkly hair, 
 are very short, and dress themselves with leaves hung about 
 their bodies. They run away as soon as they perceive a 
 stranger. De Morgan has seen fires lighted by these Ne- 
 gritos, but has not been able to approach them.^*^' De la 
 Croix has gathered identical information on the spot. 
 
 As the Malay, so has the Annamite peninsula its rep- 
 resentatives of the Negrito type, known under the name 
 of Mois or Moys. Logan long since considered this fact 
 as demonstrated.'* The doubts so often expressed in re- 
 gard to this seem to me scarcely tenable in view of the old 
 proofs recalled by M. Giglioli himself,* of those which 
 Earl obtained from the Annamites and Cochin-Chinese, 
 and of the communications of two French physicians of the 
 navy to Hamy. These last stated to my learned colleague 
 that some Negro tribes live near the northern frontiers of 
 the Cochin-Chinese province of Bien-Hoa.'"' The latest 
 . infoi-mation furnished by Allen seems to me to remove the 
 last doubts. One of the authors quoted by him (Tomlin's 
 Geography) describes the Moys as having woolly hair, a 
 truly black skin, and a face resembling that of the Kaffirs, f 
 It seems to me strange that a writer should have been so 
 explicit without reason. Everything indicates that the 
 
 * M. Giglioli*' declares himself to be veiy sceptical as to the exist- 
 ence of true Negritos in Annam. The portrait of a Chong, native 
 of Siani, published by Crawfurd, and which the eminent Italian an- 
 thropologist has mentioned, seems at least to justify conjecturing to 
 the contrary. 
 
 f " Woolly haired, very black, and savage, and with faces re- 
 sembling the Kaffirs." 
 
36 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 black tribes of Annam must resemble those of Malacca, 
 and sid€ by side with the true Negro there are individuals 
 deviating more or less from the pure type. Hence the 
 diverse and apparently contradictory opinions that have 
 been entertained for so long in regard to the Malay pen- 
 insula.' 
 
 We are much better informed on the subject of the 
 populations of the peninsula this side of the Ganges. The 
 Tamil books, says Logan, tell us that the original inhab- 
 itants had hair " in tufts," which can only refer to Ne- 
 groes.'^ Evidence, the descriptions of a number of trav- 
 ellers, confirmed by photographs, drawings, busts, and 
 skulls, explains everything that is true in these old texts. 
 These various proofs show us in the whole of southern 
 and central India peoples with a more or less black skin, 
 among whom are individuals whose woolly hair testifies to 
 their at least relative purity of blood, and clearly indi- 
 cates the nature of one of the ethnic elements which 
 have given rise to these peoples. 
 
 The same means of study permit us to specify to what 
 branch of the !N"egro trunk this element belongs, and to 
 affirm that it is essentially Negrito. 
 
 Justice Campbell holds that all of the tribes which he 
 calls aborigines are physically related to the Negrito type.^^ 
 He gives a resume of their characteristics, and specially 
 mentions their figure, short and slight ; * their complexion, 
 truly black ; their hair tangled, at times curly, and even 
 woolly. This latter characteristic is often seen in the 
 drawings made after the photographs, although the au- 
 
 * " To the Aetas and Mincopies has often been ascribed a pro- 
 truding belly. I do not find this either in the photographs of 
 forty-eight Negritos of the Philippine Islands taken at Luzon by M. 
 Montano, nor in those of the seven Negritos which I owe to Colonel 
 Tytler. nor in the sixteen individuals of the same race represented 
 in the phototypes of Mr. Dobson.*' 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 37 
 
 thor does not mention it in his description, and has e\ien 
 sometimes stated the contrary. Thus, in speaking of the 
 Santals, who inhabit the basin of the Ganges east and 
 west of Bhagalpore, Colonel Dal ton mentions their straight 
 hair.^* But the drawing, which is reproduced from a pho- 
 tograph, shows two persons of this tribe whose heads are 
 covered with tufts as rounded and tight as those of any 
 Negrito, and one of them is a true Mincopy, while the 
 other is nearer like the Aeta. What the same author says 
 about the hair of the Oraons would leave room for much 
 doubt ; but of five figures of these tribes represented on 
 his plate, one woman has all the features of the Negrito, 
 and at least half-woolly hair.^* * The same can be ob- 
 served in the portrait of Dhoba Abor, of a tribe of the 
 upper Brahmapootra. In the text, Dalton says nothing 
 about the hair; in the drawing, copied from a photo- 
 graph, it is that of a Negro of pure blood, although the 
 Negrito type here has manifestly changed by crossing 
 with Mogul blood. I will cite also the plate where Fryer 
 has represented the Mulchers from the district of Coim- 
 batore, in the province of Cochin.^* These individuals 
 are seen of very difEerent statures, proportions, and fea- 
 tures, but the woman to the right is a true Aeta ; she has 
 the hair which is characteristic of all of this race, and the 
 features of the Philippine sub type, f 
 
 * Frontispiece. I am so much more certain that I am not mis- 
 taken in this opinion, as, in a note addressed to Campbell, Colonel 
 Dalton declares himself to have seen woolly heads among the 
 Oraons. 
 
 t It is to be seen above that my opinions are founded on the 
 comparison which I have been able to make of these various draw- 
 ings with seventy-one photographs. Therefore they may. I believe, 
 be received with confidence. This abundance of materials has en- 
 abled me to establish certain differences between the Aetas and the 
 Minoopies. The former have coarser features ; their nose is more 
 flattened at the root, thicker and broader in general. They have 
 
38 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 • The Bandra Lokh or Djangal of the forests of Ariiar- 
 kantak of whom M. Rousselet has brought us a por- 
 trait,"^' "^* are doubtfully referred to any subtype of Ne- 
 gro (Fig. 10). The features are not those of a Negrito. 
 There is something in them which reminds one of certain 
 Papuans. In his case, misery and hunger have altered his 
 form and discoloured his skin ; but the woolly hair, which 
 our countryman has not forgotten to mention in his de- 
 scription, leaves no doubt as to the general type to which 
 this individual should be referred. 
 
 In the work which we have published with Hamy "^ 
 we have put the profile of a young Ghond, modelled by 
 the Schlagintweits, beside the profile of a Mincopy taken 
 from a photograph of Colonel Tytler and that of a young 
 Aeta girl drawn by Choris.^' I here reproduce this draw- 
 ing (Fig. 11). It will be easily seen that the Dra vidian 
 is just about a mean between the two insular types, al- 
 though coming nearer the Aeta than the Mincopy ; and 
 Colonel Dalton has told us that the Ghonds have the hair, 
 the skin, and physiognomy of the Negro. 
 
 To these proofs, founded on their external characteris- 
 tics, may be added those which result from the study of 
 the skulls. Among the Negritos generally the head and 
 face of the skeleton usually- show very peculiar charac- 
 teristics. In an excellent work Flower has pointed out 
 the extreme similarity of twenty-four skulls which he had 
 at his disposal, and declared that he would be quite sure 
 
 also thinner legs than the Andamanese. Altogether the latter are 
 endowed with a finer physique. The Negritos of India seem to be 
 connected more with the subtype of the Aetas than with that of 
 the Mincopies. 
 
 * The appellation Ho, used here, must be a general term, which 
 may be applied to very different races. Hodgson uses it in speaking 
 of a people of Singhbhiim, whom he describes as being remarliable 
 for their clear complexion and beauty of features." 
 
Fio. 10— Djangal of Hikgouuja. (From a drawing by Eousselet.) 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 39 
 
 never to confound the head of an Andaman with that of 
 any other race." Hamy and I have shown that the Aeta 
 head possesses all its most characteristic features. These 
 features are of such a nature as to be easily recognised 
 even when attenuated or brought into relation with others 
 as the result of crossing.***' *^' They make it possible to 
 
 Fio. n. — Profile of Boda, Ghoud of Sohagpobe A, compared with that 
 of a Mincopy woman, B, and an Aeta woman, 0. {i natural size.) 
 
 follow and recognise the !N"egrito type even when dis- 
 guised, as it were, by mixture of blood, change of lan- 
 guage, religion, or customs. Behold some examples : A 
 French traveller, Leschenault de la Tour, collected about 
 1820, in the mountainous region of Cattalam, south of 
 Madura, a skull which was deposited in the museum.*" 
 Besides some entirely individual characteristics, it presents 
 all the features of the Mincopies (Fig. 12). 
 
40 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 In his excellent work on the ethnology of India, 
 Campbell declares that he does not quite know what to 
 do with the Bengali. A skull which I owe to Dr. Mouat 
 enables me to solve this problem.* It is that of a pariah 
 woman, twenty-five years old, from the neighbourhood of 
 the capital of Bengal. Compared 
 with the skull of a Mincopy man 
 which Colonel Tytler sent me, I 
 find that in reality it does not 
 differ from it at all, except in 
 sexual characters. The funda- 
 mental characteristics of the type 
 are not only not diminished, but 
 sometimes exaggerated, so that if 
 one were not sure about the origin 
 of the skull it would be supposed 
 to have come from the Anda- 
 
 Fio. 12. — Skdll of Female i nii ■ ■ i ■ i i. 
 
 WesritooetheCaitalam maiis.t This cramological obser- 
 MouNTAiNs. One fourth vation testifies to the presence of 
 natural size (Mu3. d'hist. the Negrito element in the heart 
 
 nat., No. 3o02.) ° 
 
 of Bengal, and confirms and ex- 
 plains the traditions gathered by Allen in regard to the 
 ancient existence of dwarfs, supposed to be cannibals, in 
 these regions.^ J 
 
 Almost at the other extremity of the Ganges basin, in the 
 district of Malwar, the Coorumbas are living, who in the 
 
 * Dr. Mouat has published several most interesting works on the 
 Mincopies. I will only mention his classical work, Adventures and 
 Researches an^ong the Andaman Islands, 1863. 
 
 f I have said a few words about this skull in my Etudes sur les 
 Mincopies. It is given in front view and of natural size in the Atlas 
 of Crania Bthnioa, pi. xvii. 
 
 ^ A number of times the Negritos have been accused of man eat- 
 ing. As they became better known it became evident that they 
 were not. Yet it would be possible that when they were pursued by 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 41 
 
 jungles of Wynood seem to, have preserved the purity of 
 their Negrito blood. Samuells, in the short note which 
 he devotes to them, tells us that they are black, very short, 
 and have woolly hair. These little Negroes are remarkable 
 for their activity and their courage, which causes them to 
 be in demand as shikaris}^^ But not only in the heart 
 of India can the type that occupies us be found. It can 
 be traced farther north, and even to the base of the Him- 
 alayas. I have already mentioned a portrait of one, Dhoba 
 Abor, published by Colonel Dalton. These tribes live in 
 the eastern extremity of Assam, on the banks of rivers 
 which empty into the upper Brahmapootra. Quite a 
 good deal to the west, an English traveller, Traill, has 
 found in Kamaon, by the side of Brahman castes and 
 Kajpouts, a class entirely difEerent from all the others. 
 These are the Doms, of whom it is said that they are ex- 
 tremely black, and that many of them have hair more or 
 less woolly.* The Doms live west of the Kali Eiver. 
 Still farther west live the Chamangs, Chamars, or Kalis, 
 wlio seem to possess the same characters.^' 
 
 Certainly neither the Tibetans nor the Aryans could 
 have given the Doms and their western neighbours this 
 truly black skin, and hair which reminds one of wool. 
 
 pitiless invaders they would have been compelled by misery to feed 
 on human flesh. It is known that similar things have happened in 
 Africa among tribes previously pastoral, as a consequence of the 
 devastation of Chaka and Dingaan. 
 
 * Many having curly hair, inclining to wool, and being all ex- 
 tremely black.'*^ These exact details, given by a traveller who has 
 seen them himself, are the more important, as Campbell, in his re- 
 markable Memoir on the Ethnology of India, declares himself as not 
 knowing any people in these regions which could be connected with 
 those that he calls aborigines, and whom he considers as all having 
 more or less Negrito blood.''' Prichard quotes the preceding pas- 
 sage twice. Once he reproduces it exactly; the other time he re- 
 places extremely by nearly, which is quite different. 
 
42 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 This latter character is of the greatest importance. In 
 the crossing of two races of which the one has ellip- 
 tical and the other round hair this latter character very 
 soon becomes preponderant in the half breeds. The ob- 
 servations made by Semper in the Philippine Islands 
 agree with those made before in America and in eastern 
 Eussia on this point. The same traveller, confirming the 
 oldest descriptions, has recognised that the black skin still 
 continues after the hair has already been greatly modified. 
 A somewhat woolly head, then, announces the presence of 
 Negro blood hardly attenuated.'^^ 
 
 As regards Negritos and their half breeds, another 
 characteristic is of the greatest importance. This is 
 their stature. All pure Negritos are very small. Travel- 
 lers are unanimous upon this point. I shall later give 
 some exact measurements of individuals of this race, both 
 pure and mixed. Here I limit myself to remarking that 
 in mixed races the stature decreases in the same meas- 
 ure as the other characters by which the individuals ex- 
 amined approach the Negrito type become more pro- 
 njunced. 
 
 Thus Eoubaud has given as the mean stature of Dra- 
 vidians with straight hair and chocolate-coloured skin, 
 l^ei for men and 1"56 for women, while the stature of 
 the Pouleyers, with nearly black skin, and hair sometimes 
 straight, sometimes curly and even crinkly, lias decreased 
 to l'?61."'= 
 
 So also, in speaking of the Bhils, with straight hair 
 and skin of the colour of slightly burned coffee, Rousselet 
 says that they are of average stature.*^* But Colonel 
 Sealy, who has come in contact with Bhils having very 
 dark skin* and curly hair, adds that they are small, f 
 
 * "Of very dark complexion.'' 
 
 f " Of short stature " (quoted by Prichard).'" 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 43 
 
 The Gounds, darker and uglier than the Bhils, rarely 
 measure l?ti3 or l'?68. With the Puttouas the stature 
 descends to 1?57 in mei;i and l^SQl in women.* 
 
 The stature of the Mintiras of Johore, in the south of 
 
 . Fig. 13. — BnsT or Okioit, NEGEiTO-PAPUAif of Tidore — Pkoeile. i nat- 
 ural size. (Mus. d'hist. nat., No. 880.) 
 
 Malacca, who have sometimes straight and sometimes curly 
 hair, varies from If 63 to 1"47, and the average is l'?58." 
 
 Wallace attributes to the Semangs a stature of 1^266 
 to 1?416. 
 
 I think I have said enough to demonstrate that, in the 
 
 * I must remark that another element, very different from' the 
 Negritos, may shorten the stature. It may be supplied by some 
 small thougrh very robust Tibetan peoples; but in this case the 
 skin should become lighter instead of darker. This seems to be the 
 ease with the ToulcoUs, studied by M. Roubaud. who in connection 
 with a yellowish-white skin and thick-set forms, have an average 
 height of l-^ea. 
 5 
 
44 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 midst of these mixed peoples of the great peninsula this 
 side of the Ganges and in the adjacent countries, the Ne- 
 grito type betrays itself at every 
 step by some one of its funda- 
 mental characteristics, and oc- 
 casionally reappears in its pure 
 state. Farther on I shall point 
 out the consequences of this 
 fact. 
 
 In fact, at the present time 
 even the Negrito race, pure or 
 mixed, extends in the sea from 
 the extreme southeast of New 
 Guinea to the archipelago of 
 the Andaman Islands, and from 
 the Sunda Islands to Japan. 
 On the land it extends from 
 Annam and the peninsula of 
 Malacca to the western Ghauts, 
 and from Cape Comorin to the 
 Himalayas. 
 
 The race whose history we- 
 are sketching has not remained 
 the same throughout the im- 
 mense area to which it fell heir. 
 External characters vary consid- 
 erably between some Negritos 
 of New Guinea and the Indian 
 archipelago on the one hand, 
 and those of the Philippine and 
 Andaman Islands on the other. 
 
 "We know the former by the 
 description and full figure 
 which Crawfurd has pub- 
 
 FiG. 14. — Negrito-Papuan. i ■ i j hk , i » i ■ t 
 
 (After Crawfurd.) lisned," the accuracy of which 
 
GENEEAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 45 
 
 has been attested by Earl, and which I here reproduce 
 (Fig. 14) ; also by a bust modelled by Dumoutier, of 
 which I give the profile (Fig. 13).^" As to the latter, the 
 old drawings of Choris and numerous photographs of the 
 present time furnish everything desirable in the way of 
 
 Fig. 15. — Skull of a Negrito-Papuan of Borneo, forming part of 
 A Dyak trophy. 
 
 materials. These two secondary types present a strongly 
 marked contrast. The N'egrito of Crawfurd has a much 
 lighter skin than the Aetas and Mincopies ; his nose is 
 flatter, his chin more retreating, his loins are not so well 
 formed, his thighs and legs are not so rounded. 
 
 These differential features have seemed to me sufficient 
 to justify the division of the ISTegrito race into two 
 branches, the Oriental and Occidental branches. The 
 
46 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 study of the skull has since confirmed this view. The 
 Oriental Negrito has a little longer skull than his brother 
 from the West, although very far from possessing the ab- 
 solute dolichocephaly which characterises the Papuan.* 
 Hamy and I have considered it necessary to emphasise the 
 distinction just established, and we have considered each 
 of these secondary types as constituting a subrace. For us, 
 the little Oriental Negroes are the Negrito-Papuans ; those 
 of the West are Negritos proper. As to the latter, the 
 differences mentioned above between the Aetas and the 
 Mincopies are too slight to render it necessary to forni 
 them into two distinct groups. 
 
 The centre of population of the Negrito-Papuans 
 seems to be in New Guinea and its dependencies. The 
 Mincopies, as well as the Aetas, belong to the type of the 
 Negritos proper, which seem to have occupied a great part 
 of the Indonesian archipelagoes ; it is also this type which 
 we found again on the continent. 
 
 The limit between the two groups is, however, difficult 
 to trace. On the one side, the Negrito whom Earl had as 
 a comjDanion, and who reminded him of Crawfurd's draw- 
 ing, was a native of Gilolo (Moluccas) ; on the other side, 
 Hamy has traced as far as Timor the indubitable evi- 
 dence of Negritos proper ; f and the decidedly black skin 
 
 * In the Negrito the horizontal index varies from 80-84 ; in the 
 Negrito-Papuan of New Guinea, from 78'85-79-87 ; and in the 
 Papuans of the same island, from 69'35-'(8'23. The latter very high 
 figure was found in the skull of a woman, and suggests suspicion of 
 the influence of crossing. I have already pointed out elsewhere these 
 craniological differences, and I must recall the fact that the Papuans 
 are also taller, stronger, and more athletic than the Negritos.'" 
 
 f " All these cranial traits, eminently those of the Negrito, make of 
 the Timorese, whom we are studying, an excellent type of the race. 
 . . . All the characteristic features of the Negrito face can be found 
 in our specimen. The shapes of the various cavities are the same, 
 and the bones which surround them have the same curvatures." *' 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 4,7 
 
 of individuals seen by D'Albertis at Epa and by Lawes at 
 Port Moresby seems to indicate that they are found again 
 at the eastern extremity of New Guinea. One sees that the 
 two divisions of the race have interpenetrated, and very 
 likely are bound to each other by connecting links. 
 
 However that may be, to judge from the proofs collected 
 up to date, the area of the Negrito-Papuans is entirely 
 pelagic; the Negritos proper inhabit both islands and the 
 continent. The presence of our little Negroes over so 
 large an extent of the eastern maritime world has es- 
 pecially attracted the attention of anthropologists. To 
 explain this distribution, Eichard Owen has considered it 
 necessary to recur to the hypothesis, too often invoked, of 
 an ancient continent, at present partly submerged, and 
 which has left as traces of its existence plateaus and moun- 
 tain chains, which alone project above the water.* I be- 
 lieve it possible to account for these facts in a more sim- 
 ple manner. 
 
 The history of the peopling of Polynesia shows how it 
 has been possible for a seafaring people to reach the far- 
 thest extremities of the ocean world. f Without going 
 nearly as far in the art of navigation as the Polynesians, 
 we know that the Negritos, entirely by themselves, have 
 invented canoes the nautical qualities of which astonish 
 
 * This hypothesis would lead us to extend this continent over the 
 ■whole Negrito area, and to consequently attach to India not only 
 the islands of the Sunda and Indonesian archipelagoes — which might 
 be reasonable — but also New Guinea and divers adjacent archipela- 
 goes, which it Is impossible to admit. 
 
 f See Les Polynesiens et leurs Migrations. I have given in this 
 work a resume of the principal facts relating to the peopling of 
 Polynesia and a chart of the Polynesian migrations, completing 
 that of Hale. I returned later to the subject, and have given a 
 second edition of the chart in 1877."' I have just published a 
 third, more complete one, which shows the migrations of the 
 Papuans beside those of the Polynesians."' 
 
48 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 the English sailors. Where they have been left in pos- 
 session of their shores they have remained bold fishermen. 
 It is not diflicult to admit their migration from island to 
 island, and their scattering by winds and tempests in these 
 waters, where the islands are larger, more numerous, and 
 nearer to each other than in the Pacific. 
 
 The taking possession of these archipelagoes must have 
 been all the easier for the Negritos, as they apparently 
 have been the first inhabitants. This conclusion results 
 from a quantity of details given by travellers, which may 
 be generalised into a fact already mentioned, viz., that 
 these unfortunate little Negroes have been surrounded al- 
 most everywhere by people superior to them either in 
 physical strength or in civilisation, and who seem to have 
 considered it their task to exterminate them.* If, in some 
 rare cases, and owing to exceptional circumstances, an in- 
 ferior race might succeed in slipping into a country al- 
 ready occupied by stronger enemies, and in maintaining 
 themselves there, it is impossible to admit that this fact 
 would be repeated on a multitude of points, everywhere 
 under identical circumstances. In seeing these Negritos 
 almost always confined to the mountains of the interior of 
 islands of which other races occupy the plains and shores, 
 it is difiicult not to consider them as having been the first 
 occupants. 
 
 The continent presents similar facts in Annam and at 
 Malacca. We will not consider the former region, regard- 
 ing which we have but incomplete information. At Ma- 
 lacca the greater number of Negritos are more or less 
 crossed. Less ferocious or more feeble, their invaders 
 have crossed with them ; but the Negro blood still shows 
 itself with all appearances of purity in a great number of 
 
 * At Borneo the Dyaks chase the Negritos like wild beasts, and 
 shoot with the blowgun at the children — who take refuge on trees — 
 as they would sX a monkey.** 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 49 
 
 individuals, and we have seen that there are still little 
 groups in existence which seem to be exempt from mix- 
 ture. Analogous facts are also found in India. Yet the 
 crossing here probably dates further back, and has been 
 accomplished under more complicated conditions. 
 
 The results of crossings in India cannot alwaj's be 
 traced with anything like the same regularity which I 
 have pointed out above. "With man, as well as with 
 animals, crossing, unregulated and at haphazard, seems 
 to have its caprices. Sometimes the opposing character- 
 istics modify each other, sometimes they remain in jux- 
 taposition. Some are more easily effaced than others. 
 Thus, woolly hair often disappears, while the colour of 
 the skin is little or not at all changed. For Montano, as 
 well as for Semper, the straight-haired Negroes of Luzon, 
 spoken of by old Spanish authors, are nothing but crosses 
 of Aetas and Tagals, such as are seen at the present day. 
 All the other characters may present analogous facts. 
 
 What has happened at Luzon must have happened 
 more markedly in India, where the crossing is more an- 
 cient, and has been carried on on a greater scale and be- 
 tween more numerous and diverse ethnological elements. 
 There, also, the woolly hair must have disappeared in a 
 number of tribes, leaving as the evidence of the funda- 
 mental type — sometimes on the whole of the population, 
 sometimes on a more or less large number of individuals — 
 certain features of face, the colour of the skin, the small 
 stature, or the shape of the head.* Successive crossing 
 
 * The first three characteristics are reported among a large num- 
 ber of the Dravidian populations, and are found in the same degree 
 in others ■which do not come under the same denomination, as they 
 do not speak a language of that stock. The lack of specimens for 
 study does not allow certainty as to the fourth. It was shown 
 above that the Negrito head is found in Bengal among peoples 
 speaking an Indo-Aryan tongue. Mouat has found everywhere that 
 
50 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 with different types and the varying proportion of eth- 
 nical elements have necessarily produced among the 
 crosses predominance now of Negrito characteristics, now 
 of features derived from some other source. Atavism has 
 never lost its rights in the midst of this confusion of 
 blood, and has many times revived ancient types which 
 one might think had been effaced. 
 
 These very simple considerations account for all the 
 facts reported by travellers. They explain the extreme 
 diversity of characteristics so many times reported in one 
 population, and, consequently, the contradictory opinions 
 of authors so well summarised by Latham in regard to 
 the Eajmalis mountaineers : " Some say their physiog- 
 nomy is Mongolian, others say it is African." ^^ 
 
 As concerns mixed populations, everything depends 
 on the individuals whom the observer hais met, as is so 
 clearly shown by photographs. But these apparent con- 
 tradictions cannot longer mislead us as to the general 
 fact, and this fact can be expressed in a few words. In 
 India and its dependencies all or almost all peoples of 
 short stature and black skin are more or less crosses of 
 Negrito ; there are some in which the type is preserved, or 
 where, by force of atavism, it reappears almost in a state of 
 purity ; and, lastly, there are groups which have remained 
 pure. 
 
 The facts becoming more numerous and better estab- 
 lished each day, lead then to an order of ideas which Lo- 
 gan had already supported by serious arguments,"*'"^ which 
 I thtnk I have been one of the first to develop, and to 
 
 the peoples with whom most of the Dravidians are connected are 
 divided into dolichocephales, subdolichocephales, and mesatice- 
 phales. Only some tribes of Assam and one Mishmi alone reach to 
 subbrachycephaly.'" These facts are easily explained by the mul- 
 tiplicity of races which have successively crossed with the primitive 
 Negro population. 
 
GENERAL UISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGrMIES. 51 
 
 which Hamilton Smith,"* Campbell, Dalton, Giglioli,™ 
 xillen,^ Flower,*! etc., have more or less agreed.* 
 
 I cannot present here in detail all the facts and con- 
 siderations which have led me to these general conclu- 
 sions regarding the past of the various Negro races. They 
 will be found in a book the first part of which has already 
 appeared."' But I can give a summary of this mass of- 
 data in some propositions formulated from the standpoint 
 of modern study. 
 
 The Negro type was originally characterised in south- 
 ern Asia, of which, no doubt, it was the sole occupant for 
 an indefinite period of time. From there, the various 
 representatives of the type have migrated in various di- 
 rections, and, in passing some to the east and others to 
 ±he west, have given rise to the black populations of 
 Melanesia and of Africa. In particular, India and Indo- 
 China have belonged at first to the blacks. Invasions or 
 infiltrations of various yellow and white races have sepa- 
 rated the Negro populations, which formerly occupied a 
 continuous area, and, in mixing with them, have pro- 
 foundly altered them. The actual condition of things 
 is the final result of struggles and mixtures, of which the 
 most ancient date back to prehistoric times. The Negrito 
 subtype is one of the oldest of the race, and was at least 
 predominant in India and Indo-China when the crossing 
 began. 
 
 It would evidently be impossible to even approximately 
 fix the time of the first crossings, but we can establish 
 some of the more recent ones. The Malays had settled 
 at Luzon before their conversion to Mohammedanism, as 
 
 * It is more than a quarter of a century since I propounded at 
 the museum ideas founded on facts then Ifuown, similar to those 
 which I express here, and which have only been oontirraed and ex- 
 panded since then."^ I gave in tliat lesson a resume of my course 
 of the preceding year. 
 
52 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 they were still pagans on the arrival of the Spaniards. To 
 all appearances they must have arrived there before the 
 conquest of Madjapahit by the Mohammedans, which 
 takes us back at least to the middle of the fifteenth cen- 
 tury.* 
 
 But this settlement must have been quite recent, since 
 the first Europeans could collect traditions apcording to 
 which the Indians with straight hair — that is, the Malays 
 or their crosses, — already masters of the plain, had never- 
 theless to pay a certain tribute to the pure blacks."^ 
 
 This itself shows that the latter had been the first 
 occupants. It is, moreover, very probable that the move- 
 ment of expansion, determined in Malaysia as in Arabia 
 by the triumph of Islam, must have been fatal to our little 
 Negroes, who must have seen themselves encroached upon 
 in many islands where, up to that time, they had lived 
 in peace. 
 
 la India, the legend of Eama may suggest some con- 
 jectures. The history of the Aryan hero, though dis- 
 figured by fable, surely contains a nucleus of truth. The 
 account of the services which he receives from Hanouman 
 is very simple, if we see in this one and his monkey people 
 a Negrito chief and his tribe. This interpretation gains 
 from modern discoveries a character of probability. If it 
 is well founded, as one may believe, it would result that 
 in the heroic times of the Aryan conquest the Negritos 
 still formed flourishing populations, whose assistance the 
 newcomers did not disdain, although regarding them as 
 creatures of inferior rank.f 
 
 Eace pride and the differences of religion and customs 
 
 * The conquest of this city may be considered as marking the ad- 
 vent of Mohammedanism in Malaysia. It took place in 1478."'° 
 
 f I recognise, however, the fact that the legend of Hanouman 
 may be equally applied to any of the Dravidian tribes which had 
 already emerged from savagery. 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 63 
 
 have never prevented the Europeans, — the Anglo-Saxons 
 no more than others — from crossing with the lowest of 
 ?he Aryans were no more reserved. We see 
 their heroefe of the oldest times, the Pandavas themselves, 
 set the exmiple of these unions. Bhimasena, after having 
 vanquishefl and killed the rakcliasa Hidimba, at first re- 
 sists the /solicitations of the sister of this monster, who, 
 having become enamoured of him, shows herself under 
 the form of a charming female. But upon the represen- 
 tations of his oldest brother, Youdhichshira, the King of 
 Justice, and with the assent of his mother, he yields, and 
 spends some time in the enchanted dwelling of this Dra- 
 vidian or Negrito Armida.^^* 
 
 Thus ever since the heroic times of the Aryan race it 
 has mixed its blood with that of local populations. But 
 these mixtures certainly date farther back, and have con- 
 tinued ever since. One well knows how numerous in- 
 vasions have been, generally from the west or northwest. 
 The inevitable result was the more and more marked 
 effacement of the Negrito type. Thus all these mixed 
 races have arisen, within which the white, yellow, or 
 black type predominates alternately, and which are com- 
 prised under the common name of Dravidians. But the 
 fundamental type persists, nevertheless, in a sometimes 
 very curious and significant manner. 
 
 The Dravidian races have, from the point of view that 
 occupies us, an interest easily understood. They teach us 
 regarding the ancient extension of the Negritos. We can 
 with almost absolute certainty say that this race former- 
 ly occupied all the territory where at present we meet the 
 Dravidians. Here I must make an important remark. 
 
 * Witness the English and Australian crosses. The Tasmanian 
 race is only represented now by the half breeds of the seal fishermen, 
 and we know from Bonwick that there were often many children in 
 a family. 
 
54 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Until now, only those groups have been considered 
 Dravidians who speak one of those languages to which 
 linguists have given the name Dravidian, and the charac- 
 teristic feature of which seems to be that they are inti- 
 mately related to the Australian idioms. Physical char- 
 acteristics were not taken into account. Hence all tribes 
 speaking an Aryan or Iranian language have not been 
 considered as belonging to the ensemble of peoples occu- 
 pying us, and, consequently, as not being related to the 
 Negritos. This exclusively linguistic point of view could 
 only lead to serious ethnological errors. 
 
 For example, Jauts, who are in the opinion of Elphin- 
 stone, the first possessors of the soil, are, according to his 
 description, small, black, and ugly. Nor are their women 
 any more beautiful.*' 
 
 But this short characterisation gives all the essential 
 traits attributed by different travellers to some tribes 
 which have been considered as typically Dravidian. 
 Bishop Heber particularly speaks of the Bhils in this 
 same manner.'^ 
 
 Elphinstone's Jauts then are by their physical charac- 
 teristics related to all these populations, in the composi- 
 tion of which the Negrito element has played a more or 
 less important part. In the Punjab they are considered 
 as the oldest inhabitants of the country, just as in cen- 
 tral India the Dravidians are universally considered the 
 predecessors of the Aryans. But the Jauts do not speak 
 Dravidian ; their language is related to the Sanscrit stock, 
 and Prichard and the linguists in general have made 
 them Hindus. The physical characteristics, much less 
 easily modified than language, religion, or customs, have 
 for all anthropologists preponderating value, and I can 
 only see in the black aborigines of the Punjab representa- 
 tives of the race which farther south has likewise pre- 
 ceded the others, and shows the same characteristics. 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OF THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 55 
 
 The Jauts of Elphinstone especially inhabit the lower 
 parts of the Punjab, and consequently the neighbourhood 
 of the Indus. The Dravidian type, then, still estends at 
 least as far as the neighbourhood of the eastern bank of that 
 river. But we must go one step farther, and carry the 
 habitation of Dravidians to the western bank of the river. 
 
 Very high up the Indus, and from the point where the 
 river makes a bend towards the South, is the Damdn. 
 This province lies between the Sinde, or upper Indus, the 
 Soliman Mountains and the Salees Mountains, and the 
 Indus itself. It is, then, entirely on the right bank. One of 
 its subdivisions, the Mackelwand, occupies the whole plain 
 along the river. There lives a population which Elphin- 
 stone considers a mixture, of Belutchis and Jdts. But at 
 the same time he informs us that the inhabitants along 
 the banks of the Indus are " people of dark complexion, 
 and lean and meagre form." 
 
 We have here in four words the characteristics of the 
 Jauts of the Punjab. But the true Belutchis are large 
 and well made. So are the J4ts."° 
 
 Neither of them are nearly black, or the travellers, and 
 especially Eousselet, would have spoken of it. They can- 
 not, therefore, have given rise to the population of Mack- 
 elwand. This is evidently only a remnant of the black 
 peoples of Ctesias, a branch of the Jauts of Elphinstone, 
 who have crossed the river. They are Dravidians. 
 
 At the other extremity of the Indus, and always on 
 the right bank of the river, we meet with entirely different 
 facts, but facts which lead, nevertheless, to conclusions 
 analogous to the preceding. They are supplied by the 
 Brahouis, of whom I have already spoken, but to whom it 
 may be useful to return. 
 
 The Brahouis live in Beluohistan, side by side with 
 the Belutchis. While the latter have an aquiline nose, 
 deep-set eyes, and a clear complexion, the former have a 
 
56 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 very brown skin, flat nose, and flat flgure, but large, well- 
 formed eyes, which denote a very mixed origin. These lat- 
 ter features, which so plainly recall various Dravidian types, 
 belong essentially to the mountain Brahouis, who are, be- 
 sides, shorter than the Belutchis proper. Let us add, above 
 all, that the Belutchis and the Brahouis differ in language 
 as much as in their external appearance. The former 
 speak an Iranian language ; the latter, a language of which 
 Maury tells us that " it is related to the Dravidian tongues, 
 and forms a transition between them and the Iranian lan- 
 guages." 
 
 It is evidently impossible to admit that a Dravidian 
 language should penetrate from east to west into an Iran- 
 ian or Turanian population, which had remained pure, and 
 that it should have been adopted by them. No more can 
 it be supposed that Dravidians should have come to settle, 
 by force or otherwise, in the midst of these races, whom 
 we everywhere see to be their superiors and to push them 
 back more and more. It must be admitted, then, that 
 the Iranian Belutchis, in coming into these regions, found 
 there Dravidians, Brahouis who, more or less altered and 
 elevated by crossing, still in part preserve their physical 
 characters and a characteristic language. This is, more- 
 over, shown by the traditions of the two races. The Bra- 
 houis consider themselves aborigines ; the Belutchis admit 
 that they are of foreign origin.^^ 
 
 The Brahouis are very likely the most western branch 
 of those Koles, Kh61es, Coles, or Coolees which are al- 
 ready quite numerous beyond the Indus delta, still more 
 so in Guzerat, and tribes of whom extend more or less 
 scattered across almost all central India into Behur and 
 to the eastern extremity of the Vindhya Mountains."^ 
 Placed thus, under such diverse conditions, these tribes 
 have either preserved their primitive characteristics or else 
 have changed in varying degrees. The eastern Kh61es, 
 
GENERAL HISTORY OP THE EASTERN PYGMIES. 57 
 
 withdrawn to the mountain passes of Nerbuda or on to 
 high plateaus, are at times inferior to the Bhils, and re- 
 semble some Dravidian groups. The western Kh61es, in- 
 habiting open countries, in contact with the conquering 
 races, have been strongly influenced by them. " One can 
 find among them," says M. Rousselet, " a series of types 
 from the pure Bhils to the pure Eajpoot." What has 
 happened in Rajpootana must still more have happened 
 in Beluchistan, where the Dravidian population, even 
 more exposed to invasions, could not recruit itself from 
 tribes which had remained more or less protected against 
 the new mixtures. 
 
 Thus the black races of India have passed the Indus. 
 But how far did they extend west of that river ? It is a 
 question difficult to answer. 
 
 Hamilton Smith admits that true Negroes have ex- 
 isted within historic times, or still exist in Laristan, in 
 Mekran, in Persia proper, and on the banks of the Hel- 
 mund, which rises in the mountains of Cabul and empties 
 into Lake Zerrah.^''* Elphinstone has somewhere said 
 that there are Negroes along the borders of this lake. 
 
 We can easily admit that the Dravidian tribes of the 
 province of Lous formerly extended farther west along the 
 seashore. But did they reach the Persian Gulf ? Could 
 the existence of groups more or less like the Negro in Lar- 
 istan not be easily explained by the importation of Afri- 
 can Negroes as slaves ? The examination of some skulls 
 will remove all uncertainty. 
 
 What travellers report in regard to the inhabitants of 
 the shores of Lake Zerrah would not, it seems to me, be 
 interpreted in that manner. They represent, we are told, 
 the first inhabitants of the country, and differ from the 
 other inhabitants of Seistan in features as well as in 
 habits. They are really black and ugly.* None of the 
 
 * They are big, black, and ill-featured (Latham). 
 
58 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 races from the west or northwest who have invaded Af- 
 ghanistan could have brought in either these features or 
 this complexion. On the contrary, it is quite easy to un- 
 derstand that Dravidian tribes from the upper Indus 
 might have gone up the Cabul River and crossed the 
 barrier which separates it from the sources of the Ilel- 
 mund, and by following the course of the latter have ar- 
 rived at the lake. 
 
 The facts just indicated permit us to solve the ethno- 
 logical problem which an oft-quoted passage of Herodotus 
 has long since propounded. It is known that in enumer- 
 ating the different peoples which figured in the army of 
 Xerxes, the ancient historian expresses himself in the fol- 
 lowing manner: 
 
 " The Eastern Ethiopians (for there were two kinds of 
 Ethiopians in this -expedition) served with the Indians. 
 They resemble the other Ethiopians, and only differ from 
 them in their language and their hair. The Oriental 
 Ethiopians have, in fact, straight hair, while those of 
 Libya have more crinkly hair than any other men."* 
 
 Here again we find the Negroes tvith straight hair of 
 Luzon. The father of history expresses himself exactly 
 as P. Bernardo de la Fuente. Only when India or the 
 adjacent countries are spoken of we can afBrm, taking 
 into account all known facts, including the observations 
 of temper and Montano, that it must be a Dravidian pop- 
 ulation that is considered. The Ethiopians of whom He- 
 rodotus speaks were probably the Jauts of Elphinstone, 
 less altered than they are to-day, and having preserved in- 
 tact the fundamental colour of the tj'pe. 
 
 * Herodotus, liv. vii, § 70. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 PHYSICAL CHARACTEES OF THE EASTEEN PYGMIES. 
 
 Negritos and Negrito-Papuans: geographical limits of these two 
 secondary types. — Characters of the Negrito-Papuans. — Aetas. 
 — Mincopies. — Stature of different Negrito populations. — Com- 
 parison of statures of the smallest human races. — Influence of 
 crossing. — Mincopies taken as a type. — Secondary modificar 
 tions. — Proportions of body and limbs. — Aetas. — Sakaies. — 
 Hair. — Colour. — Skeleton. — Skull. — Muscular strength. — Agil- 
 ity. — Acuteness of the senses. — Duration of life. — Diseases. — 
 Recent introduction of consumption into the Andaman Islands. 
 — Rapid diminution of the population. — Approaching extinc- 
 tion of the Mincopies. 
 
 A EACE spread over so vast a space as that spoken of 
 in the preceding chapter could not remain everywhere 
 identical. I have stated above how I have been led to 
 refer all the small Oriental Negroes to two secondary 
 types — the Negritos proper and the Negrito-Papuans. 
 
 It is not easy to determine the respective limits of 
 these two groups. It is possible that there are none in 
 reality, and that they mutually penetrate and give rise to 
 peoples with mixed characteristics. At all events, we 
 know that the Andaman and Philippine Islands, and, ac- 
 cording to the recent researches of Montano, Mindanao also, 
 belong to the Negritos. The Negritos of the continent 
 seem to belong to the same type. New Guinea appears to 
 be the centre of population of the Negrito-Papuans,^^' 
 who, according to Earl, extend as far as Gilolo in the 
 
 6 59 
 
60 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Moluccas. Hamy has traced the pure Negrito type as far 
 as Timor,^*' and the individual seen by d'Albertis at Epa 
 seems also to have had all the exterior characteristics of 
 the Negrito proper, among others the perfectly black skin 
 and the absence of prognathism.* On the other hand, the 
 Hindu Negritos of Amarkantak are, as it seems, only dark 
 brown.^^* Altogether, we know little enough about the 
 Negrito-Papuans. This ignorance is largely due to the 
 fact that they have been and still are too often confounded 
 with the Papuans. Both Wallace and Earl have com- 
 mitted this error.^*' Many more recent travellers have 
 made the same mistake. Meyer, who has tarried in New 
 Guinea and brought back a magnificent collection of 
 skulls, has adopted the opinion of Wallace, and opposed 
 the idea that the Negrito type is represented in this island 
 by two distinct types.* 
 
 Beccari himself, although struck with the resemblance 
 of certain New Guineans to the Aetas, does not dwell on 
 this question,^* and the few words quoted by Giglioli^" 
 from a letter of this traveller do not teach us much more. 
 D'Albertis, while maintaining great reserve, which he jus- 
 tifies by saying that he does not know the Negrito type, at 
 least understood that he had under his eyes at Epa an in- 
 dividual entirely different from any he had seen so far, 
 and that the question deserved to be studied. Such was 
 also the opinion of Lawes in regard to the mountain tribes 
 of Port Moresby."" 
 
 The most complete description of the Negrito-Papuans 
 which has yet been published we certainly owe to Craw- 
 furd. Notice how this author expresses himself : " I do 
 not think I have seen any whose stature exceeded five 
 
 * Meyer."*! "' Making use of the same numbers published by the 
 German traveller, M. Hamy, in his monograph on the Papuans, pub- 
 lished in our Crania Ethnioa, has shown that Meyer had brought 
 new proofs to the support of the very idea opposed by him. 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 61 
 
 feet (1"25).* Moreover, their forms are lean and poor ; 
 their skin, instead of being dark black, like that of the 
 Africans, is soot colour." From Everard Home he quotes : 
 " The skin of the Papuan is lighter than that of the Negro. 
 His hair is woolly, and grows in little tufts ; each hair 
 forms an entangled spiral. The forehead is higher than 
 that of the Negro, the nose is more projecting, the upper 
 lip longer and more prominent, and the lower lip is 
 thrown forward in such a way that the chin disappears 
 and the mouth is the lowest part of the face. The but- 
 tocks are much lower than those of the Negro, whence 
 results a very striking distinctive feature ; but the calf is 
 also high, as in the African.'"' 
 
 To the support of this description Crawfurd borrows 
 from Eaffles the drawing of the young Papuan (Negrito- 
 Papuan) of New Guinea, which I have reproduced above 
 (Fig. 14). t To be sure, the subject is only a child of ten 
 years, and its youthfulness may call forth criticism. But 
 we must not forget that the physical development of these 
 races is completed at an earlier period than among Euro- 
 pean populations. This single thought will make us under- 
 stand how Earl, so good a judge in such matters, could 
 affirm the resemblance of this portrait to adults whom he 
 saw. He tells us that on one of his trips he had as a com- 
 panion a Negro from Gilolo, who had all the features of 
 Eaffles and Crawfurd's Papuan. He thus testifies to the 
 accuracy of the English writers, as well as to the extension 
 of this type in the Indian archipelagoes. 
 
 * Beccari attributes to the small New Guineans, whom he calls 
 Alfourous, a stature of lifdl to li»63. According to Leon Laglaise, 
 the Karons never exceed 1";'60.'' This tribe may, however, have 
 gained in size by crossinjj. 
 
 f In this plate the author has placed side by side his young Pap- 
 uan (Negrito-Papuan) and a native of Bali, taken as a Malay type. 
 The figure of the Negrito has been reproduced in the History of Java, 
 by Raffles and Crawfurd. 
 
62 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 We see that this type does not shine by beauty of 
 features ; and when we observe it in its native country, 
 the proportions of its body harmonise only too well with 
 its face. But Earl tells us further that these Papuans, 
 transported as slaves to the Malay Islands, and placed in 
 comfortable circumstances, such as they have never known, 
 gain rapidly. Their scrawny limbs become more regular, 
 rounder, and as if polished, and their vivacity and grace 
 of movement compensate for their ugly faces. 
 
 The lamentable confusion to which I have fast called 
 attention is the reason why the differential features which 
 might distinguish the Negrito-Papuan from the true 
 Papuan in regard to social state, customs, beliefs, and 
 industries have not been sought. Wallace and Earl go 
 so far as to say that, great or little, the Papuans have only 
 one mode of life. It has always seemed to me a little dif- 
 ficult to admit this assertion, and the information which 
 begins to come to us more and more justifies my doubts. 
 Yet, in the actual state of our knowledge, it would be very 
 difficult for us to define with certainty what belongs to 
 each of these two races, the more so as they surely must 
 have crossed often and given rise to mixed tribes.* 
 
 * This seems to be the case with the tribes visited by Coinrie, in 
 the neighbourhood of Astrolabe Bay. Of fourteen skulls collected, 
 only one was subbraehyoephalic ; the others were dolichocephalic. 
 But the average stature of twenty individuals measured was only 
 If oo.S, and one measurement was as low as If 331. These dwarfs 
 can neither be Papuans nor crosses of Polynesians. Only Negrito 
 blood could have decreased the stature to such a degree. Dolicho- 
 oephaly connected with such small stature is an example of that 
 juxtaposition of characteristics to which I have often called atten- 
 tion in a general way, and which Montano has confirmed among the 
 half breeds of Negritos, as 1 shall state further on.*' Among the 
 works to be consulted on all of these questions, I would call atten- 
 tion particularly to two memoirs of Mantegazza.""' "" In the first 
 of these memoirs Mantegazza still supported the idea of the ethno- 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 63 
 
 The Negritos proper we know much better than the 
 Negrito- Papuans. Since the middle ages the Arabs, and 
 no doubt the Chinese before them, knew thiit the Anda- 
 man Islands were inhabited by black men with crinkly 
 hair.^'^ On their arrival at the Philippine Islands the 
 Spaniards found there the Aetas, whom at present we 
 know to be of the same race as the Mincopies.* Since 
 that time, as the Malay Islands and the two Indian penin- 
 sulas have become better known, and the points which 
 these little Negroes inhabit have been seen to multiply 
 and extend themselves, more accurate information in re- 
 gard to them has been gathered, and to-day it is possible 
 to gain a general idea of the race, as well as of the varia- 
 tions which its tribes the most distant from each other 
 present. 
 
 Let us state, first, that these variations are very slight 
 in the character which interests us most, on account of 
 the special consideration which has led us to these studies. 
 Everywhere the stature of the Negritos is so reduced as 
 
 graphic unity of all New Guinean Negroes. He has since been con- 
 verted to the duality of the races merely by the sight of the cranio- 
 logical collection brought back by D'Albertis, and in a note ad- 
 dressed to the Soeiete d'Anthropologie de Paris announces his new 
 convictions.'"* 
 
 * This name, given to the inhabitants of the Andaman Islands, 
 has given occasion for many hypotheses. In my first publications 
 I thought to find its origin in the vocabulary collected by Cole- 
 brooke. This traveller asserts that the inhabitants of the islands 
 called their country Minoopy. It seemed to me evident that from 
 the islands the name had passed to the inhabitants." But Man 
 asserts that this word does not exist in any of the dialects spoken 
 on the islands. He tells us that the only utterances the sounds of 
 which resemble that of the generally adopted name are Jcdmin kapi 
 (which he translates by stand here) and min kalch (come here). The 
 natives often use the latter words ; the Europeans might have 
 adopted them to designate those who used them,"" 
 
64 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 to place them among the smallest human races. The 
 unanimous testimony of various travellers can leave no 
 doubt upon this point. It has, however, usually been 
 vague and general in expression. But we have now accu- 
 rate measurements in sufficient number from the three 
 principal stations of the race, viz., Luzon, the Andaman 
 Islands, and the peninsula of Malacca. 
 
 Two French travellers — Marche and Montano* — have 
 visited Luzon and measured the native Aetas ; the former 
 at Binangonan de Lampon on the Pacific coast, the latter 
 in the Sierra de Marivel^s. 
 
 
 Maximum, 
 metre. 
 
 Minimum, 
 metre. 
 
 Average, 
 metre. 
 
 , r T_ (7 men 
 
 1-473 
 l-37() 
 
 1-575 
 1-485 
 
 1-354 
 1-310 
 1-425 
 1-350 
 
 1-397 
 
 Marohe ] , ,„™ ' " 
 
 1-336 
 
 
 1-485 
 
 I 13 women 
 
 1-431 
 
 These figures seem to indicate that the mountain pop- 
 ulation is, on the average, a little taller than that of the 
 
 * Marohe and Montano received from the Secretary of Public 
 Instruction two scientific missions for the Philippine Islands. Both 
 of them have acquitted themselves in a remarkable manner. Marche 
 has limited his explorations to Luzon. The collection which he 
 brought back is of great zoSlogical and anthropological interest. 
 What has been exhibited of it in the rooms of the Geographical 
 Society has attracted great attention by the variety of its objects 
 and by the ethnographical importance of several among them. 
 
 Montano, after having stayed for some time about Manilla, went 
 to Mindanao, where he explored some of the least known regions. 
 He also has brought back collections interesting from various points 
 of view. Among other things, he sent to the Societe de Geographie 
 a mass of observations, notes, itineraries, and charts which have won 
 for him the Logerot prize (a gold medal), awarded to him at the 
 public meeting of April 38, 1883, in consequence of a report made 
 by Hamy. 
 
PHySICAL CHAEACTERISTICS. 
 
 65 
 
 coast. But perhaps the difference is due to the fact that 
 Montano, having been able to measure a greater number, 
 has come nearer the truth.* However that may be, it can 
 be seen that the general average of the Philippine Aetas, 
 men and women, is about 1'!'413. 
 
 Let us now pass to the other end of the maritime area 
 of the Negritos. 
 
 When I published my first studies on the Mincopies 
 there had been only five measurements taken of these 
 islanders, the maximum of which was 1"480, the mini- 
 mum 1"370, and the average lf436. Since then Flower 
 has tried to determine the stature of the Mincopies 
 from an examination of nineteen skeletons of men and 
 women. ^^' °^ 
 
 The results have been confirmed in a remarkable man- 
 ner by direct measurements taken by Brander upon fif- 
 teen men and as many women.^^"" Finally, Man has 
 published detailed measiirements taken upon forty-eight 
 men and forty- one women.^"^ 
 
 The following are the figures obtained by these two 
 methods : 
 
 Flower 
 
 Brander 
 
 Man 
 
 j men 
 
 j women 
 
 ] 15 men . . . 
 j 15 women 
 j 48 men . . . 
 j 41 women 
 
 Maximum, 
 metre. 
 
 1-600 
 1-481 
 1-562 
 1-441 
 1-598 
 1-496 
 
 Minimum, 
 metre. 
 
 1-385 
 1-302 
 1-408 
 1-308 
 1-367 
 1-343 
 
 Average, 
 metre. 
 
 1-448 
 1-375 
 1-476 
 1-366 
 1-484 
 1-397 
 
 One sees that the difference is slight. In the means, it 
 rises only to 0T036 for the men and 0"031 for the women. 
 
 *In a note which he kindly gave me, Montano remarks that 
 among the eighteen men which he measured only five surpassed 
 l^oOO. 
 
QQ THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Besides, in the maxima and the minima the extreme num- 
 bers mingle with each other. They relate, then, to a real 
 difference of the statures, and not to the inductive method 
 followed by one of the authors. Nearly the same value 
 may be placed, then, on the figures of Flower, Brander, 
 and Man.* 
 
 If we leave the sex out of consideration and calculate 
 the general average, we find that the stature of 1"358 
 of the Andamans, taken all together, exceeds that of the 
 Aetas only by O'POSo. 
 
 The first accurate information relative to the stature 
 of the Negritos of the peninsula of Malacca was given 
 by Major Macines and reproduced by Crawfurd.f Much 
 more recently the celebrated Eussian traveller Micluko- 
 Maclay has published a work on these peoples which I 
 regret knowing only through the analysis which Giglioli 
 has given of it.^'' ^'^' Finally, Marche and Montano have 
 collected new measurements, the more interesting as these 
 traveljers took pains to give the names of the tribes which 
 furnished them. J 
 
 The following table represents all but the observation 
 of Macines, which, referring only to one individual, has 
 now lost its former importance 
 
 According to these figures, the general average stature 
 of these tribes would be l-^SO?— O^Ogi above that of the 
 Aetas and O^l^O above that of the Mincopies. The latter 
 are the smallest of the Negritos. 
 
 * The English anatomist has not given the number of skeletons 
 for each sex. 
 
 f Crawfurd.'' The stature assigned by Macines to the only indi- 
 vidual measured by him is l'f445. 
 
 X Marche has not, as far as I know, published the figures which 
 he kindly gave me. Those collected by Montano have appeared in 
 a memoir.'^' 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 
 
 6Y 
 
 Micluko-Maclayj^^'j;-^ 
 
 Marche — 10 Sakaies \ 
 
 fl3 Manthras 
 8 Knabouis 
 3UdaIs.... 
 2 Jakuns. . . . 
 
 Maximum, 
 metre. 
 
 1-620 
 1-480 
 1-705 
 1-580 
 1-578 
 1-545 
 1-550 
 
 Minimum, 
 metre. 
 
 1-460 
 1-400 
 1-403 
 1-330 
 1-455 
 1-390 
 1-525 
 
 Average, 
 metre. 
 
 -540 
 •440 
 -584 
 •401 
 -517 
 1 467 
 1-537 
 
 It is interesting to compare, in regard to their statures, 
 the different human races who merit the name of dwarfs. 
 The Laplanders have long been considered the smallest 
 of men, but Capel Brooke, who stayed among them for a 
 long time and measured several of them, ascribes to them 
 a mean stature of 1"550 — greater, as one sees, than that 
 of the Negritos.^"' ^^ On the contrary, that of the Bush- 
 men measured by Barrow descends to 1"370 among the 
 men and to l'?220 among the women, thus being inferior 
 to that of the Mincopies. Let us add that this traveller 
 measured one woman, the mother of several children, who 
 was only l'?140 in height. 
 
 It can be seen that in regard to stature the three races 
 spoken of form a scale in the following order : Bushmen, 
 N'egritos, Laplanders; but perhaps the Negrillos of the 
 Congo are still smaller than the Bushmen. Dr. Wolff, 
 
 * The analysis of Giglioli gives neither the number of individ- 
 uals nor their sources. The means are not taken, as before, from the 
 entirety of the observations, which I do not know. They only express 
 the numbers intermediate between the extremes. 
 
 •f The observations of M. Marche were collected at Nogen-Bara, 
 in the province of Perak. They refer only to adult men. 
 
 1 1 have combined in this table the measures taken upon both 
 sexes. Montano has published another, in which the figures of men 
 and women are given separately as regards the Manthras and Kna- 
 bouis. Of the Udais, he measured only one woman and none of the 
 Jakuns."" 
 
G8 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 who has just rediscovered them under the name of Batouas 
 in the country of the Bahoubas, asserts that none of these 
 dwarfs exceed 1"?400, and gives as their average height 
 only 1-300.5' 
 
 In the study of these little peoples we must always take 
 into account the influence of crossing. One of the pho- 
 tographs, which I owe to M. de la Oroix, is instructive in 
 this respect.* It represents seven Sakaies, standing. 
 Three of them have straight hair, while that of the others 
 is more or less woolly. But the latter are much smaller 
 than the former ; the difference between the two extremes 
 is nearly one tenth. This teaches us that the Negrito 
 type has been altered in this tribe by mixture with an- 
 other ethnic element with a much greater stature. 
 
 This fact, which can be seen at a glance, explains the 
 difference which Marche and Montano have found between 
 the maximum and minimum stature of the tribes just 
 mentioned and among the Manthras. This difference is 
 0'?343 among the first, O^^SO among the second. Nothing 
 like it is seen among the Aetas and Mincopies, who have 
 remained pure, or nearly pure. Here the same difference 
 only reaches O-fll?, O-fllS, 0?150, 0-^ISS, and 0T154, accord- 
 ing to measurements taken upon living subjects. 
 
 Finally, in all these tribes, insular or continental, the 
 minima are much the same, and the smallest stature has 
 even been met with among the Manthras. The difference 
 between these and the Aetas, measured by the French 
 travellers, and the Mincopies, measured by Brander and 
 Man, is only 24, 95, 67, and 78 millimetres. 
 
 The conclusion to be drawn from all these facts is, evi- 
 dently, that the primitive Negritos at Malacca were no 
 taller than the Aetas and the Mincopies.f 
 
 * The two photographs which I have from this traveller were 
 taken by M. de Saint-Pol Lias, whose companion he was. 
 
 ■)■ In order to have more precise terms for comparison, I did not 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 69 
 
 Our knowledge in regard to the Negritos of India is 
 much more limited. Here crossing has caused the 
 primitive stock to disappear over such large areas that 
 many savants have, until lately, denied the existence of 
 true Negroes in this country. The observations of several 
 English travellers,* and those of Kousselet,^^* should have 
 removed our last doubts. They teach us that some rare 
 representatives of this primitive type still exist in a state 
 of purity, and even form entire tribes, but only in the 
 most inaccessible and unwholesome places. Unfortu- 
 nately, the information gathered in regard to them is very 
 little. The individual interviewed by our countryman, 
 and whose portrait, he brought back, ran away during the 
 night, terrified by the commencement of the study of 
 which he was the object. The English observers, who 
 have been able to examine them more at leisure, have only 
 brought back a few details. Sometimes they even say 
 nothing of the hair, and the plates only give us informa- 
 tion in regard to it. 
 
 Rousselet, on the contrary, has not failed to call at- 
 tention to the woolly curls which partly hid the forehead 
 of his Bandar-lokh.f This character, the most important 
 of all when we consider the Negro race, testifies to the 
 
 take into consideration the measures calculated by Flower, the 
 women measured by various observers, nor the Udais and Jakuns, 
 of whom Montano measured only two individuals. 
 
 * I will mention particularly the works of Justice Campbell,^'' 
 Dalton,^ Fryer," etc. Among the plates in these works reproduc- 
 ing photographs, are several which represent individuals whose Ne- 
 grito characteristics are striking at a glance. 
 
 f Literally, man ape. This is the name which the neighbouring 
 tribes give to the Negritos. They also call them Djangal, or men of 
 the jungles — a term which they apply to all peoples more savage 
 than themselves. Finally, the village visited by the English officer 
 belonged to the Piittouas,, or leaf people. They are .so called by the 
 'more or less civilised Indians from the fact that their women use 
 
YO THE PYGMIES. 
 
 purity of blood of the individual, even though the skin was 
 a reddish black.* 
 
 The stature of this individual, says Rousselet, hardly 
 reached 1°500. The Puttouas, measured by an English 
 officer, attained 1"570, but their women were only I'PSgi. 
 
 According to Dalton, the stature of the Jouangs with 
 black skin and curly hair is 1"535 among the men, and 
 I'fiie among the women ; the maximum with the Oraons 
 is lf570 ; it falls to 1"525 among the Bhiiihers, who in 
 the entirety of their characteristics reminded him of the 
 Andamans. This last figure recurs often in the descrip- 
 tions of other more strongly crossed tribes. The average 
 of all these numbers is 1"?488 at the most. One sees, then, 
 that this ensemhle of populations takes us back to the same 
 figures as the preceding groups. 
 
 The differences in height, which can be expressed in 
 figures, can be made plain to every one. It is not so with 
 other characteristics, such as the general proportions of 
 the body and the features of the face. 
 
 I have by me the photographs which I owe to Col. 
 Tytler, and which represent the full-length portraits of 
 seven inhabitants of the Andaman Islands ; f the photo- 
 
 as their entire dress two bunches of fresh leaves, the one suspended 
 in front and the other behind (Rousselet). This custom is also 
 found in the Andamans among the Mincopies. 
 
 * This fading out of the black colour is easily explained by the 
 sad conditions of life under which these tribes have existed since 
 time immemorial. It is known that the complexion of the African 
 negro becomes paler by disease. 
 
 ■f These two photographs represent one adult man, oneyoungboy, 
 and five women or young girls. In one, all the individuals are 
 naked ; in the other they are dressed in a blouse closed at the neck 
 and bound by a belt at the waist. This dress, however simple, is 
 sufficient to partly take away the strange appearance which these 
 persons present in a state of nudity, in spite of their closely shaved 
 heads. 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 
 
 71 
 
 types published by Dobson, whiuh reproduce in full fig- 
 ure and grouped in various ways, sixteen natives of the 
 same islands ; * *^ those published by Man, representing 
 
 Fig. 16. — Youns Aeta Girl. (After a photograph of M. Montano.) 
 
 * These phototypes represent five men, seven women, and four 
 young girls. The original photographs, like those of Col. Tytler, were 
 taken in the southern part of what was for a long time called the 
 
^2, THE PYGMIES. 
 
 twelve individuals ; ^"^ twenty photographs of these same 
 Mincopies, which the museum owes to Maxwell; and 
 thirty-six photographs by Montano, showing the features 
 of forty-eight Aeta men and women, young and adult, 
 pure and mixed (Figs. 16 and 17) ; finally, the two photo- 
 graphs of M. de Saint-Pol Lias, of nine Sakaies of Ma- 
 lacca, kindly given to me by his travelling companion, M. 
 de la Croix.* 
 
 Never has such a mass of authentic material been 
 brought together. In discussing it I shall take as a term 
 of comparison the Mincopies, who, in consequence of iso- 
 lation prolonged up to our times, have certainly preserved 
 an ethnic purity very rare even among people apparently 
 the best protected against the infiltration of all foreign 
 blood. 
 
 The Andaman Islands have been known to the Arabs 
 since the ninth century,^^' but the reputation of barbar- 
 ism and cannibalism given their inhabitants has always 
 kept travellers at a distance. The same influence — and, 
 no doubt, above all, the absence of the cocoa tree, which is 
 not found anywhere in this archipelago — have prevented 
 the Malays from invading it, as they have the Nicobars. 
 Marco Polo, whose voyages date back to 1373-'95, had 
 heard of them, and gives some details which contain noth- 
 ing but errors regarding their inhabitants. Prom the 
 time of the celebrated Venetian traveller to the end of 
 the eighteenth century I do not think mention was made 
 
 Great Andaman, and which is now known to consist of three islands 
 separated by three narrow channels. 
 
 * M. de Saint- Pol Lias and M. de la Croix had been charged with 
 a scientific mission by the Secretary of Public Instruction. M. de 
 la Croix intends shortly to publish his observations on the peoples 
 in question. I have to thank him all the more for having put at 
 my disposal those photographs and notes of which I shall make use 
 later on. 
 
PHYSICAL CHABACTERISTICS. 
 
 73 
 
 of these islands. In 1790 the English tried to found there 
 a naval establishment (Fort Cornwallis), which was soon 
 
 Fig. 17.— Aeta. (After a photograph of M. Montiino.) 
 
 given up. The project was revived and carried out only 
 in 1857. The new establishment (Port Blair) brought 
 thither numerous observers, among whom it is only Just 
 
74 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 to mention especially Dr. Mouat ^^ and Mr. Man. Charts, 
 drawings, photographs, skulls, and whole skeletons arrived 
 in Europe and were studied by E. Owen i^i, iso ^^^ Busk^ 
 in England, by Pruner-Bey"° and by myself"* in Prance, 
 and by others. 
 
 What strikes one at once in examining the twenty-three 
 portraits of Mincopies is the great similarity they pre- 
 sent in the proportions of the body, the features- of the 
 face, and the almost identical physiognomy. There is 
 nothing strange in this fact. Isolated from the world for 
 centuries, marrying only among themselves, subjected to 
 the same conditions of existence, ihese inhabitants of the 
 Great Andamans have become uniform, just as a race of 
 animals watched by a careful breeder becomes uniform. 
 As, moreover, the two sexes lead exactly the same kind of 
 life, it is not surprising that many difEerences, which else- 
 where distinguish men and women, have here disap- - 
 peared. 
 
 Measurements, necessarily only approximate, upon the 
 young girl in the middle of one of the groups of Dobson 
 have given me a little more than seven heads lengths as 
 the total height of the body. The same result was gained 
 from studying the portrait of John Andaman, published 
 by Mouat.'^" In this respect the Mincopies approach the 
 Egyptian Hercules measured by Gerard Andran;* and 
 as their head is also broad, it results that it is large in pro- 
 portion to the rest of the body. 
 
 The same peculiarity is found among the Aetas. It 
 
 * According to thi^, celebrated artist, this Hercules measured' 
 Tif heads. The Pythian Apollo, which represents the other ex- 
 treme of measurements taken by Audran, was 74f. It is known that 
 Audran divided the head into four equal parts, which he again 
 divided into twelve minutes. To make this result more readily com- 
 parable, I have reduced all these fractions to a common denomina- 
 tor. 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 75 
 
 is true that I have only been able to measure one of the 
 individuals photographed by Montano, the others having 
 too great an abundance of hair covering their heads. In 
 this individual the total height would hardly equal seven 
 heads. So far as it is possible to judge, it is nearly the 
 same among the Sakaies of M. de Saint-Pol. 
 
 There is nothing surprising in this. Qu§telet has 
 well shown that among ourselves the proportion spoken 
 of varies with age and with the stature. The proportion 
 of the head to the entire body is much larger in the child 
 and the dwarf * than in the adult and the giant. ^^' This 
 is a result of the operation of morphological transforma- 
 tion which begins after birth. We must, then, expect to 
 find among the Negritos a relatively larger head than 
 among ourselves. 
 
 Among all Mincopies, men or women, the body is 
 . nearly of uniform width, and scarcely enlarges around the 
 hips and the trochanters (Fig. 4).f With this exception, 
 both sexes are well proportioned. The breast of young 
 girls is very small and conical ; in women it remains full, 
 and falls very little. The chest and shoulders of both 
 sexes are large, the pectorals very strong, arms and fore- 
 arms muscular but well rounded, the hands rather small 
 than large, have long fingers, well separated, at times of 
 very elegant shape, terminated by long and narrow nails. 
 
 * The question is here only of true dwarfs, and not of mioro- 
 eephalio individuals, too often confounded with tTiera. I have 
 insisted upon this distinction in a note relating to the true dwarf 
 known under the name of Prince Balthazar}^ 
 
 f See '", Pig. 114. From the cut we can easily form an opinion 
 of the anatomical characteristics. I have already made this remark 
 in my first memoir. G-iglioli urges against me that one of the 
 women observed by him is quite large around the hips. If it is so, 
 this woman is not represented in the engraving which he has pub- 
 lished.59.«» 
 
 7 
 
76 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 The abdomen is not very prominent. The lower limbs 
 have the same general characters as the upper ones. The 
 thigh and leg are, however, often less fleshy than the arm 
 and forearm, and the calf is usually a little high, at least 
 in the women. This latter characteristic, to which I 
 called attention in my first work as recalling what exists 
 among African Negroes, is lacking in the only man whose 
 legs can be well seen in the phototypes of Dobson. In 
 him the calf, very pronounced, is perfectly well-formed.* 
 The foot, finally, in the rare cases where it is placed so as 
 to be easily seen, is small, high-arched, and the heel does 
 not project behind, f 
 
 Montano's photographs of the Aetas show almost en- 
 tirely similar characteristics in the whole upper part of the 
 body (Figs. 6 and 17). Here also chest and shoulders are 
 large, the pectorals well developed, the arms fleshy and 
 likewise without any conspicuous muscular protuberances. 
 But the waist line of a certain number of men and women 
 is conspicuous, and narrows in ; above all, in both sexes, with 
 . the exception of two or three women, the lower limbs are 
 much less fleshy than the upper ones, and sometimes are 
 really thin. From this, and also from the pose adopted by 
 the operator, the feet — at least of a part of them — seem to 
 be much thicker and larger than those of the Mincopies 
 (Fig. 6). 
 
 It is quite different with the Sakaies, particularly with 
 those whose hair indicates them to be true Negritos. Their 
 
 , » 42 This same individual is remarkable in his whole appearance. 
 Everything about him indicates strengthj His chest is large, the 
 pectorals very well developed, as is, however, the case with all the 
 men ; his thighs are very fleshy. And yet we find again that round- 
 ness of contour and absence of muscular prominences which occurs 
 among so many savages, and particularly in America. 
 
 t Colonel Piehte had already called attention to this feature as 
 distinguishing the Andamanese from the African Negro.™ 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 77 
 
 lower limbs are quite as well developed as the upper ones 
 (Fig. 8). One of them particularly is remarkable for the 
 thickness of his legs and arms without the roundness of 
 contours being lost. All have the calves situated where 
 they should be according to our European ideas, and the 
 feet seem to resemble those of the Mincopies. At all 
 events, the heels do not markedly project. 
 
 The resemblance of the Mincopies to the African Negro 
 is really limited to their hair and complexion. In all my 
 photographs the head is shaved, but the unanimous testi- 
 mony of travellers can leave no doubt as to the woolly qual- 
 ity of the hair. Fichte, Mouat, etc., have added that the 
 haii: seems to grow in tufts, and that it forms curious little 
 round balls, so often described by various travellers among 
 the Papuans. Giglioli has established the accuracy of 
 this information by two photographs.^" The portraits of 
 Aetas and of certain Sakaies show that this characteristic 
 is exactly the same with them. There results from this, 
 in crosses, wavy, curly, or even crimpy hair (according to 
 the degree of the mixture of blood), very different from 
 that of the Malay peoples. On his part Flower has dis- 
 covered that the cross section of this hair often presents a 
 more elongated ellipse than that of any other human race. 
 
 All travellers affirm that the Aetas, like the Mincopies, 
 have a skin pronouncedly black.* As to the more or less 
 crossed tribes of Malacca, their skin seems to have gener- 
 ally become lighter by the mixture. Montano describes, 
 in one of the notes kindly written to me, those he observed 
 in the neighbourhood of Kessang f as having frequently 
 
 * Only Symes and Colonel Piehte have spoken of a sooty Hack. 
 I have already remarked that this opinion, no doubt, is based on their 
 having seen individuals who still had on them traces of the yellowish 
 soil with which these islanders are prone to cover themselves in 
 order to protect themselves against mosquitoes. 
 
 f North of Malacca. 
 
78 THE PVGMIES. 
 
 an almost sooty skin.* To judge from the photographs, 
 the tint seems at times to be darker. A statue of black 
 bronze would not give any other photographic result 
 than the robust Sakaie of whom I have already spoken 
 (Fig. 8). 
 
 Despite the resemblance of hair and colour, it would 
 be impossible to confound a Mincopy with a true African 
 Negro. The shape of the head and the features of the 
 face are too different. The head of the former, seen from 
 the front, looks almost round, instead of being compressed 
 and lengthened ; the forehead is large, and often arched, 
 instead of being narrow and receding, f The face becomes 
 much broader at the cheek bones, which gives the cheeks too 
 much breadth ; the ears, which stand out markedly on these 
 shaved heads, are small, and elegantly shaped; the nose, 
 very much sunken at the root, is straight and rather short, 
 and the nostrils, generally little separated, are sometimes 
 narrow. J: The lips, without being very fine, are not thick, 
 and have nothing recalling those of the Negro ; above all, 
 they are little or not at all sticky at the edges. The chin 
 is small, round, and little or not at all receding ; there is . 
 no prognathism, or scarcely any. The men rarely have 
 any trace of beard.* 
 
 In examining the numerous photographs which I have, 
 many individual difEerences can be recognised, and yet it 
 is impossible not to be impressed by the uniformity of 
 physiognomy common to nearly all. This is no doubt 
 
 * Unpublished note, communicated by Dr. Montano. 
 
 f This feature is very striliing in the only woman, seen in profile 
 in the photographs of Colonel Tytler, of whom I have given a sketch 
 (Pig. 3). All the individuals represented by Dobson have been 
 taken full face ; also those in the engraving of Giglioli. 
 
 I For instance, in the chief figured by Dobson, pi. xxxi. 
 
 * The body is equally free from hair, except in the usual places 
 (Pig. 4). 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 79 
 
 partly due to the fact that the features in general really 
 differ but little, but perhaps particularly to the shape 
 and position of the eyes. These organs, quite protruding 
 and round, are well to the sides, and separated by a very 
 noticeably larger space than our own,* which makes the 
 expression of the face somewhat peculiar and strange. 
 Their eyes, however, are brilliant and very good, as is the 
 case with almost all savages. 
 
 This separation of the eyes is not found so generally, 
 nor to the same degree, among the Aetas. It is not sur- 
 prising, then, that the physiognomy of these two popula- 
 tions differs. Moreover, although the features may be varia- 
 tions of one type, they are usually coarser among the Phi- 
 lippine blacks. The forehead is broad and arched, as can - 
 be seen when not covered by the hair; but the root of 
 the nose has become flatter, the nostrils are wider, and 
 spread more ; the lips have become thicker, but do not 
 equal those of the Negro, and their commissure is some- 
 what clammy, as with the latter. The chin, finally, re- 
 treats, without, however, being as receding as that of the 
 Negrito- Papuan (Figs. 16 and 17). The Aetas seem, 
 moreover, to be as smooth as the Andamanese, unless 
 changed by crossing. 
 
 The photographs of M. de Saint-Pol show that the 
 Negritos of Malacca in features resemble more the Aetas 
 than the Mincopies. Behold how the traveller expresses 
 
 * This characteristic is well marked in the photographs of Tytler 
 and in the phototypes of Dobson ; it is, on the contrary, lacking in 
 almost all the individuals in the engraving published by Giglioli. 
 Moreover, the physiognomy of these engraved faces does not at all 
 resemble that just spoken of. The shape of the head also sometimes 
 differs absolutely from that in my photographs and from the de- 
 scription given by the author (p. 249). I will mention particularly 
 that of the large individual standing at the left. Are these indi- 
 viduals crosses, or is it the fault of the artist, who has badly repro- 
 duced the photograph ? 
 
80 . THE PYGMIES. 
 
 the impression made upon him by the sight of about 
 forty Sakaies: "In closely examining all these faces, 
 generally sympathetic, animated, and laughing, one can 
 soon distinguish characteristics of two races, of which the 
 one is plainly the Negro race, in spite of the colour of 
 the skin. The nose is straight, but the nostril is very 
 broad and the wing very spreading. Some have very curly, 
 crinkly, or even woolly hair, although the majority have 
 long, straight, or wavy hair. There is no prognathism 
 among them."' It would be so with the Negritos of 
 India if the individual figured by Rousselet should be 
 placed in this group. But it is necessary to admit at the 
 same time that the type had been much deteriorated by 
 the deplorable conditions of existence of the Djandals of 
 Amarkantak (Fig. 10). The forehead is depressed ; the 
 nose has grown larger ; the lips have become thicker, but 
 not elongated, as those of the Negrito-Papuan; the chin 
 has remained fairly receding. Despite this physical de- 
 generation, these unfortunate blacks have not taken on 
 the well-known physiognomy of the African Negro, much 
 less that of a monkey or any other animal. I have already 
 said that they rather seem to incline toward the Papuan 
 type, of which it would not be at all strange to find some 
 representatives on the continent. On the other hand, the 
 Oraon and the two Santals figured by Dalton incontesta- 
 bly recall the Negrito type, as do also some of the Mul- 
 chers figured by Fryer. 
 
 This description would be incomplete if I did not say 
 a few words about the skeleton. But here I shall be brief, 
 and shall refer the reader to the technical works. The 
 skeleton of the Miucopies, in spite of its being so small, 
 shows no, sign of degeneration or weakness. The bones 
 are relatively pretty thick ; the muscular impressions, al- 
 ways well marked, are sometimes remarkably conspicuous. 
 The proportions of all the bones compared with each 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 81 
 
 other, the shape of the pelvis, etc., resemble, on the whole, 
 those of the Australian or the Negro. Nevertheless, the 
 discussion of the measurements published by Oviren has 
 led Broca to make a curious observation. If the length of 
 the humerus is taken at 100, that of the radius is 81'53, 
 and that of the clavicle 43. By the first proportion, the 
 Mincopy differs from the European more than the Negro 
 does ; by the second, he differs from the Negro more than 
 the European himself does.^^ It is quite different with 
 the head. The Australian and the true African Negro 
 are dolichocephalic. All Negritos are more or less brachy- 
 cephalic, as I have already stated (Figs. 2, 5, 13, 15, 18). 
 The Mincopies are found to have this characteristic* 
 It is connected with others which give to the skull quite 
 a special character, and often enable us to distinguish it at 
 a glance. Moreover, individual differences are as little 
 marked in the skeletons as in the living. Elower has 
 called attention to this uniformity, and declared that 
 among no other race, without making intentional and 
 systematic choice, would it be possible to find such a large 
 number of heads so like each other. It is clear that the 
 causes suggested above have rendered the osteological as 
 well as the exterior features very uniform. 
 
 The head of the Mincopy, although large in propor- 
 tion to the body, is absolutely very small.f Seen from 
 
 * Hamy and I had found as the horizontal index of the Anda- 
 manese 83-38 for the man and 84-00 for the woman. The measure- 
 ments of Flower, talten upon a larger number of heads, reduce it to 
 80-50 and 83-70. It is seen that the difference between the two 
 sexes remains nearly the same, and that the woman is more brachy- 
 cephalic than the man. 
 
 f The cranial capacity of the men, according to Flower, is only 
 1,344 cubic centimetres ; that of the women, only 1,138. Broca had 
 found higher figures, but he had only seven heads at his disposition. 
 The latter observer gives, as the average cranial capacity of one hun- 
 dred and twenty-four modern Parisians, 1,558 cubic centimetres of 
 
82 
 
 THE FYGMIBS. 
 
 the front, but particularly from behind, the skull is no- 
 ticeably pentagonal. The face gives an impression of 
 being massive, owing mainly to separation of the zygo- 
 
 FiG. 18. — Skull of a Mlucopt of the Gseat Andamams. 
 
 matic arches, to the little depth of the canine fossa, 
 and to the direction of the ascending apophysis of the 
 maxillary. Instead of hollowing in such a manner as 
 
 men and 1,337 of women. The lowest average he found was that 
 of the Nubians (1,339 and 1,298 cubic centimetres). One sees that 
 the Mincopies, as Flower thinljs, would rank among the lowest of 
 human races in this respect; but the observers have only given 
 the rough numbers which they found, without taking the stature 
 into account. But it is known that the weight of the brain in- 
 creases and decreases almost in proportion to the stature, and it can 
 hardly be otherwise with the case which encloses the brain. 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. §3 
 
 to raise and narrow the skeleton of the nose, it rises 
 directly upward. Consequently the interorbitary space is 
 considerably enlarged, and the bones of the nose can only 
 unite in a very obtuse angle. It can be seen that the 
 form and disposition of these bony parts necessitate and 
 explain the external characteristics pointed out above. 
 Flower has insisted, as I did earlier, upon the peculiar 
 features of the skull. They are just as marked among 
 the pure Aetas as among the Mincopies. 
 
 After having long and minutely studied twenty-four 
 skulls of Mincopies, Flower wrote : " My actual impres- 
 sion is that I should never fail to recognise as such the 
 skull of an Andamanese of pure race, and that I have 
 never seen a single skull coming from any other part of 
 the world which I could ascribe to any of these island- 
 ers."* These words of the eminent English anatomist 
 make us understand how it is possible to follow up 
 and recognise this type even very far from the places 
 where it has preserved its purity. Craniological charac- 
 teristics are very persistent. When crossing intervenes, 
 they sometimes modify each other; but often, perhaps 
 ordinarily, a sort of exchange takes place, and the two 
 types are each represented on the head of the half breed 
 by a certain number of perfectly well-marked features. 
 When these characteristics are very peculiar, as those 
 which I have just pointed out, they can at once be recog- 
 nized. Thus, at a time when our opinion must have 
 seemed somewhat paradoxical, Hamy and I were able to 
 assert that the Negrito element had a more or less con- 
 siderable part in the formation of the populations of Ben- 
 gal and of Japan. 
 
 From the physiological point of view, we have hardly 
 
 * The same traits, though less accentuated, are found among the 
 Negrito-Papuans. 
 
84 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 anything to say about the ISTegritos but what a number 
 of travellers have reported in regard to almost all savage 
 peoples. Nevertheless, the Mincopies, v^ho have been 
 mcst seriously studied in this respect, have some pecul- 
 iarities ■which it will be interesting to point out. 
 
 Although true Negroes by the colour of their skin, the 
 Mincopies do not exhale that repulsive odour which seems 
 to characterise all the African Negroes, and their breath 
 is sweet unless they have eaten something which makes it 
 unpleasant. Man particularly mentions the flesh of the 
 turtle as producing this effect. 
 
 But, in spite of their tiny figures and round forms, the 
 muscular strength of these islanders is relatively great. 
 They use with ease bows which the strongest English 
 sailors could not even string.* Man observes, with jus- 
 tice, that habit counts for a good deal in this practice. 
 But more than skill is necessary to shoot an arrow 
 pointed with shell, so that it pierces the clothing of 
 Europeans and enters deep into the flesh, at a distance 
 of forty to fifty metres. 
 
 In speaking of the rapidity of their running, Mouat 
 uses the ball, the bullet, as terms of comparison. The de- 
 tails given by Man would lead us to think that there was 
 some slight exaggeration here. But one point on which 
 the two observers agree is in regard to the acuteness of 
 the senses. Mouat tells us that the Mincopies distin- 
 guish by their odour fruits hidden in the thick foliage of 
 the jungle. Man asserts that they recognise by means of 
 smell only on what flowers bees have gathered the honey 
 which they seek. Sight and hearing are also extremely 
 delicate. The first of these senses, however, is more de- 
 veloped among the tribes who live in the jungle, and the 
 second among the inhabitants of the coast. The latter 
 
 * Mouat. 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 
 
 85 
 
 during the darkest night pierce with their harpoons the 
 turtles which come to breathe at the surface of the water, 
 guided only by the very feeble noise which these make at 
 such a time. 
 
 The life of the Mincopy is short, although the length 
 of the period of development is nearly as great as with us. 
 Men reach puberty at about sixteen, women at fifteen ; 
 but the average duration of life is only about twenty-two 
 years, and fifty is for them extreme old age. 
 
 The pathological history of the Mincopies presents 
 some features which deserve our attention. A Sepoy de- 
 serter who lived long among them, and from whom Mou- 
 at and Owen have received much information, has men- 
 tioned the diseases from which these islanders suffered 
 before the arrival of the Europeans. He gives asthma, 
 rheumatism, diarrhoeas, intermittent fevers, etc. He for- 
 mally declares that he has not observed either syphilis 
 or eruptive diseases ; he does not even mention phthisis, 
 and from his silence we may conclude that during his 
 stay this disease was as unknown at the Andaman Islands 
 as it formerly was in the archipelagoes of the Pacific, 
 which to-day are depopulated by it.* The founding of 
 the penal establishment has sadly changed this state of 
 affairs. Man gives precise details on the subject. Some 
 Hindoo convicts brought syphilis, which was rapidly 
 propagated among the whole population, owing to the 
 custom of the women of giving the breast to all sucklings 
 
 * I have long accounted for the strange mortality among the 
 Polynesians by phthisis."' I have been more afBrmative in a work 
 published under the title Les Polynesians et leurs migrations. I 
 can to-day be still more so, as recent studies have demonstrated that 
 phthisis not only causes the death of the individual, but also his 
 sterility. Thus the extreme mortality and the singular decrease of 
 births which concur in the extinction of the Polynesians can both 
 be explained. 
 
86 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 of the tribe. Smallpox, it is true, had not appeared at 
 the Andaman Islands before the departure of our in- 
 formant, but in 1877 the greater part of the population 
 were stricken by the measles, imported by convicts from 
 Madras, and about one fifth of the sick died. 
 
 Fig. 19. "William Lanney. 
 
 Man gives phthisis as one of the diseases that he ob- 
 served, but I have just given the reasons which lead me to 
 regard it as being recently introduced. This conclusion 
 seems to me confirmed by the fact which Ellis has recently 
 pointed out.*' The painful phenomenon found in Ocean- 
 
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS. 
 
 87 
 
 ica wherever Europeans have arrived is found again at the 
 Andaman Islands. Here, as well as at Tahiti, at the Mar- 
 quesas Islands, and at New Zealand, mortality has consid- 
 erably increased, while births have at the same time de- 
 creased. The number of deaths far exceeds that of births. 
 
 Fio. 20. — Teuganina, oe Lalla Eookh. (After the bust east by 
 Dumotistier.) 
 
 The population of the South Island, which at the time it 
 was taken into possession numbered fifteen hundred souls, 
 was reduced in 1883 to five hundred. In twenty-four 
 years it was diminished by two thirds. It is evident that 
 phthisis is at work in this little archipelago ; and although 
 there has not been there any Uach war, and the English 
 have treated these islanders in an almost paternal manner. 
 
88 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 yet the Mincopies are destined to disappear within a few 
 years, just as the Tasmanians have disappeared.* 
 
 * The race which used to people Tasmania is at present repre- 
 sented only by a few mixed breeds. The last man of pure race, 
 William Ijanney,died in 1869 (Pig. 19) ; the last woman, Tniganina, 
 the heroine of the black war, died in 187^ (Fig. 20). The English 
 colonists have been considered responsible for this total extinction 
 of a human race, and surely their conduct towards the natives has 
 furnished serious reasons for this accusation. But I have shown 
 elsewhere that the principal cause of the disappearance of the Tas- 
 manians has been what I then called le mal d'Europe, which at pres- 
 ent is, for me, nothing but phthisis.'*^' '*' 
 
• CHAPTER IV. 
 
 INTELLECTUAL, MORAL, AND RELIGIOUS CHARACTERS 
 OF THE MINCOPIES. 
 
 Intellectual Characteristics of the Mincopies. — Language. — Transla- 
 tion of the Lord's Prayer. — Relation of the Mincopy to the 
 Dravidian languages. — Poetical dialect. — Diversity of languages. 
 — Numeration : Remarkable poverty. — General intelligence. — 
 Social state : Tribes. — Hierarchy. — Family. — Monogamy. — Hor- 
 ror of incest. The Ouardian of Youth. — Nuptial ceremonies. — 
 Nursing of infants. — Adoptions. — Names. — Initiations. — Deli- 
 cacy in social relations.- — Property. — Hospitality. — Quarrels. — 
 Wars. — Funerals. — Mourning. — Preservation and use of bones. 
 — Industries. — Fire. — Drawing. — Music. — Dwellings. — Pottery. 
 — Weapons. — Utensils. — Comparison with the Tertiary man of 
 Thenay. — Dress : Ornaments. — Food. Moral Characteristics. 
 — Ideas of crime and sin. — Shame. — Corrupting influence of 
 Europeans. Religious Characteristics. — A supreme God. — His 
 family. — Evil divinities. — Sun and moon. — Triple nature of 
 man. — Hell and paradise. — Migration of the soul. — Resurrec- 
 tion. — The first men. — The Deluge. — Legends. — Various super- 
 stitions. — Elevated religious ideas among savages. — Binouas. — 
 A supreme God and Shamanism or Fetichism. — Various exam- 
 ples. — Conclusions. 
 
 So far as physical characters are concerned, I have 
 been able to compare the Mincopies and the other Ne- 
 gritos point by point. In passing to the intellectual, 
 moral, and religious characters, it is very difficult to do 
 the same, because too often we lack information on the 
 subject now among one, now among the other of the 
 
90 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 black populations of the continent and the great archi- 
 pelagoes of the extreme East. 
 
 The Mincopies only, are at present well known to us, 
 thanks particulai'ly to the publications of Mr. ]\Ian. Con- 
 nected for eleven years with the penal establishment at 
 the Andaman Islands, charged for four years with every- 
 thing that concerned the government and the direction of 
 the natives, this man of intellect and heart became at- 
 tached to these islanders, learned their language, gained 
 their confidence, and endeavoured to make us acquainted 
 with them from every point of view. He has placed at 
 onr disposition a veritable monograph. 
 
 I have thus been led to take them again as a type 
 and to give first tlieir history exclusively, only putting at 
 the end of this sketch — which would be quite complete 
 in itself — the little that we know about their brethren. 
 
 INTELLECTUAL CHARACTERS. 
 
 Language. — Linguistic studies being entirely foreign 
 to me, I can only present here the information obtained 
 by travellers and linguists without discussing it, al- 
 though allowing myself to make a general observation 
 thereon. 
 
 Of all the languages used by the Negritos, that of the 
 Mincopies would without doubt be the most interesting 
 to study. Owing to the almost complete isolation in 
 which these islanders have lived, particularly on the 
 islands of the Great Andaman,* their language could not 
 
 * It is well known at present that the lands until recently 
 spoken of as the Great Andaman consist in reality of three islands 
 separated by narrow channels."" In my first liltude sur les Min- 
 copies et la race negrito en g^n6ral, I showed that some signs 
 of mixture are found in the Little Andaman, lying south of the 
 former. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 91 
 
 have altered except by natural evolution without foreign 
 influence. But this language surely dates very far back, 
 and has probably preceded all those at present spoken at 
 Malacca, at Siam, and perhaps even in India. Under 
 these circumstances a knowledge of it would certainly be 
 of the greatest interest from the ethnological as well as 
 from the linguistic standpoint. 
 
 Man seems to have comprehended this. Before him, 
 Symes, Colebrooke, Roepstorff, Tickel, and others, had 
 contented themselves with collecting brief vocabularies. 
 Being in daily contact with the natives in consequence of 
 his official duties, Man learned their languages, as I have 
 already said ; he has made them the subject of several 
 publications ; * he has collected a vocabulary of about six 
 thousand words ; f he has translated into one of them the 
 prayer which all Christians repeat, and has published it 
 with a commentary and notes by Lieutenant E. C. Tem- 
 ple. J Colonel Lane Fox has reproduced this translation*' 
 in two communications, and has given, altogether too 
 briefly, the general conclusions of the authors. I trans- 
 late literally what he says on the latter, and believe myself 
 to be useful and agreeable to readers engaged in linguis- 
 tic studies in transcribing the document which has served 
 as a starting point for this study. This translation is in 
 the language of the tribe occupying the south of the 
 Great Andaman, where Port Blair, the English establish- 
 ment, is situated. 
 
 * Independently of the work which I especially quote here, Man 
 has given elaborate details in his book,'"' pages 49, 195. 
 
 •f It is principally upon this vocabulary, and upon entire phrases 
 given by Man in the appendix F of his book,"' that Ellis has based 
 his work which I quoted above. 
 
 X The Lord's Prayer, translated into Boyig-ngi-ji-da by E. 
 H. Man, with preface and notes by R. C. Temple. Calcutta, 
 1877. 
 
 8 
 
92 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 He Maw-ro k5ktar-len yatS moUaduru Ab-Mayola. 
 
 Oh Heaven in (is) where our (lit. all of us of) Father. 
 
 Ngia ting-len dai-i-i-mugu-en-inga itan. KgoUa-len molladuru 
 Thy name-to be reverence paid let. You (to) we all 
 meta mayola ngenake ab-chanag iji-la bedig Maw-ro koktar-len tegi- 
 our chief wish for supreme only and Heaven in is 
 
 lut-malin yate ngia kanik, ka-ubada arla-len Srla-len 
 obeyed which thy will, in the same way ever (daily always) 
 erem-len itan. Ka-wai moUaardaru-len arla-nackan 
 
 earth on let. This day all of us to daily (lit. daily like) 
 ySt man. MoUSrdiiru mol-oichik-len tigrel yate 61oichik-len 
 food give. We all us (to), i. e., against ofEend who them 
 artidubu. M6118rdurii-len otig-ujiinba itSn ya-ba dona mollSrduru-len 
 forgive. Us all (to) be tempted let not but us all (to) 
 abja-bag-tek otrSj. Ngol kichi-kan kanake. 
 
 evil from deliver. (Do) thou thus order (i. e., Amen). 
 
 The study of the vocabularies alluded to had led La- 
 tham to admit some relation between the Mincopy and 
 Burman languages.^^ Pruner-Bey has pointed out some 
 features common to the Mincopy and the 'Sew Caledonian. 
 Hyde Clark thought he discovered in the Andaman lan- 
 guage aflBnities with those of several peoples of Asia, Af- 
 rica, and both Americas.^' 
 
 In their first publications Man and Temple admitted 
 that certain relations exist between the Mincopy, Dra- 
 vidian, Australian, and Scythian languages. In return- 
 ing to the subject the latter of the two collaborators has 
 developed and systematised his opinions, which I briefly 
 repeat.^" 
 
 For Mr. Temple the Mincopy languages are, above all, 
 purely and simply agglutinative. They form, however, a 
 special group, perfectly distinct from all others, in that 
 they at the same time make large use of affixes and suf- 
 fixes. In the use of the former they do not difPer from 
 other agglutinative languages ; in the use of the latter they 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 93 
 
 follow, tlie author says, the well-known principles of the 
 South African languages. This complete development of 
 the use of two kinds of particles is, in Temple's view, a 
 unique exception. To the presence of certain prefixes he 
 attributes the ability of the Mincopies to frequently form 
 long compound words of an almost polysynthetic nature, 
 and which sometimes represent a complete sentence. 
 
 In view of these divers opinions it is difficult not to 
 think of the relations pointed out by so many linguists, 
 among others by Maury, as existing between the African 
 and Australian Dravidian languages.* To those men- 
 tioned, Man and Temple add a third linguistic group, 
 but the latest recognised has probably preceded the other 
 two in time. Everything tends more and more to demon- 
 strate that the Negrito race, of whom the Mincopies are 
 the purest representatives, form the fundamental Negro 
 element of all, or of almost all, Dravidian tribes, and also 
 of those who, without speaking a language of that name, 
 resemble the Dravidians in physical characters. If this is 
 so, would it not be allowable to expect that the substratum 
 of this linguistic family would be found in Mincopan 
 languages ? At all events there is an interesting problem 
 for solving, and we can only hope that Man and Temple 
 may pursue their researches, which have already led to 
 such curious results. 
 
 Independent of their usual language, the Mincopies 
 have a poetic dialect which they use in their songs. Here, 
 says Man, everything is subordinated to rhythm, and the 
 composer enjoys the most perfect liberty. He modifies 
 not only the form of words, but also the grammatical 
 construction. The example quoted by our author seems 
 
 * Maury '" is, moreover, inclined to connect these two groups of 
 languages with the Medo-Seythian, probably spoken, he says, by the 
 native tribes of Media and Susiana. 
 
9i THE PySMIES. 
 
 to me to justify his claims, although I am a judge of no 
 great competence.* 
 
 Man several times states an important fact — viz., that 
 there are in the Andaman Islands as many distinct lan- 
 guages as there are tribes. " The difference," says he, " is 
 such that it would be as utterly impossible for an inhab- 
 itant of the North Andamans to make himself understood 
 by a native of the South as it would be for an English 
 peasant to make himself understood by a Eussian." '^ 
 
 Mr. Man enumerates eight tribes in the four islands 
 constituting the Great Andaman, and these four islands 
 scarcely equal in size one of our ordinary departments.! 
 There are four tribes in the Middle island alone, which 
 contains not quite half of the total territory. The num- 
 ber of these languages, spoken by peoples of incontestably 
 the same race, themselves admitting their common origin, 
 and located side by side in such a limited territory with- 
 out being separated by any real barriers, is certainly one 
 of the most curious facts, contrasting strangely with what 
 exists in Polynesia. 
 
 One knows that here (Polynesia), in spite of space and 
 extended migrations, the original language has given rise 
 only to dialects ; so that inhabitants of Tahiti, Easter 
 Island, or New Zealand can at once understandingly talk 
 to each other. Moreover, the Mincopies have preserved 
 
 * The usual phrase Mija yadi chebalen la JcacMre (who missed the 
 hard-backed turtle ?) becomes, in the refrain of a song, Cheklu ya 
 laku mejra. 
 
 t The lands long known as the Great Andaman have been recog- 
 nised as four distinct islands separated by narrow channels, and 
 have been named North, Middle, and South Andaman and Rut- 
 land. These islands extend almost directly north and south, and 
 are together not more than two hundred and fifty kilometres long, 
 and at their maximum about thirty-two kilometres wide. (Map 
 of the Andaman Islands, illustrating the distribution of the 
 tribes."") 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 95 
 
 the memory of a time anterior to the division of the tribes 
 and separation of the languages. I shall return to this 
 point in speaking of their traditions. 
 
 Mr. Man has thoroughly learned only one of these lan- 
 guages, and has taken care to announce that all details 
 given by him apply only to the one spoken by the 
 Bojigngijida of the South Andaman Island.* I cannot 
 follow the author in this subject, and limit myself to calling- 
 attention to the multiplicity of vi^ords used to express pos- 
 sessive pronouns and adjectives, according to whether the 
 object is inanimate, a human being, parts of the body, or 
 relatives of a certain degree. Man enumerates seven 
 different words relating to the head, to the limbs, to the 
 trunk, etc., and eight words applicable to the mother, son, 
 older or younger brother. 
 
 The preceding remarks, although very incomplete, are 
 sufficient, I think, to show what a mistake it was to rep- 
 resent the Mincopan languages — as has been done quite 
 recently — as being in a rudimentary stage and comprising 
 only a small number of words, most of them monosyl- 
 labic. 
 
 Numeration. — This at least relative richness of the 
 language in general makes its excessive poverty as to 
 numerals all the more striking. The Andamanese has 
 cardinal numbers to express only one and ttvo. From 
 these he counts to ten by touching his nose with each of 
 his fingers successively, and adding each time the words 
 tliis one also. But further he does not go, and for any 
 
 *Iii his first communication Mr. Man wrote this name Bojingijida 
 (Journal of the Anthropological Institute, vol. vii, p. 107). The syl- 
 lable da at the end of both of these names is a particle added to 
 most substantives or adjectives, and to several adverbs when they 
 are isolated or at the end of a sentence. Its use being, however, 
 arbitrary, Man habitually puts it into a parenthesis and writes 
 Bojingiji (da). 
 
96 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 higher numbers he has only the general terms several, 
 many. 
 
 He has, however, six ordinal numbers. Furthermore, 
 the words expressing these numbers are not always the 
 same. They vary at times with the kind of individuals 
 or objects spoken of, but beyond the sixth order gen- 
 eral terms only are used. It is evident that the poverty 
 of language in this respect betrays a gap in the intellec- 
 tual functions of these islanders. The lack of numerical 
 ideas has often been observed among various savage peo- 
 ples, but I do not think that anything so complete has 
 been stated in this direction. In this regard the Minco- 
 pies must be placed in the lowest rank of mankind. 
 
 They are scarcely more advanced as to astronomy, and 
 are in this respect inferior to the Tasmauians and Aus- 
 tralians, who distinguish various stars and constellations, 
 with which legends are connected. The Andamanese 
 have only given names to the belt of Orion and the Milky 
 Way, which they call the Koad of Angels. They have, how- 
 ever, known enough to recognise the four cardinal points 
 and the phases of the moon in their relation to the tides, 
 and they have divided the day of twenty-four hours into 
 thirteen periods, each of them having a special name. 
 
 General Intelligence. — In spite of this inferiority of 
 the Mincopies in regard to ideas which might be called 
 scientific, other weaknesses which one may ohserve in 
 their intellectual manifestations cannot he considered as 
 due to a radical incapacity. Dr. Brander, for several 
 years in charge of the hospital at the Andaman Islands, 
 has very well remarked that their mind seems to be asleep 
 in consequence of their savage life, but that it can be easily 
 awakened. Experience has shown that up to the age 
 of twelve or fourteen the little Mincopies are as intelligent 
 as children of the same age among our middle classes. 
 One of them, educated in the orphan school, read, wrote, 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 97 
 
 and spoke fluently English and Urdu, without having 
 forgotten his mother tongue. He had also learned arith- 
 metic very well. Mr. Man adds that this is not an excep- 
 tional case ; that he could quote other examples of the 
 same kind, and among them a young man even superior 
 to the pupil spoken of by Dr. Brander. It may then be 
 fully admitted that a suitable education would soon place 
 the Mincopies on the level of peoples who at present are 
 much superior to them. 
 
 Social State — Tribes. — Meanwhile, until that time shall 
 come their social organisation already elevates them some- 
 what. Hitherto exclusively hunters or fishermen, they 
 have been subjected to the necessities imposed by their 
 mode of life. The population has been scattered about 
 in bits, so to say. We have seen that there are eight 
 tribes in what is called the Great Andaman. A ninth 
 inhabits the whole of the Little Andaman, and has, fur- 
 thermore, sent colonies to Rutland and South Andaman 
 Islands, where they live in a state of continual hostility 
 with the tribes of local origin. The following are the 
 names and distribution of these nine tribes, according to 
 the last memoir of Mr. Man : 
 
 North Andaman: Aka-Ohariar (da), AkaJaro (da). 
 
 Middle Island : Aka-Kol (da), Aka-Ked6 (da), Oko- 
 Juwai (da), Aka-Bouig-Yab (da). 
 
 South Andaman and Rutland islands : Bojigngiji 
 (da). 
 
 Little archipelago : Aka-Balawa (da). 
 
 Little Andaman : Jarawa (da). 
 
 All the tribes of the old Great Andaman and of the 
 little archipelago adjoining it have the same customs and 
 the same industries, and recognise each other as sister 
 tribes. The inhabitants of the Little Andaman, as yet 
 slightly known, seem to be somewhat different, owing, 
 perhaps, as Man thinks, to the influence of the Nicobarese. 
 
98 TUB PYGMIES. 
 
 I have elsewhere called attention to a fact from which it 
 results that this southern extremity of the archipelago has 
 suffered some of those accidental minglings which it is 
 almost impossible to avoid, which the Great Andaman 
 seems to have entirely escaped. 
 
 It has been repeatedly affirmed that the interior of the 
 Andaman Islands was not inhabited and was not inhabit- 
 able on account of the density of the jungles and the ab- 
 sence of fruit trees. These assertions have no founda- 
 tion whatever. 
 
 It is a fact which Man has established beyond a doubt. 
 As I have said above, each tribe comprises inhabitants 
 of the coast (aryoto), and inhabitants of the interior 
 {eremlaga), forming two great divisions, each having a 
 great chief independent of the other (maiaigla). These 
 two divisions are again divided into an indefinite number 
 of little groups or communities of from twenty to fifty in- 
 dividuals, each with a secondary chief {maiola), who rec- 
 ognises the authority of the principal chief. But this 
 authority does not amount to very much. Its privileges 
 consist mainly in regulating the movements of the tribe 
 or group and in organising their assemblies and feasts. 
 Moreover, neither the great nor the secondary chief can 
 punish or reward. Their influence, then, is entirely 
 moral ; but, for all that, it is none the less real and con- 
 siderable, principally over the young unmarried men, who 
 zealously serve the chiefs and do their hardest work for 
 them. The office of chief is elective, but generally passes 
 from father to son if the son has the desirable qualities. 
 
 The wife of the chief occupies among her companions 
 a position analogous to that which her husband occupies 
 among the men. She keeps these privileges when a 
 widow, if she has children ; otherwise she loses her lofty 
 position. 
 
 Marriage, Family. — However simple and rudimentary 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 99 
 
 this social organisation may be, it answers all the needs of 
 these little societies. It contradicts certain exaggerations, 
 too easily accepted, regarding the Mincopies. What 
 Man tells us relative to the constitution of the family 
 shows still better how much these islanders had been ca- 
 lumniated by those who have accepted without investiga- 
 tion the reports of some travellers. Duradawan claimed 
 that mother and daughter had been given to him in mar- 
 riage. Brown and Sir Edward Belcher stated that the 
 union of husband and wife ceases with the weaning of the 
 child, and that the parties then become free. It was 
 added that marriage as we understand it was unknown 
 to them, and that there existed among them a veritable 
 promiscuity. Basing my opinion upon some facts col- 
 lected by Mr. Day,*" I long since expressed the strongest 
 doubts regarding these assertions and the consequences 
 drawn from them. One will now see how far I was 
 right. 
 
 Among the Mincopies, as among many other savages, 
 the young people of both sexes enjoy equal freedom before 
 marriage. But, Man adds, in spite of this liberty, the 
 young girls preserve the strictest modesty in their man- 
 ners. Various precautions are, moreover, taken to make 
 too intimate relations difficult, or to stop them. When, 
 however, a young girl becomes pregnant, the guardian of 
 youth makes a sort of legal inquiry to discover the father 
 of the child ; he never refuses to make the reparation de- 
 manded, and marriage properly adjusts the position of the 
 lovers. 
 
 The Mincopies are strictly monogamous. Bigamy 
 and polygamy are unknown to them, and marriage is a 
 serious matter with them. Children are often betrothed 
 by their parents at a tender age, and, no matter what 
 happens, this contract must be carried out soon after 
 the young people have attained the required age. The 
 
100 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 yonngjiancee is considered as being already a wife, and 
 any weakness, on her part would be considered a crime. 
 
 Marriage between relatives is absolutely interdicted 
 to the last degree of relationship recognised by these 
 islanders. This rule extends to relationship by adoption, 
 but not to relationship by marriage. Our marriages among 
 cousins german are highly immoral in the eyes of the 
 Mincopies, and they reproach us with it. Thus they 
 justify again the general observation made by an English 
 author, that it is " among the least civilised people that 
 the greatest horror of incestuous marriage exists." 
 
 When a marriage is in question it is not the interested 
 ones themselves who take the first steps. This duty falls 
 upon the guardian of youth who also has to watch all 
 relations among his subordinates and to recognise which 
 ones may promise a permanent attachment. If a young 
 man or widower is found sleeping in the hut of a young 
 girl, marriage necessarily follows. But this union is con- 
 sidered irregular, and has a particular name — tigwanga ; 
 there is no ceremony connected with it, and it entails a 
 certain loss of respect and consideration. 
 
 Marriage is purely civil. On the appointed day the 
 company assemble in the hut of the chief. The bride re- 
 mains seated, assisted by some women ; the groom stands, 
 surrounded by the young men. The chief approaches 
 him and leads him to the young girl, whose legs are held 
 by several women. After some pretended resistance on 
 the part of both, the groom sits down on the knees of 
 his bride. Then torches are lighted, so that all present 
 can attest that the ceremony has been regularly carried 
 out. Finally, the chief declares the young people duly 
 married, and they retire to a hut prepared in advance. 
 There, Man says, they spend several days without speak- 
 ing to or even looking at each other, receiving provisions 
 and presents of all kinds, which friends busy themselves 
 
CHARACTBRISIICS OE THE MINOOPIES. IQl 
 
 to bring to them, and soon their housekeeping equipment 
 is complete. Finally, the young couple resume ordinary 
 life, and then only is the marriage celebrated by a dance, 
 in which the whole community, with the exception of 
 young married people, takes part. 
 
 These marriages are happy. " The women," says 
 Man, " are models of constancy, and their husbands do 
 not yield to them in this respect." The woman is far 
 from being a slave, as has been said, and the two live on 
 a perfectly equal footing; their mutual relations are 
 marked by courtesy and affection ; each has particular 
 duties, but is always ready to help the other if necessary. 
 Altogether, Man concludes, the consideration and respect 
 with which the Mincopy women are treated might advan- 
 tageously be imitated by certain classes of our own popu- 
 lations. 
 
 To marry a second time is not forbidden, and the mar- 
 riage of a widow with a younger brother of her husband 
 is almost obligatory. Yet profound respect is shown to 
 the widower or widow, who proves affection to the de- 
 funct by chastely living alone. It is not rare to see even 
 young men remain faithful to the memory of their com- 
 panions for several years, or even for their whole lives. 
 
 The mother nurses her children as long as she has 
 milk. Consequently the function of lactation, kept up by 
 practice, becomes, as it were, chronic, and not rarely two 
 younger brothers may be seen sharing the breasts of the 
 mother. 
 
 These children are tenderly loved, and yet they rarely 
 stay with their parents after their sixth or seventh year, 
 by reason of the custom of adoption, which has been de- 
 veloped to such a degree in these islands. Every married 
 man received into a family requests, as an expression of 
 gratitude and proof of friendship, the privilege of adopt- 
 ing one of the children of the family. The request is 
 
102 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 usually granted, aud the adopted child changes his abode. 
 The parents often go to see him, but they cannot take him 
 with them, even temporarily, without permission of the 
 foster father. He, moreover, can dispose of his adopted 
 son as he can of his own, and may pass him over to 
 a new adopter. 
 
 It has been said of the Mincopies that ' they have no 
 proper names. Quite to the contrary, they have a some- 
 what complicated system of appellation. 
 
 As soon as a woman is pregnant the parents, as with 
 us, begin to choose a name, which the child receives at 
 birth. This name is always followed by a qualificative 
 common to the individuals of the same sex, varying with 
 the sex, which is kept until the age of two or three years. 
 At this time the first qualificative is replaced by a second, 
 which the young men keep until their initiation, which is 
 described farther on, and for which the young girls sub- 
 slitute the name of a tree, the blossoming of which coin- 
 cides with the appearance of signs of puberty. Eighteen 
 kinds of trees have the privilege of thus decorating with 
 flowers the young Mincopies, and Man has given the names 
 of some of them. Once married and become the mother 
 of a family, the woman loses her flower name. She takes 
 the title of chana, which Mr. Man translates by madam 
 or mother, and which is added to her name, like the pre- 
 ceding qualificatives. 
 
 From the age of eleven to thirteen begins for individu- 
 als of both sexes a period of abstinence, called ahayaba, 
 which for the young girls extends nearly to the time of 
 their marriage, and for the young men to the time of 
 puberty. While it lasts they cannot eat turtle, pork, fish, 
 or honey — that is to say, the food forming the staple of 
 their usual diet is forbidden to them. They must also ab- 
 stain from the use of certain delicacies, such as the meat 
 of the iguana, thelarveeof a large beetle, etc. They may, 
 
CHARACTEEISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 103 
 
 however, satisfy their hunger with any other native dishes. 
 This kind of tahoo can only be removed by the chiefs, 
 who keep it in force until the time when the candidates 
 have given sufficient proof of their perseverance. 
 
 The akayaba comprises three periods, named from the 
 three principal kinds of food tabooed : the meat of the 
 turtle, honey, and the fab of pork kidneys. At the expi- 
 ration of each a feast is celebrated, during which the 
 neophyte must observe silence, deprives himself of sleep 
 for twenty-four hours, and then with ceremony eats one 
 of those dishes, the use of which is henceforth permitted 
 him. The ceremony closes with a special dance, reserved 
 for these kinds of initiations. 
 
 Everything concerning family relations is to the Min- 
 copy of prime importance. His language expresses this 
 sentiment in a striking manner. Mr. Man has given a 
 list of seventy-one terms, each indicating a degree of re- 
 lationship, and specifying at the same time the relation of 
 age existing between the speaker and the person in ques- 
 tion. 
 
 The practice of frequent adoptions adds greatly to 
 this complication, from which comes also the idea that 
 relationship does not extend to more than three genera- 
 tions. Father and mother use different words in speak- 
 ing of a son. The former calls him lie whom I have he- 
 gotten ; the latter, he whom I have home. This in itself 
 shows us what part these islanders attribute to each sex in 
 the act of generation. 
 
 The distinction of ages is always observed. In speak- 
 ing to an older relative, the title mdiola, which we have 
 seen to be that of the secondary chief, is added to his 
 name ; in speaking to a younger relative, he is called by 
 his name only. The same distinction is observed in re- 
 gard to women, but the terms are different. 
 
 Within families the relations between the individuals 
 
104 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 of the two sexes show great delicacy. The man observes 
 the greatest reserve toward the wife of a cousin or younger 
 brother. He can only address l^er through a third per- 
 son, and can never marry her. The wife of an older 
 brother, on the contrary, receives from her brothers-in-law 
 tokens of affection and respect such as are shown to a 
 mother. 
 
 Property, Hospitality. — The preceding is no doubt 
 sufficient to show that the Mincopies are anything but 
 those barbarous and intractable creatures, nearer to brutes 
 than to man, too often described. A mass of details, given 
 by those few travellers who had seen them closely in their 
 daily life, and particularly by Mr. Man, puts an end to 
 these unjust assertions. I limit myself to point out two 
 characteristic facts. 
 
 The rights of property are recognised and respected by 
 these islanders. Territories of tribes are only bounded by 
 rather undefined limits — a chain of hills, a belt of jungles, 
 etc. ; nevertheless, they are rarely crossed without a formal 
 invitation or special permission. Violations of this rule, 
 though not frequent, entail almost always a bloody fight. 
 Individual property is equally respected. " No Andaman 
 Islander," says Mr. Man, " would take or disturb a weapon 
 or utensil belonging to a neighbour." On the other hand, 
 it is customary that the proprietor of a canoe, a vessel, 
 or a plank drum should put them at the service of his 
 community if he should be asked to do so. 
 
 Hospitality is one of the characteristic virtues of the 
 Mincopies. Children, from their most tender age, are 
 taught to respect guests and friends. In each family 
 there is constantly kept a certain amount of food for 
 visitors who may arrive. Strangers introduced by mutual 
 friends are always warmly received by the whole commu- 
 nity. They are the first served ; the best dishes that the 
 camp contains are offered to them ; they are accompanied 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 105 
 
 at their departure ; before separating they clasp hands, and, 
 instead of embracing, they blow at each other's faces ; then 
 they engage in an affectionate dialogue. Finally they sep- 
 arate with mutual promises of meeting again. 
 
 Quarrels, Wars. — Nevertheless, no more in the Anda- 
 mans than elsewhere does life always preserve this idyllic 
 character. Here, as everywhere, quarrels, strifes, and 
 wars arise. The Mincopies are sensitive and quick-tem- 
 pered. In such a case the one who considers himself 
 damaged manifests his irritation usually by shooting an 
 arrow near the offender ; but at times he tries to hit him. 
 Sometimes he is seized by a sort of frenzy, and begins to 
 break and destroy everything that he can lay hands on, 
 without sparing even his own property. In such a case 
 he is considered as \)%ing possessed, and not responsible for 
 his actions. This is, as can be seen, a sort of amuck, but 
 less dangerous than that of the Malays, as it vents itself 
 on things, and not on persons. 
 
 The bad instincts of the savage appear again in the 
 war which sometimes breaks out among the tribes in the 
 midst of an entirely peaceful feast. Of course all the 
 property of the vanquished is carried off or destroyed. 
 The wounded are massacred. Women and children suffer 
 the same fate. The latter, however, are sometimeg spared 
 and kindly treated, in the hope of making of them so 
 many members of the victorious tribe. 
 
 The Mincopies have always been accused of killing 
 strangers thrown upon their islands by shipwrecks. They 
 seem to have deserved this sad reputation. Duradawan, 
 the Sepoy spoken of above, had not escaped alone ; but all 
 his companions were killed. These acts of ferocity are 
 easily explained by the facts to which Lieutenant Blair,^^ 
 one of the first explorers of these islands, called attention. 
 The Malays and Chinese have for centuries frequented 
 these islands in order to gather edible swallows' nests ; 
 
106 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 but on various occasions they have laid traps for the 
 natives, to catch and make slaves of them. It is natural 
 that a general spirit of distrust and hatred towards stran- 
 gers should be the result of these treacherous and violent 
 acts. The English also were at first received by arrows 
 shot at them ; but when the Mincopies saw that there 
 was nothing to fear, they quickly attached themselves to 
 these newcomers, and wherever the explorers went, ac- 
 companied by natives to introduce them, they were well 
 received. 
 
 Funerals. — Death, according to the slanderers of the 
 Mincopies, does not cause these islanders to manifest any 
 grief. On the contrary, these manifestations are usually 
 most lively, and the whole community takes part in them. 
 The funeral rites — for it is proper to use this expression — 
 are nearly the same for children as for adults. The for- 
 mer, however, are always buried in the midst of the camp, 
 while the latter are transported to the thickest part of the 
 jungle, where they are either buried, or exposed on a plat- 
 form built at the bifurcation of two large branches. 
 
 On the death of a child the relatives and friends for 
 hours weep by the little body. Then, as a sign of mourn- 
 ing, they paint themselves from head to foot with a paste 
 of olive-coloured clay. Moreover, after having their heads 
 shaved, the men put a lump of the same clay just above 
 the forehead, and the women place a similar lump upon 
 the top of the head. 
 
 Eighteen hours are usually taken in making the toilet 
 of the dead. The mother shaves the head and paints it, as 
 well as the neck, wrists, and knees, with ochre and white 
 clay. Then the limbs are folded and wrapped in large 
 leaves held by cords. The father digs the grave under 
 the fireplace in the hut. When everything is ready the 
 parents say a last farewell to their dead by gently blowing 
 two or three times upon his face. Then one finishes the 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 107 
 
 wrapping in leaves, and places the corpse in a sitting po- 
 sition in the grave, which is immediately filled. The fire 
 is lighted again, and the mother places upon the grave 
 a shell containing a few drops of her own milk, that the 
 spirit of her child may quench its thirst. The Minco- 
 pies believe, indeed, that one of the two principles which 
 animate the body will haunt for some time its old abode. 
 In order that it may not be troubled, the community leave 
 their camp, after having surrounded the hut, or even the 
 whole village, with a garland of rushes {ara), the presence 
 of which informs any visitor that death has stricken one 
 of the inhabitants and that he must depart. 
 
 During the period of mourning the village is aban- 
 doned. At the end of about three months they return, 
 the funeral garland is removed, and the body exhumed. 
 The father gathers the bones, cleans them carefully, and 
 divides them into small fragments suitable for use in 
 necklaces. The skull is carefully painted yellow, covered 
 again with a sort of network ornamented by little shells, 
 and the mother puts it on a string round her neck. After 
 a few days the father in his turn wears this relic. The 
 other bones are used to make necklaces, which the parents 
 distribute among their friends as souvenirs. At the same 
 time the lump of clay, which was worn until then as a sign 
 of mourning, is removed, and the usual painting and orna- 
 ments are resumed. 
 
 However, all the ceremonies are not yet accomplished. 
 On a day agreed on, the friends of the family gather about 
 the hut. The father, holding in his arms the children left 
 to him, chants some ancient song, the refrain of which is 
 taken up by the women, while all assistants express their 
 sympathy by noisy lamentations. Then the parents, after 
 having executed the dance of tears {titolatnga), retire 
 to their hut, while the dance goes on for several hours 
 longer. 
 
 9 
 
103 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 The manifestations of grief at the death of an adult 
 are nearly the same as those Just described. He also is 
 buried in a sitting position, with his face turned towards 
 the east. A fire is lighted on the tomb or under the plat- 
 form which bears the body ; a nautilus shell full of water 
 and divers other objects are placed about him. The vil- 
 lage is abandoned and surrounded by the ara. At the 
 fixed time the bones are cleaned and distributed, to be 
 used in necklaces. The skulls preserved in the camp 
 are carried in turn for several hours by all the members 
 of the community.* 
 
 Industries. — In regard to industrial achievements the 
 Mincopies have been at once belittled and overpraised. 
 
 Let us first state the fact of one remarkable deficiency. 
 It seems to be demonstrated by the researches of Mr. Man 
 that these islanders know no means of making fire. They 
 only know how to keep it alive. Man thinks that they 
 must have originally taken it from one of the two volca- 
 noes situated on islands near their archipelago. They 
 themselves say that they obtained it directly from their 
 supreme god, but in their traditions relative to it there 
 are some facts which, it seems to me, would allow us to 
 conjecture that their ancestors knew how to obtain fire by 
 the process so common among all savages — of rubbing two 
 kinds of wood together. However that may be, their 
 
 * The Mincopies are of existing peoples the only one among- 
 whom these singular customs in rendering homage to the dead have 
 been found. But they may, perhaps, have existed among some of 
 our Quaternary tribes. This hypothesis would explain the repeated 
 discoveries of broken human bones and isolated skulls, since many 
 other circumstances tend to do away with the idea of cannibalism. 
 Perhaps it might be added that traces of these old practices could 
 be found in the custom existing in some of our provinces, of dis- 
 tributing among relatives and friends objects which belonged to the 
 deceased as reminders of the loved one. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 109 
 
 present ignorance in this respect places them below all 
 other human races — perhaps below all known peoples.* 
 
 It is evident that the preservation of fire must be the 
 object of special cares. Man gives upon this point some 
 details which it is needless to reproduce. He deprives 
 the Mincopies, however, of the credit of an invention 
 which Mouat had attributed to them.^^^ According to 
 this traveller, they preserved in the interior of large trees 
 chosen for this purpose a perpetual fire. The fire, burn- 
 ing out the trunk downward, would have formed a kind 
 of vertical furnace, where the glowing cinders were pre- 
 served almost indefinitely. Man sees in this description 
 only a fable invented no doubt by Duradawan. 
 
 One may say that the Mincopies are unacquainted with 
 the first rudiments of the art of drawing. Their master- 
 pieces in this line consist of simple zigzag lines engraved 
 upon their bows, pottery, or oars, the effect of which is 
 sometimes quite pleasing."" 
 
 They seem never to have attempted to reproduce the 
 form of an animal or a plant. In this respect they are 
 below the Bushmen, or even the Tasmanians. Conse- 
 quently there cannot exist among them anything resem- 
 bling pictography. They have no means of communicat- 
 ing at a distance or of perpetuating their thoughts ; only, 
 when they want to indicate the way to follow in the jun- 
 gles, they break or bend some branches in the direction to 
 be taken. 
 
 The music of the Mincopies is also very rudimentary. 
 It is a short musical refrain, which, indefinitely repeatedj 
 recalls somewhat those of certain dances still in use in 
 
 * The same ignorance has been ascribed to the inhabitants of some 
 islands of Micronesia, but these casual observations need to be con- 
 firmed. It is known that the Tasmanians also were long repre- 
 sented as being incapable of producing fire, and this assertion was 
 disproved later. 
 
110 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 lower Brittany. To accompauy these melodies our island- 
 ers have no instrument but a little board in the shape of 
 a trancate'd ellipse, which serves to mark time for the 
 dancers.^"' They are, then, inferior to all other savage 
 peoples, who have at least invented the drum. 
 
 The manner of life of the Andamanese tribes necessi- 
 tates frequent migrations within their territories. This 
 fact, poorly observed, has led to their being represented 
 as absolutely nomadic, without having any fixed dwell- 
 ings, and as knowing how to construct only the simplest 
 shelter as a protection against rain or wind. Nothing of 
 the kind. The Mincopies have in reality three kinds of 
 huts ; the simplest, of which they make use in their ex- 
 cursions, represent, so to speak, the tents of our soldiers. 
 They are quickly put up at each stopping place, and the 
 task is incumbent upon the women; but the men con- 
 struct more substantial huts when a longer sojourn is pro- 
 jected. Finally, in the villages proper their dwellings are 
 made with great care, and are of considerable dimensions. 
 In the tribe of the Jarawas they are thirteen metres by 
 twelve. Poles set in the ground, cross-pieces attached to 
 them so as to form the framework of the roof, and palm 
 leaves artistically adjusted, make up the material of these 
 buildings, which can brave the most terrific rain storms. 
 Let us add that in the interior there are always mats or 
 leaves serving as beds. These huts are generally placed 
 around an elliptical space intended for dances. At one 
 end is what might be called the public kitchen. The boys 
 and girls sleep in special huts, to separate them from the 
 married people. This separation of the young people of 
 both sexes is observed even in the interior of the huts, and 
 this fact in itself contradicts certain assertions, too readily 
 accepted, in regard to these islanders. 
 
 Thus, as regards dwellings, the Mincopies show them- 
 selves superior to the Fuegians, and at least equal to the 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIBS. m 
 
 most advanced tribes of Tasmania and Australia. In one 
 other matter, whose importance is universally admitted, 
 they are very superior not only to these peoples, but also 
 to the most advanced Polynesians. They make pottery 
 which stands the fire, and vessels in which they cook most 
 of their food. These pots, generally with rounded bottom 
 are made by hand, and are decorated on the outside with 
 wavy or various cross lines, engraved by means of a wooden 
 style. Their dimensions vary ; the largest hold ten litres 
 and more. The Mincopies also know how to make 
 wooden vessels, to which they sometimes give the form of 
 a double bamboo knot. 
 
 These islanders are not inferior in most primitive in- 
 dustries to any fishing or hunting populations. For in- 
 stance, they make nets more than twenty metres long by 
 five metres wide, with which they bar narrow creeks and 
 the curves in streams. They have also arrows and har- 
 poons, whose points are fastened to the shaft by a long 
 cord. The animal struck unwinds this cord in trying to get 
 away, and, hindered and stopped by the shaft which it 
 drags along, it is easily caught. Nothing similar exists 
 among many savages considered superior to the Minco- 
 pies. 
 
 Their bow also deserves a special mention. At the 
 Little Andaman this weapon has the usual form, but at 
 the Great Andaman it is entirely different. Here the 
 middle, serving as a handle, is thick and cylindrical. The 
 two side pieces are flat, relatively very large in the middle, 
 and tapering towards the ends. They are, moreover, curved 
 in contrary directions in the strung bow, so that it then 
 resembles a much elongated S or a large integration sign. 
 This arrangement results in protecting the hand of the 
 archer from the shock of the string, which is stopped by 
 the convexity of one half of the bow. The lack of sym- 
 metry in this weapon does not impair either its force or 
 
112 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 its surety. With a bow two metres long a Mincopy can 
 at a distance of thirty to forty metres pierce a pine board 
 four centimetres thick; at about a hundred metres he 
 can still inflict a serious wound. It is a curious fact 
 that the Mincopy bow has only been found elsewhere in 
 some parts of eastern Melanesia, among others at Malli- 
 colo — that is, among a population connected at least in 
 part -with a type of Negro very near the Andamanese. 
 
 Utensils of the Mincopies — Application to the Problem 
 of the Existence of Tertiary Man. — The Mincopies have 
 only the most rudimentary instruments with which to 
 hew the trees and cut the poles which form the frame- 
 work of their huts, or to shape their bows, hollow their 
 vessels and canoes, and to carve the, at times complicated, 
 designs with which they are decorated. In every way 
 this part of their history is of special interest. It touches, 
 moreover, the vigorous controversies in regard to onr Euro- 
 pean fossil races, and particularly those in reference to the 
 existence of Tertiary man. I therefore consider it neces- 
 sary to enter here into more elaborate details, and to repeat 
 in part what I have elsewhere said upon this subject.^'^ 
 
 The Abbe Bourgeois, in 1868, presented to the Con- 
 gress of Prehistoric Anthropology at Paris flints which 
 he believed to have been chipped by man. Tliese flints 
 had been collected by him in a deposit belonging to the 
 Lower Miocene, in the village of Thenay, near Pontlevoy 
 (Loir-et-Cher)." He concluded from this fact that man 
 existed in Europe from the Tertiary epoch. This commu- 
 nication was the starting point of discussions which are 
 still going on. Three great objections were made to the 
 conclusions drawn by the learned abb6 from his discov- 
 ery. The number of chipped flints seemed excessive ; the 
 fracturings which many showed were attributed to vari- 
 ous causes entirely independent of the intervention of 
 man; one emphasised the predominance of flints bearing 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MIXCOPIES. 113 
 
 no traces of human labour, and the retouches which the 
 abbe and his adherents attributed to such labour were ex- 
 plained by the action of natural forces. Objections were 
 also raised by some geologists, based upon the distribu- 
 tion of the flints in the layer in which they were found. 
 
 The history of labour among the Mincopies an- 
 swers all of those objections which do not depend upon 
 geology. 
 
 The Mincopies, to judge from one of their legends, 
 have known iron for a long time ; but before the arrival 
 of the English they had to content themselves with what 
 they could get from the few ships wrecked upon their 
 coasts. Whenever they could procure any they hammered 
 it cold between two stones into arrow points or hatchets, 
 or rather that kind of adze which was their principal 
 tool. But we can understand that this metal was very 
 rare, and the Mincopies had, in fact, remained in the 
 stone age. Although iron has become more abundant 
 among them since the advent of Europeans, yet the quan- 
 tity scattered among the natives is far from being suffi- 
 cient for their daily wants. Man tells us that those tribes 
 at a distance from the English establishment still are at 
 the same point where their fathers were, and know even 
 now scarcely any other tools. Even those close to 
 the colony use by preference the first three kinds of 
 stone instrumeuts in the list which I am about to repro- 
 duce. 
 
 It is a singular fact that the oldest traditions of these 
 islanders do not mention any stone as having served as 
 blades for their hatchets or as points for their arrows. 
 They used different shells for these purposes. Man men- 
 tions the Perna epMppium as having particularly been 
 used to point arrows, and a kind of Pinna as having been 
 employed as material for adzes. A species of Cyrena also 
 was largely used in these tools. Bamboo and the bones of 
 
114 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 large fish and the spine of the tail of certain rays were 
 also utilised in various ways. 
 
 Stone nevertheless played an important part in the in- 
 dustry of the Andamanese, and five tools or instruments 
 made out of it are distinguished by particular names. I 
 shall translate literally what Man says on the subject, 
 adding some short reflections. 
 
 " 1. Rarap, the anvil." 
 
 Prom details given elsewhere it appears that this 
 anvil consisted of a block of hard stone, more or less 
 rounded. 
 
 " 2. Taili-lana, the hammer (smooth, rounded frag- 
 ment of dolerite or fine-grained basalt). 
 
 " 3. Talag, whetstone, fragments of sandstoce slightly 
 micaceous." 
 
 Lane Pox has given a drawing and cross section of 
 one of these whetstones.^"' It closely resembles certain 
 of our prehistoric knives. These knives seem to be used 
 exclusively to whet the edge of the points of Javelins or of 
 arrows. 
 
 " 4. Tolma-loko-tug {quartz tooth). These are small 
 blades and splinters used for shaving and tattooing." 
 
 They are taken from veins of quartz, sometimes 
 opaque and sometimes transparent, like crystal, or from 
 semitranslucent pebbles of a bluish-white colour (Man). 
 
 "5. La, cooking stone. These are common pebbles, 
 about two inches in diameter, which are heated, and with 
 which the foods to be cooked are covered." 
 
 Here we find a curious variation of the oven used 
 throughout Polynesia. The Mincopies had not thought 
 of scooping out the ground to utilise heat better and pre- 
 serve it longer, but one sees that stones in the Andaman 
 Islands play a similar role to that which has always been 
 reported from New Zealand, the Sandwich Islands, Tahiti, 
 and Tonga. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 115 
 
 Mr. Man adds the following remarks, which I trans- 
 late, italicising the passages relating particularly to the 
 question which I have especially in view : 
 
 " When a new whetstone is needed, the Mincopies, 
 not knowing the art of chipping stone, choose a block of 
 sandstone. If it is too large, it is put in the fire until it 
 breaks. The operator chooses the fragment correspond- 
 ing best to his purposes, and shapes it by means of his 
 hard, smooth, stone hammer. At the end of a little time 
 the edge of the stone becomes blunted, but it serves for 
 several months to give a finer edge." 
 
 In this passage Mr. Man contrasts the whetstone and 
 the fine stone. It is to be regretted that the author here 
 is too chary of detail. But it seems to me, from the eji- 
 semble of passages relating to this subject, that these stones 
 are essentially used as scrapers {racloirs or grattoirs). 
 As will be seen, these knives are the only stone utensils at 
 the Andaman Islands which are really fashioned. There 
 is there, it seems to me, a suggestion which might be ap- 
 plied to those found in our own country in such large 
 numbers. 
 
 " The small Uades and splinters are never used more 
 than once. In fact, quite often several are used for a sin- 
 gle operation. The sharp-edged splinters are used for 
 shaving; those with a sharp point are used for tattooing 
 or for sacrificial purposes. 
 
 " "When the operation is finished, these instruments are 
 thrown atvay upon some pile of debris, or tliey are disposed 
 of in some other manner. Whoever happens to step on 
 one of them, even unintentionally, runs the risk of great 
 suffering. The manufacturing of these little splinters is 
 considered one of the duties of the women, and there are 
 those who habitually devote themselves to it. 
 
 " Two pieces of white quartz are necessary to obtain 
 the small blades. . They are neither pressed against the 
 
116 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 thighs nor surrounded by a tight string to determine a 
 line of least resistance to the blows ; but one of the stones 
 is first heated and then exposed to the cold ; then, holding 
 it firmly in one hand, it is struck squarely with the other 
 stone. By this process the number of fragments desired 
 is obtained in a short time. A certain knack is no doubt 
 necessary to obtain the kind of splinter desired. The 
 smallest are made in the same way, without even using 
 pressure. 
 
 " No superstition is attached to these cutting stones. 
 
 " The whetstones are never used to cut wood or bones. 
 These last are habitually broken with the hammer to get 
 at the marrow. Before the introduction of iron, little 
 holes were pierced with a fragment of lone or shell, per- 
 haps rarely, if ever, with a stone. No instrument has 
 ever been found which might be supposed to have served as 
 a stone saw or scraper. Shells, no doubt, were used for 
 this purpose." 
 
 I call the close attention of archaeologists to the for- 
 mal declaration put at the head of this paragraph. I have 
 said above that the whetstones absolutely resemble our 
 Quaternary knives. Could they have been used in the 
 same manner? I am tempted to believe it. By the word 
 scraper Mr. Man -certainly wished to designate the utensil 
 to which European arcbseologists have given the names 
 grattoir, racloir, and which is surely known to our read- 
 ers. But, as I have already said, the brief allusions which 
 the English author makes show that the whetstones are 
 particularly used to scrape and smooth the blade, the edge, 
 or point which the Mincopies wish to sharpen. It is evi- 
 dent that they would do so if they had only shells, bones, 
 or a long point of wood hardened in the fire to point their 
 hunting weapons, and they have preserved the same pro- 
 cess since they have possessed iron. 
 
 " In his note on the Kjoekkenmoeddings of the Anda- 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. I17 
 
 man Islands, the late Dr. Stoliczka speaks of a celt, found 
 in one of those heaps of refuse, as a small but typical ar- 
 rowhead, and describes it as being made of Tertiary sand- 
 stone. The Andamanese, however, maintain that never, 
 even when iron was very rare, have they used stone for ar- 
 rowheads, hatchets, adzes, or chisels. They assert, besides, 
 that the fragments found in the kjoehkenmoeddings and 
 regarded as being one or the other of these instruments, 
 were only quartz splinters or broken fragments of cooking 
 stones or whetstones, which formerly as well as at present 
 were thrown among refuse objects when they were no 
 longer of any service." 
 
 But Dr. Stoliczka found more than this arrowhead."* 
 He also found an axe, about two and a half inches long, 
 which it would have been impossible, he says, to distin- 
 guish from celts of the neolithic period of Europe and 
 Asia. He also mentions a real chisel, three inches long, 
 with a sharp edge at one extremity. It is difficult to sup- 
 pose that an educated man, even if not very familiar with 
 such objects, should be misled in this regard so as to mis- 
 take a quartz splinter or the fragment of a knife for an 
 axe or a neolithic chisel. I shall accept, then, the facts 
 mentioned by Dr. Stoliczka as exact until more fully in- 
 formed. 
 
 But these facts do not in any way affect the informa- 
 tion gathered with so much care by Mr. Man.* They only 
 teach us that the ancestors of the present Mincopies were 
 more advanced than these, and in possession of industries 
 now lost. It would be easy to cite analogous examples 
 of degeneration. It is, moreover, evident that a people 
 
 * Several times Man dwells upon the care which he took to secure 
 his information from those islanders whose customs had been least 
 modified by the neighbourhood of Europeans, and from individuals 
 who were regarded by their countrymen as being the best versed in 
 their traditions. 
 
118 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 capable of forgetting the means used by their ancestors to 
 obtain fire could also more easily have forgotten the art of 
 polishing, and even of chipping stone except by the rudest 
 methods. 
 
 However that may be, we find at the Andaman Islands 
 men who, as far back as their memory goes, and indeed 
 probably for many centuries, have used stone in various 
 ways, bid never to make from it either hatchets, chisels, 
 saws, scrapers, piercers, lance points, or arrowheads. The 
 whetstones, razors, and lancets of the Mincopies do not 
 need any retouching, and surely Mr. Man would not have 
 failed to speak of it if this were practised. Evidently 
 there is nothing to indicate any intentional chipping, ex- 
 cept in the first-mentioned of these instruments. 
 
 But the Mincopy tribes, though knowing how to build 
 substantial huts and having settled villages, are habitually 
 wandering about in the territories belonging to them. 
 They go from camp to camp, the length of their sojourn 
 depending on the success of their fishing or hunting. 
 Everywhere, Man tells us, they find the stones which 
 they are in the habit of using. Consequently they scatter 
 over the whole island, among the stones that have never 
 been used, their cooking stones, more or less altered by fire ; 
 the debris of the blocks broken in the fire ; fragments 
 of whetstones no longer of value, which also show the 
 action of the fire; small. blades and fragments of quartz 
 showing no secondary chipping, and of which some, no 
 doubt, bear also evidence of having undergone the action 
 of heat. 
 
 And now let us return to Thenay. If we admit that 
 in Tertiary times the plains of Beauce were inhabited 
 by tribes leading the life of the Mincopies, having anal- 
 ogous industries, using stone as these islanders do, with- 
 out, however, having yet developed the special art of chip- 
 ping whetstones— that is to say, knives (couteaux) — al- 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF TUB MIN COPIES. 119 
 
 most all the facts which I mentioned at the beginning of 
 this note are explained very naturally. 
 
 But in the midst of the most savage people, as among 
 the most civilised nations, we always meet some men su- 
 perior to their contemporaries. To these individuals I 
 would attribute the small number of objects from Thenay 
 which to my mind bear incontestable evidence of being 
 shaped by an intelligent hand. Such are the scraper 
 which the Abbe Bourgeois has shown me, and the piercers 
 which at Brussels caused Tertiary man to be accepted by 
 many eminent judges, among them D'Omalius, Cartailhac, 
 Capellini, Worsaae, Engelhardt, De Vibraye, Franks, and 
 others. 
 
 Thus we can very simply explain the existence and 
 the small number of these exceptional specimens. If I 
 am not mistaken, the ethnographic history of the Minco- 
 pies answers all the objections that can be made to the ex- 
 istence of the Tertiary man of Thenay, as far as these ob- 
 jections concern this man himself and his manner of life. 
 I fully recognise that it does not remove all difficulties, 
 but those remaining are exclusively in the domain of 
 geology. They are not within my field, and I can only 
 ask specialists for their solution. I hope they will find it. 
 
 Moreover, we fortunately have other proofs that man 
 lived in Europe during the Tertiary period. The chipped 
 flints of Puy-Courny, discovered by Eames in the Upper 
 Miocene of Oantal, the incised bones found by Capellini 
 in the Pliocene of Monte Aperto, would leave no doubt as 
 to that. Finally, Eagazzoni has been so fortunate as to 
 unearth the bones of a whole family buried in the Lower 
 Pliocene of Castenedolo, and we know, thanks to him, 
 that Tertiary man already possessed all the characteristics 
 of the human species and belonged to the Canstadt race. 
 
 After this digression, let us return to our Mincopies. 
 
 Dress, Ornament. — The children of both sexes, are 
 
120 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 entirely nude. At the age of five or six the little girl 
 adopts the small apron of leaves {ohunga) which consti- 
 tutes her only garment, which she never thereafter leaves 
 off. The men usually have only a narrow belt (tacliongd) 
 made of a cord, to which is attached a tuft of pandanus 
 leaves. Certain ideas of decency, or perhaps of simple 
 convention, seem to be connected therewith. Moreover, 
 here as everywhere, the women cover themselves as much 
 as they can with ornaments, which here consist of neck- 
 laces and girdles. One of these girdles, made of panda- 
 nus leaves {rogun), can only be worn by married women. 
 
 Both sexes tattoo their entire bodies in a very simple 
 way, by little horizontal and vertical incisions in alternat- 
 ing series. Man seems to think that no special signifi- 
 cance is attached to this practice. Some of the details 
 which he gives, however, would lead us to think the con- 
 trary. The women are generally charged with the opera- 
 tion, and, as instrument, employ a piece of quartz or glass ; 
 but the first three incisions, made low on the back, can 
 only be made by a man, and with an arrow used for hunt- 
 ing wild pigs. Moreover, while these wounds are open 
 the patient must abstain from the meat of these animals. 
 These are, one sees, indications of a sort of initiation, or 
 of a rite, consecrated at least by usage. 
 
 Besides their tattooing, the Mincopies trace on their 
 bodies designs in clay of three different tints, the colour 
 and arrangement of which vary, according to whether the 
 individual is sad or gay, in mourning or preparing for a 
 feast. Finally, at certain times they cover their, entire 
 body with a sort of clay paste, which, when dry, forms a 
 kind of crust or shell. This is one of the things they 
 have been reproached for doing. It was said that men 
 who covered themselves with mud could only be some 
 kind of pigs. In reality, the purpose of this practice is, 
 according to Mouat, protection against the bites of mos- 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 121 
 
 quitoes, and, according to Man, protection against the 
 burning heat of the sun. To this autihygienic practice 
 are perhaps largely due the frequent rheumatisms and 
 diarrhoeas reported among these islanders. 
 
 The Mineopies have long been considered one of the 
 most miserable of populations, scarcely finding enough 
 about them to support existence. Their imputed canni- 
 balism was attributed to this cause. Day had already 
 done partial justice to these assertions, when Mr. Man 
 confirmed his statements and added precise details from 
 which it appears that these islanders, so far as food is 
 concerned, are in conditions far better than most tribes 
 which have remained at the same social stage. The sea 
 which washes their coasts is full of fish, and abounds in 
 turtles ; the Jungles are filled with wild pigs ; the bees 
 furnish abundance of honey. To these three articles of 
 food, which furnish the staple of their diet, are added 
 some mammals and reptiles, more rarely captured, vari- 
 ous birds, and several fruits and edible roots. This abun- 
 dance of wild food readily explains how this population, 
 so intelligent and industrious, has yet never felt the ne- 
 cessity of domesticating an animal or cultivating a plant ; 
 how it does not even know that rude form of gardening 
 and farming met with among its sisters of the continent 
 and of the Eastern archipelagoes. 
 
 To this matter of food supply are attached a number 
 of superstitions really amounting to a veritable taboo. I 
 have already mentioned some facts of this kind, but there 
 are others yet more striking. Thus there are certain 
 fruits and roots from which the Mineopies at set seasons 
 abstain, in order to obey the commands of their supreme 
 god, Puluga. We^have here, then, a real religious prac- 
 tice. 
 
 The flesh of the dugong and of the porpoise is forbid- 
 den to every one who has not yet undergone the initiatory 
 
122 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 ceremonies already mentioned. The pregnant woman 
 and her husband must also abstain from certain foods. 
 Moreover, every person is forbidden during his entire 
 life the use of some one definite food {yattah). A simi- 
 lar practice has been mentioned among some American 
 tribes. 
 
 MOKAL CHABACTJIES. 
 
 Notions of Crime and Sin. — The Mincopies have a 
 word — yuhha — which Mr. Man translates as sin., wrong- 
 doing. This word, according to him, is applied to lying, 
 theft, grave violence, murder, adultery. All these acts 
 are regarded as arousing the wrath of Puluga, the cre- 
 ator. But more, in these little societies as in our greater 
 ones, they interfere with good order; and perhaps for 
 that reason they are ranked as misdemeanours and civil 
 crimes. There are other acts which, indiiferent in them- 
 selves and only shocking religious ideas, are true sins in 
 our sense of the word. Such, for example, is the throw- 
 ing of beeswax into the fire. The odour it gives out in 
 burning is most offensive to Puluga, who manifests his 
 anger by raising a tempest. Thus, when a Mincopy de- 
 sires to damage some enemy who he knows is about to 
 take part in a hunting or fishing party, he burns some 
 beeswax in the hope of causing his foe to perish, or at 
 least of putting him to much distress. One sees that 
 these islanders have veritable wizards. 
 
 Thus these little Negroes, isolated through so many 
 centuries in mid-ocean, have moral ideas similar to our 
 own, and are attached to religious beliefs like those of 
 the most civilised peoples. Their conduct is generally 
 in accord with their principles. The crimes of rape, se- 
 duction, and unnatural vice appear to be unknown to 
 them."^' ^'' Adultery is very rare. In case of its occur- 
 rence, the injured party takes summary vengeance, with- 
 out the intervention of a chief. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 123 
 
 Some of the details already given show that modesty 
 exists among the Mincopies. Man several times speaks 
 upon this point. The woman who removes one of her 
 girdles in order to make a present to a friend does it 
 with a shyness which almost amounts to prudery. She 
 never changes her apron before a companion. To do so, 
 she always retires to some secret place. She acts like a 
 European woman who removes her last article of dress ; 
 apparently she obeys the same instinctive impulse. 
 
 Mr. Man denies to the Mincopies that sort -of courage 
 which leads one to court danger for the pleasure of meet- 
 ing it. In their wars they operate, so far as they can, by 
 surprises, and only attack when they feel certain that they 
 are the stronger party. In their first encounters with the 
 Europeans, however, they conducted themselves gallantly, 
 and displayed a great contempt for death. The Jarawas, 
 the only tribe which has refused itself friendly relations 
 with the English, still show the same warlike virtues. 
 Mouat has brought into prominence the courage with which 
 some of these islanders had braved firearms, and the expres- 
 sion of dignity which marked the face of a chieftain fall- 
 ing under a mortal blow. Man, however, sees in all this 
 bravery only the consequence of ignorance of the power 
 of our arms. But here he seems to me little just towards 
 these islanders. It is plain that to-day the Jarawas must 
 pretty well know the character and effect of European 
 arms. All that our author relates of the mode of warfare 
 among the Mincopies is much like what authors recount 
 regarding the redskins; and who has ever denied the 
 bravery of the Hurons and of the Delawares ? 
 
 What precedes is applicable only to the islanders who 
 have not yet come into close relation with Europeans. 
 The contact of these savages with our compatriots has 
 been not at all helpful. They have borrowed from the 
 foreigners vices before unknown among them, in especial 
 10 
 
124 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 the taste for strong drink aud tobacco, the immoderate 
 use of which appears to have seriously impaired their con- 
 stitution. On the whole, says Man, the Mincopies in con- 
 tact with civilisation have lost their characteristic virtues 
 — their frankness, honesty, love of labour. Unfortunately, 
 this is a remark one must make much too frequently. 
 
 RELIGIOUS CHAKACTEES. 
 
 Tlie Supreme God and Demons. — Man has assured 
 himself of the very real existence of religious ideas and of 
 legends connected therewith, by questioning those natives 
 who were considered by these fellows as most au courant 
 with local traditions, addressing himself also to those in- 
 dividuals who had had until then no intercourse with 
 whites. It seems to me that we may accept with confi- 
 dence the information he has collected. I shall, how- 
 ever, return to this question later. 
 
 I have already suggested that the Mincopies believe in 
 a supreme god. Behold the terms in which Mr. Man 
 summarises what they have told him. I translate liter- 
 ally : 
 
 1. Although he resembles fire, he is invisible. 
 
 2. He was never born, and he is immortal. 
 
 3. By him were created the world, all things animate 
 and inanimate, except the powers of evil. 
 
 4. During the day he is omniscient, and knows the 
 very thoughts of the heart. 
 
 5. He is angry when one commits certain sins. He is 
 full of pity for the unhappy and miserable, and some- 
 times he deigns to help them. 
 
 6. It is he who judges the souls after death and pro- 
 nounces for each of them its sentence (which sends them 
 to paradise or to a sort of purgatory). The hope of escap- 
 ing the torments which one endures in this latter place 
 influences the conduct of the islanders. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE >[INCOPIES. 125 
 
 Behold a truly lofty and spiritual conception ! But 
 the childish and crude mind of the savage shows itself 
 very quickly in the ideas which the Mincopies have of the 
 mode of life of their god. Puluga dwells in a great stone 
 mansion in the sky ; he eats and drinks ; when it rains 
 he descends to earth to gather food ; during the dry sea- 
 son he spends most of his time in sleep. The foods which 
 Paluga prefers are certain fruits, roots, and seeds. To 
 touch these during the first half of the rainy season 
 would so enrage' the god that another deluge would be the 
 result. 
 
 It is from the hand of Puluga that the Mincopies say 
 they have received all that which supports them — mam- 
 mals, birds, turtles. When one angers him he comes 
 forth from his house, blows, thunders, and hurls blazing 
 faggots. Thus are explained the dreadful tempests accom- 
 panied by violent gales, thunder, and lightning. One 
 offends Puluga in very many ways. I have indicated the 
 principal ones above. I will add that to cut up a pig 
 badly, to cook it in an oven, or to roast its flesh are crimes 
 deserving death penalty. Yet Puluga himself never kills 
 the guilty. He points them out to a class of bad spirits 
 called chol, and immediately one of these destroys them. 
 
 Puluga is not alone in his palace. He lives with a 
 woman of green colour, whom he has created for himself, 
 and who has two names, one of them signifying the 
 "■ mother eel" {Ghanaawlola). By her he has had a son 
 {Pijclior), who lives with his parents and is their prime 
 minister. There are many daughters. They bear the 
 name of spirits of heaven [Morowin). They are a kind of 
 black angels, who amuse themselves by throwing into 
 bodies Qf fresh or salt water fishes and crustaceans for 
 human food. 
 
 By the side of Puluga, the beneficent and just god, 
 and by the side of these good spirits, the Mincopies have 
 
126 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 placed many spirits of evil. The most dreaded are Erem- 
 chawgala, Juruwin, and Nila. These are self-created, 
 and have existed from time immemorial. The first is 
 the demon of the forest. He has had, by his wife Chana- 
 badgilola, many children of both sexes. While the 
 mother and daughters remain at home, Eremchawyala 
 and his sons wander through the jungle, ready to pierce 
 with their invisible arrows any one who remains in the 
 darkness without bearing some firebrand, the light of 
 which scares oif the spirits.^"^ Falling stars, meteors, 
 are so many flaming brands which Eremchawgala hurls 
 through the air to discover the unfortunate beings who 
 may be in his neighbourhood. Hence, when they per- 
 ceive one of these heavenly fires the Mincopies conceal 
 themselves as much as possible, and remain some time 
 silent before resuming their interrupted occupations. 
 
 Juruwin is the demon of tlie sea. He also has a nu- 
 merous family. He possesses several submarine dwellings, 
 and goes from one to the other, carrying in a net the 
 fishes and human beings upon whom he subsists. Every 
 fisherman who is taten with a cramp or experiences 
 some sudden pain believes he has been stricken by 
 Juruwin. 
 
 Nila is unmarried. He lives in ant-hills, and al- 
 though always armed with a knife he rarely attacks hu- 
 man beings. He never kills and devours men, as he sub- 
 sists upon dirt. 
 
 The chol, whom we have seen to be the executors 
 of Puluga's vengeance, have a totally different origin. 
 They descend from a common ancestor named Maiachdl. 
 This being was a man who perished miserably for having 
 stolen a pig killed by one of his fellows. The spirit of 
 the man could not go to Hades, but stopped upon the 
 invisible bridge, to which I shall refer later on. There 
 he lives, with his descendants, who, by Puluga's orders. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 12T 
 
 have joined him under the form of black birds with long 
 tails. 
 
 The suu {Chatidbodo) is a female. The moon {Maiao- 
 gar) is her husband. The stars {Chats) are their chil- 
 dren. This brilliant family lives near the palace of 
 Puluga, but never enters it. The stars sleep during the 
 daytime. The sun and the moon, after having given us 
 light, pass under the earth, and, while sleeping, cast a 
 mild light over the unhappy spirits confined in Hades. 
 The phases of the moon are due, according to the Min- 
 copies, to the habit which this luminary has of covering 
 itself with clouds as they cover themselves with paint- 
 ings. Partial or total eclipses of the moon are a sign of 
 displeasure on its part ; they make, however, little impres- 
 sion. Eclipses of the sun, on the contrary, strike them 
 with profound terror. 
 
 The moon and the sun figure as secondary divinities 
 in this mythology. At times they are ministers of 
 Puluga ; but they also have their own wishes, which must 
 be respected, under penalty. The supreme god has for- 
 bidden the employment, in cooking turtles, of the wood 
 of the tree which gives in its bark a material for textile 
 fibres. The man who disobeys this command will have 
 his throat cut; if the offender is a woman, her breasts 
 are cut off. When the crime has been done in the day- 
 time the sun is the executor of the sentence; if it has 
 taken place at night, the moon must inflict the penalty. 
 Between the first faint dawn and sunrise, one must en- 
 gage in no noisy occupation ; above all, he should avoid 
 twanging the bow-string, for this noise particularly angers 
 the sun, which avenges itself by producing an eclipse, 
 raising a tempest, etc. When the moon is in its third 
 quarter and rises at the setting of the sun, he wishes that 
 one should occupy himself with him alone, and is jealous 
 of all other light. The Mincopies, therefore, then cease 
 
128 THE PyGMIES. 
 
 all occupations, halt if they are journeying, and cover 
 up all fires. When the luminary has risen some degrees 
 above the horizon they resume their toil and rekindle 
 their fires. 
 
 Mr. Man 'found no sign of adoration addressed to 
 trees, to rocks or stones, or to stars, among the Minco- 
 pies. Puluga himself, according to our traveller, would 
 not be the object of any worship. Yet Captain Stokoe, 
 who also lived among the Mincopies and was much in- 
 terested in these islanders, declares that they addressed 
 homage to the sun and the moon."' Lieutenant Saint 
 John, on his part, believes he has discovered a certain re- 
 ligious character in some of the nocturnal dances, during 
 which an old man intones the chant alone, quite unlike 
 what takes place in all the others.^^' 
 
 Finally, some precise details, supplied by Mr. Man 
 himself, tend to invalidate his negations regarding wor- 
 ship. The shaman called to a sick man, whose desperate 
 condition he recognises, declares that no prayer can pre- 
 vail upon Piiluga to return to him his spirit. '^ One 
 prays, then, to the supreme god in some circumstances. 
 Moreover, at the time of a violent tempest the Min- 
 copies burn leaves of the Miviixsops indica, believing 
 that their crackling pleases the ear of Puluga and calms 
 his rage. This practice has really all the characteristics 
 of a veritable offering. 
 
 Nature of Man — The Other Life. — According to the 
 Mincopies, every man possesses, independent of his body, 
 two active principles, the spirit {cliawga) and the soul 
 {otyolo). The spirit is black, the soul is red. From the 
 former proceeds all good ; all bad from the latter. Al- 
 though both are invisible, they reproduce the form of 
 the body. When a man is very ill, it is that his spirit 
 hesitates between this world and the other one. When 
 one dreams, it is that his soul has quitted his body, while 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MIXCOPIES. 129 
 
 the sleeper is copscious of what it sees and does. Thus 
 the Mincopies have absolute confidence in the warnings 
 which they believe they receive in dreams. At death, the 
 soul and spirit are separated, but they will be reunited 
 at the resurrection. While awaiting that moment their 
 destiny is very different. 
 
 The world is flat. It rests upon an immense palm 
 tree * (barata). This raises itself in the midst of a vast 
 jungle which occupies all the space below man's dwelling 
 place, and which is called cliaitan, a word translated 
 Hades by Mr. Man. It is a very sad abode ; for, although 
 visited by the sun and moon, it receives but a feeble light 
 from them, as I have already stated. 
 
 When a man dies, his spirit, after haunting for some 
 days the region about his tomb and the camping ground 
 of the tribe, passes into cliaitan. Arrived there, it is 
 what the individual of whom it formed part was at 
 his death, and continues all its earthly occupations. 
 Adults pass their time in hunting the spirits of mammals 
 and birds which Puluga sends them ; but the spirits of 
 fishes, turtles, etc., remain in the sea, where they become 
 the prey of Juruwin. 
 
 Between the earth and the eastern portion of the 
 sky stretches a bridge made of invisible rushes {pidgar- 
 larchawga), connecting the earth with a place of delights 
 {jereg), which Mr. Man calls paradise. Above it lies 
 jereglarmugu. This is a sort of purgatory, a place of 
 torments which do not continue forever. Like the 
 ancient Scandinavians, and contrary to the ideas most 
 prevalent, Mincopies depict this temporary inferno as ice- 
 cold. This is where Puluga sends the souls of dead who 
 are guilty of certain crimes, particularly those of mur- 
 derers. 
 
 * Caryot.a soboUfera (Man). 
 
130 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 If the dead person is a child under six years of age, 
 its soul and spirit do not separate. They betake them- 
 selves together to Hades, and are placed under a fig tree 
 {Ficus laccifera), the fruits of which serve them as food. 
 Moreover, they are not destined to await the general resur- 
 rection. The Mincopies believe that every newborn child 
 has already lived, but only for a few years. Every 
 woman who has lost a little child and becomes pregnant 
 hopes to see live again the little one whom she has 
 mourned ; consequently she gives, before it is born, to 
 the little one whom she carries within her the name of 
 the deceased. If she bears a child of the same sex as the 
 earlier one, the identity is considered demonstrated. In 
 the contrary case they say the first child has remained 
 under the fig tree. 
 
 A considerable number of legends refer to some vague 
 ideas of metempsychosis. The Mincopies relate that 
 certain of their ancestors have quitted the world under 
 the form of various terrestrial or marine animals. The 
 spirits of those who have not undergone this metamor- 
 phosis, although dwelling in Hades, can assist the living. 
 It is one of these who, after the deluge, brought to men 
 the fire which had been extinguished by the inundation, 
 and which he knew how to steal from Puluga. More- 
 over, all spirits know to a certain extent what takes place 
 in the world formerly inhabited by them, and can be help- 
 ful to such as have not forgotten them. 
 
 The Mincopies believe in a resurrection. This event 
 will take place as consequence of an earthquake brought 
 about by Puluga's orders. The palm tree which supports 
 the earth will be broken ; the earth itself will turn. All 
 living will perish, and change places with their deceased 
 ancestors. These last will secure a new life in all respects 
 like this present one ; but sickness and death will have 
 disappeared, and there will be no more marriage. The 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIBS. 131 
 
 spirits in Hades sigh for the happy moment which shall 
 deliver them from their monotonous existence, and from 
 time to time attempt to shake the palm tree which sup- 
 ports the earth, thus causing earthquakes. 
 
 The First Men. — After having created the world, Pu- 
 luga made a man, whose name was Tomo. He was black, 
 like the modern islanders, but much larger, and bearded. 
 Puluga made him to know the different kinds of fruit 
 trees scattered over the jungle, which then covered only 
 a part of the Middle Island ; * he showed him the foods 
 from which he should abstain during the rainy season, 
 and procured fire for him. Por this purpose he arranged 
 two kinds of wood in alternate layers, and then called 
 upon the Sun Mother to ignite the pile.f The origin of 
 the first woman, Ghana Elewadi, is told in various forms; 
 all of them, however, suppose the intervention of Puluga. 
 It was he also who taught Tomo the art of making a bow 
 and arrows, of hollowing out a canoe, of hunting and 
 cooking pigs, etc. It was he also who taught Elewadi 
 to weave baskets, to make nets, to paint herself with red 
 ochre (Jcoilo) and white clay (talaog), etc. One sees that 
 these islanders refer to their god the origin of all arts 
 practised among them. 
 
 Become very aged, Tomo was drowned accidentally, 
 and was transformed into a cachalot {karadiicu), and be- 
 came the father of all that kind of whale. Elewadi hav- 
 ing gone by boat in search of her husband, he overturned 
 boat and crew and drowned the whole party. Elewadi 
 became a species of crab, and her companions were 
 changed into iguanas. 
 
 The direct descendants of the first pair are called 
 
 * The first inhabited locality is called Vtitaemi. Mr. Man re- 
 gards this word as equivalent to garden — Eden. I shall consider 
 this tradition again. 
 
 ■f The composition of the pile, formed of two hinds of wood, 
 
132 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Tomola. Become too numerous even during the life of 
 their father, they scattered by couples over all the coun- 
 try after having been provided, by the bounty of Puluga, 
 with all the necessities of life. This dispersion produced 
 diversity of languages. After having created Tomo and 
 Elewadi, Puluga taught them a language which the An- 
 daman tribes say was that now spoken by the inhabitants 
 of the south part of the Middle Island {Bojigyab). Thus 
 this one is considered as the mother language. At the 
 time of the separation each group of the Tomola received 
 its own peculiar idiom from God. 
 
 The Deluge. — After the death of Tomo and his oldest 
 son men neglected more and more the observance of 
 Pulug'a's prescriptions. In his anger the god sent a great 
 flood, which covered the whole earth and destroyed all 
 living things.* Two men and two women, who were by 
 chance in a canoe, alone escaped, and were the ancestors 
 of the present islanders. f Paluga created anew for them 
 animals of every species, but he neglected to give them 
 fire. Then it was that one of their deceased friends, 
 touched by their distress, went to seek a brand at the very 
 hearth of God, as I have suggested above. Shortly after, 
 the last interview between Puluga and men took place. 
 The god declared to them that the deluge was a punish- 
 ment for their disobedience to his commands, and that 
 they would undergo the same punishment again if they 
 fell once more into the same faults. Prom that time, the 
 
 makes me believe that the Mincopies formerly knew how to kindle 
 fire by the process practised among so many savap;e peoples. 
 
 * According to one tradition, the anger of Puluga was brought 
 to a head by an assassination committed through treason. In her 
 grief, the mother of the victim openly violated the commands of 
 Puluga, and excited her companions to do the same, uttering a curse 
 which is preserved in the legend. 
 
 f The names of the men were Loralolu and Pollola ; those of 
 the women were Kalola and Rimalla. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 133 
 
 Mincopies say, the prescriptions of Puluga have been care- 
 fully observed. The code of these tribes — if one may use 
 that word — dates back, then, in all probability, to a very 
 remote time. 
 
 Up to that time Puluga frequently inhabited the vol- 
 canic peak on Barren Island and visited the Andamans 
 under a visible form.* But since then he has retired to 
 heaven, and no one has seen him. 
 
 A great number of legends are connected with the 
 beliefs which I have just summarised. Metamorphosis 
 frequently appears as the finale of the story. Man enu- 
 merates eighteen species of mammals, birds, reptiles, and 
 crustaceans which have descended from transformed To- 
 mola ; and he adds that sevei'al species of fish have the 
 same origin. No tree or plant figures in this list. 
 
 Only three rocks have given rise to legends. All three 
 are situated in the neighbourhood of man's first home. 
 Two of them are said to be marine monsters of unknown 
 species and of gigantic size, who, after having devoured 
 some islanders, remained caught in the mud and were 
 changed into stone. The third is of greater interest. It 
 is a block of sandstone, about nine metres in diameter, 
 whose surface presents many irregular gutterings, appar- 
 ently due to atmospheric agencies. It is situated on the 
 border of a large but shallow lake. This is the Wotaemi — 
 the Garden of Eden — of the Mincopies, where man first 
 appeared.^" The islanders believe the depressions ex- 
 cavated in the rock narrate the history of creation and of 
 the exploits of the Tomola. This is a remarkable belief 
 in a population who, as we have seen, have no material 
 means of transmitting its thought. Is there here an un- 
 
 * Barren Island, distant about thirty leagues from the Andamans, 
 possesses a volcano still seraiactive. It is the extreme point reached 
 by the Mincopies around their archipelago, and perhaps it is hence 
 that they have taken fire. 
 
13i THE PYGMIES. 
 
 conscious recollection of a forgotten art ? However that 
 may be, it is a place respected by all the tribes with whom 
 Mr. Man communicated. 
 
 Miscellaneous Superstitions — Sorcerers. — The Minco- 
 pies have no priests, properly so called, but they have some 
 kinds of sorcerers— or better, shamans — called okopaiad, 
 a word which Mr. Man translates dreamer. It is, in fact, 
 during sleep and in a dream that the okopaiad exercises 
 his power. It is then that he becomes clairvoyant, com- 
 municates with the powers of good and evil, converses 
 with spirits, and exercises a mysterious influence over the 
 property, health, and even life of those about him. Thus 
 he is much dreaded, and is loaded with presents. ISTo 
 ceremony or special initiation confers the quality of 
 okopaiad. A remarkable dream, followed by an unfore- 
 seen event presenting some relation with it, suffices to 
 make even a child to be considered as endowed with the 
 exceptional faculties necessary to penetrate into the super- 
 natural. 
 
 Independently of these superstitions, which are more 
 or less directly connected with their religious beliefs, the 
 Miucopies have others not so related, whose origin it 
 would be difficult to explain. I limit myself to mention- 
 ing two of these. Meeting with or hearing the song of 
 certain birds is for these islanders a presage, now good, 
 now ill. Sneezing is a good augury, and indicates that 
 one is thought of by an absent friend. One knows that 
 similar ideas have prevailed and still remain to-day in the 
 less intelligent classes of the most civilised nations. 
 
 General Observations. — The Mincopies are among the 
 best known savage tribes. Instead of such monsters as 
 were described before Marco Polo, one has found some 
 little men, with black skin and woolly hair, but who — 
 thanks to their relatively regular features, their slight 
 or lacking prognathism, their lips scarcely thicker than 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIBS. 135 
 
 our own — are much superior to the large majority of Ne- 
 gro races. 
 
 As regards intellectual manifestations, we have just 
 seen that these islanders are now inferior, now superior, 
 to other populations of the globe who lead a life analo- 
 gous to theirs. Experience has shown that if intelligence 
 is as if dormant among them, it is easily awakened, and 
 appears then nearly equal to that of the European races 
 themselves. All observations made upon Mincopies who 
 had not been in contact with whites, and bandits intro- 
 duced into the Andamans by penal establishments, show 
 beyond doubt that in the matter of morality these Negri- 
 tos bear, without disadvantage, comparison with our own 
 populations. 
 
 Finally, to me it is impossible not to regard men who 
 believe in a supreme divinity, uncreated, omniscient, who 
 has created all things except maleficent powers, as having 
 a veritable religion. This exception appears to place 
 limits to the power of God, but has it not a just cause? 
 All the grand religions, to use Burnouf's expression, have 
 tried to account for the coexistence of good and evil. 
 The Mincopies have solved the problem in their way. 
 Consciously or unconsciously, they seem to have been un- 
 able to admit that he whose children they claim to be, 
 and from whom they declare they receive all earthly 
 goods, was directly or indirectly the author of their ills. 
 Was this not also the thought of Zoroaster ? 
 
 These very comparisons raise a question which has 
 been often and in many places propounded. Do the lofty 
 ideas whose existence among the Mincopies Mr. Man has 
 established really belong to these islanders? Are they 
 the spontaneous product of their instincts and intelli- 
 gence ? Or have they indeed come from outside? Have 
 they been brought to the Andamans by some follower of 
 the great religions of the Orient? Has not Islam in par- 
 
136 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 ticular had an influence in shaping this conception of a 
 supreme god and almost pure spirit, which fits in so 
 strangely with the bizarre superstitions which accom- 
 pany it? 
 
 This is precisely the question which Logan asked him- 
 self when, to Ms great surprise, he discovered '^ among 
 the Binouas, until then regarded by him as without re- 
 ligion,* what he calls " a simple and to a certain extent 
 rational theology." These Binouas form part of a group 
 of populations which represent in the Malay peninsula 
 the Dravidians of India.f Although in contact with the 
 Malays since the twelfth century, and perhaps from the 
 ninth century, they have preserved their independence, 
 their manners, and their customs in the interior of the 
 peninsula, of which the conquerors really occupy only the 
 coast regions. They live in simple hnts, know only a very 
 rudimentary agriculture, live chiefly upon the products of 
 the chase and fishing, or the fruits of the forest. They 
 are plainly, then, in the category of populations which we 
 
 * On various occasions the Malays had assured Logan that the 
 Binouas had no religious belief, and that their sorcerers {poyang) 
 acted for good or ill only through the mediumship of spirits which 
 they controlled. 
 
 f When Logan wrote, these tribes were still little known, and 
 the eminent ethnologist was unable to distinguish the different ele- 
 ments whose fusion and mixture had produced the existing condi- 
 tion. Recent materials, especially the photographs brought back 
 by de Saint-Pol Lias and de la Croix, have fully informed us in 
 this respect, as one has seen above. The Binouas, the Udais, the 
 Manthras, the Saliaies, all have a, Negrito foundation more or less 
 altered by various mixtures. In the southern part of the penin- 
 sula the Malay element seems strongly dominant, but even there 
 the intervention of a very different type is marked. The Malay 
 blood could not have given to certain Binouas of Johore an oval 
 face, a well-made chin, and an aquiline nose. These features 
 can only be due to crossing with either Aryan or Allophyllian 
 whites. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 137 
 
 call savages, whatever may be their moral qualities.* But 
 among these Binouas one believes in a god named Fir- 
 man, who created the world, and whose will maintains 
 the existence of all things, who is invisible and dwells 
 beyond the skies. Below him are spirits {jin), the most 
 powerful of whom is the spirit of the earth, Jin Bumi. 
 This one plays the role of a bad angel ; to him are 
 due sickness and death, but all his power comes from 
 Pirman. 
 
 By the' side of these beliefs, so spiritual, there are 
 found also many kinds of superstitions, which it is need- 
 less to enumerate here. In reality, the Binouas have 
 neither priests nor worship ; but their sorcerers — or, bet- 
 ter, shamans [poyajig) — at times play the part of the for- 
 mer, and preside at certain ceremonies which might be 
 called religious. They communicate with the supreme 
 god through a mediator, a secondary divinity, Je'wajswa, 
 who dwells in heaven, and who alone can approach Pir- 
 man. To render him favourable to them, they utter in- 
 vocations and burn benzoin, the odour of which is agree- 
 able to his nostrils. The poyang can cure diseases ; they 
 can also cause death. They owe their supernatural 
 powers to spirits or genii whom they command and from 
 whom they draw inspiration. 
 
 In conclusion, to Logan's eyes the whole of the re- 
 ligious beliefs of the Binouas constitutes a very remark- 
 able mixture of theism and Shamanism, very similar to 
 that which exists among the Dyaks of Borneo and the 
 Battas of Sumatra. Among these peoples, one believes 
 also in a supreme god called by the same names, Diehata, 
 
 * In this respect, and in many features of character and customs, 
 the Binouas approach the Mincopies. But, contrary to what we 
 have seen among these last, it appears that war between tribes is 
 unlinown among them and the other populations of the same 
 origin.'* 
 
138 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Juhata, Dewata, in the two islands, while at the same 
 time admitting numerous superstitions connected with 
 Shamanism. The poyang of the Binouas and neighbour- 
 ing tribes, the Uians of the Dyaks, and the dato and si 
 basso of the Battas, are at once priests, sorcerers, and 
 curers of disease — that is to say, true shamans. 
 
 From these facts and from certain philosophical con- 
 siderations, Logan concludes that, in Malacca as in the 
 Indian Archipelago, the religion is at bottom only an 
 ancient Shamanism, which probably prevailed throughout 
 eastern Asia before the rise of Buddhism. A theistic idea, 
 borrowed either from Malay Mussulmans or from Hin- 
 doos, has placed itself alongside of the primitive beliefs 
 without changing- them greatly, especially among the 
 Binouas. Moreover, he considers it very probable that 
 this introduction has come from India. He says : " Not a 
 Mussulman would speak of the single and only God with- 
 out adding that Mahomet is his prophet." 
 
 Such are Logan's conclusions ; but, whatever may be 
 the authority of that eminent ethnologist, they do not 
 appear to me to be justified. They have for their source 
 the thought that barbarians or savages like the Dyaks 
 and Binouas cannot rise of themselves to the conception 
 of a creative and all-powerful God. But the facts do not 
 well agree with such a view. 
 
 Let us recall, first, that Shamanism, under forms quite 
 varied indeeij, still prevails over a great portion of Asia, 
 and even extends into Europe. But in this whole area, 
 among all the nations concerning whom our information 
 is exact, one finds by the side of secondary divinities, or 
 rather spirits more or less deified, a supreme God, creator 
 and preserver of the universe. It is the Jumhel of the 
 Laplanders, the Num of the Samoyeds, the Jumman of 
 the Votiaks, the Yuma of the Tcheremis, the Artoyon, 
 Schugotoygon, or Tangara of the Jakouts, etc.*'' All 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 139 
 
 these great divinities are evidently the single and eternal 
 God, of whom Mangou spoke to Eiibruquis, although he 
 was surrounded by shamans, the chief of whom dwelt 
 close by the great Khan.* Par, then, from being in- 
 compatible with a very lofty and spiritual religious con- 
 ception. Shamanism shows itself associated with this 
 in the countries where it holds the greatest sway. There, 
 as at many other points on the globe, coarse practices 
 and absurd or childish superstitions have too frequently 
 covered up and concealed from Europeans the superior 
 notions existing among these savage populations. 
 
 We usually do not possess information concerning the 
 ideas which the sectaries of Shamanism hold regarding 
 their supreme divinity and his attributes, or upon the 
 worship rendered to him. We do, however, know that, 
 while they consecrate to him rude images, the Jakouts 
 declare that their Tangara is invisible ; '' we know that 
 the Votiaks, the Tcheremis, etc., celebrate special festivals 
 in honour of their great God, and address to him prayers, 
 which present them to us in a most favourable light. 
 Moreover, it seems to me that the Kalevala gives us suf- 
 ficient information in this matter. It is true that the 
 most ancient chants of this multiple epic date back only 
 to the tenth century at most ; ^'° but it appears to me 
 that the revelations which Antero Wipunen made to Wai- 
 namoinen clearly show that the words put in the mouth 
 of a magician, dead centuries before, really teach us the 
 most ancient traditions of the race relative to these diffi- 
 cult questions.f In fine, in the whole geographical area 
 here in question, the religious beliefs appear to me to 
 have a very great analogy with those of the ancient 
 
 * '"' Rubruquis arrived at Mangou's court at the end of the year 
 1353. 
 
 t The Kalevala. 
 11 
 
140 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Chinese, who also believed in a supreme sovereign of 
 heaven and in subordinate spirits.* 
 
 Those who refuse to savages the possibility of attain- 
 ing to the spiritual conceptions which I have just de- 
 scribed will perhaps give the honour of these to the com- 
 patriots of Confucius, and will attribute them to an in- 
 fluence proceeding from China. But one establishes 
 similar facts upon many other parts of the globe. I limit 
 myself to mentioning a few of these. 
 
 In America, among true redskins, we find again coarse 
 Shamanism associated with belief in a Oreat Spirit, only 
 Creator, and directing by his will all the events of this 
 world, just as does Jumala of the Kalevala.f 
 
 Among the black tribes of California, one of the most 
 savage populations of that country, where sorcerers inspire 
 the profoundest terror, Ghinig-cMnig has created all 
 things ; he is invisible and ubiquitous ; he sees all, even 
 in the midst of darkness ; he is the friend of the good, and 
 punishes the bad."* 
 
 Among the Natchez, who have neither sorcerers nor 
 conjurers, Coyocop-cMll has likewise created all things, 
 but he governs the whole world through the intermediary 
 of secondary spirits [Coyocop-techou)}^'^ 
 
 In Polynesia, at Tahiti, Taaroa is to'ivi ; he has 
 neither father, mother, nor children. He bas a body, but 
 this body is invisible, and the god sheds it as birds shed 
 their feathers. It is this god who has created the world, 
 
 * The Emperor Chun, 2,355 years before our era, " made sacrifice 
 to the supreme sovereign of heaven (Ohang-ti), and the usual cere- 
 monies to the six great spirits, to the mountains, the rivers, and to 
 spirits generally." -'' 
 
 f Among others, consult Heckewelder. A spirit truly profound 
 and religious in the Christian acceptation of the word appears re- 
 markably in the prayer which the Lenape warriors addressed to the 
 Great Spirit before departing upon an expedition. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MINCOPIES. 141 
 
 or who has drawn it out of chaos, according to another 
 tradition. But his work once finished, he has given its 
 direction over to inferior divinities.^^^' ^^ * 
 
 It is indeed difficult to explain these facts upon 
 Logan's hypothesis. Nevertheless the Polynesians are 
 only Malay emigrants, and ancient relations between 
 America and the most advanced nations of Asia seem to 
 me to-day beyond question.^^'' One might, then, still argue 
 that the former have carried with them to the very ^nds of 
 Polynesia ideas borrowed by their ancestors from some 
 civilised nation ; that, among the latter, the existence of 
 similar notions is due to a sort of infiltration of ideas 
 coming from the Old World and penetrating even to the 
 most savage tribes of the new continent. But let us 
 betake ourselves to Africa and to the Gulf of Guinea. 
 There we meet again everywhere fetichism with its train 
 of beliefs and practices, in turn ridiculous, puerile, or 
 sanguinary. And yet there also we find again the belief 
 in a supreme God, often unique, and having under his 
 command spirits who execute his will, rather than veri- 
 table secondary deities. The great surprise of D'Avezac 
 when Ochi-Fekoue recited to him, in place of a transla- 
 tion of the Lord's Prayer, the prayer which all the Yebous, 
 prostrating themselves, repeat to Olia-ol-Oroun, is well 
 known." This King or Master of Heaven is, according to 
 these Negroes, "an immaterial, invisible, eternal being; 
 it is his supreme will which has created and which gov- 
 erns all things." D'Avezac has mentioned seven travellers 
 whose narratives contain similar information regarding 
 the religions of the different peoples of the same region. 
 He might have lengthened his list by adding the name of 
 a Negro captain. ^''^ 
 
 * I have summarised and discussed the authorities in Les 
 Polynesiens et leurs migrations. 
 
142 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Thus in all four quarters of the globe, and among pop- 
 ulations of very different race but all belonging to the 
 lowest culture stages of mankind, we establish the co- 
 existence, in one same religious belief, of superstitions the 
 most degraded and of spiritual conceptions the most pure 
 and elevated.* There is, then, nothing strange in the same 
 fact occurring among the Mincopies and the Binouas. 
 
 The latter are a crossed race. Moreover, placed in con- 
 tact for centuries with the Malays, they might well have 
 borrowed something from their more civilised neighbours. 
 But if this is true, the details given by Logan would tend 
 to prove that they have given the notions so acquired an 
 entirely peculiar form. The Mincopies were placed in 
 conditions very different. Thanks to various circum- 
 stances already indicated, they have remained isolated in 
 their little world, and have preserved, especially in the four 
 northern islands, an ethnic purity attested by the uni- 
 formity of their external and craniological characteristics. 
 This in itself would go to show that their intellectual, 
 moral, and religious characteristics have remained almost 
 unaltered, or have only changed in accordance with the 
 predispositions of the race and the conditions of existence 
 which had produced these. 
 
 In saying this, I do not absolutely deny that the Min- 
 copies have drawn something from outside. They mas- 
 
 * It would be only too easy to show that the same juxtaposition 
 of dogmas apparently irreconcilable has existed and still exists in 
 the grandest religions and among ourselves. No savage population 
 has believed more firmly in sorcery than the Catholics of the middle 
 ages or the Puritan refugees in America. How many Europeans 
 are still in that condition ! The mixture of ideas here discussed, 
 and which appears so strange to an enlightened mind, is, then, really 
 very frequent, perhaps even general, and must, possibly, be accepted 
 as connected most intimately with the nature of man. I have em- 
 phasised considerations of this kind in my L'Espece humaine, and 
 Introduction h I'etude des races humaines. 
 
CHARACTERISTICS OP THE MINCOPIES. 143 
 
 sacred foreigners whom chance threw into their hands ; 
 they killed the companions of Duradawan, but spared 
 him. Similar occurrences might well happen during the 
 centuries preceding the English occupation of the islands. 
 The Andamanese have, perhaps, accepted some notions 
 which have adjusted themselves to their stock of primitive 
 beliefs. Yet, however extensive one may consider such 
 borrowings, it is necessary at least to recognise that these 
 islanders have appropriated them in such a way as to make 
 from all an ensemble of beliefs having its own peculiar 
 characteristics. 
 
 Thus, long before the arrival of Europeans, the Min- 
 copies, although reported as one of the clearest examples 
 of a people without religion, possessed a whole rudi- 
 mentary mythology, and, with the Samoyeds, Jakouts, 
 and black Californians, they believed the great funda- 
 mental ideas of the proudest religions. They deserve, 
 then, in every way the attention of men who interest 
 themselves in the study of the human races and the mani- 
 fold problems which this history raises ; and we owe many 
 thanks to those English ofl&cers, those civil employees, and 
 those physicians who have made us acquainted with it. 
 
CHAPTEE V. 
 
 NEGRITOS OTHER THAK THE MINCOPIES. 
 
 Language. — Luzon : Invasion of the Malays. — Malacca : Mixture of 
 languages ; camphor language. — Linguistic aiBnities. — Social 
 state. — Mincopies ; Aetas ; culture ; ancient social condition ; 
 family ; marriage ; inheritance ; adultery. — Industries. — Fire ; 
 dwellings; food; arms; poisoned arrows. — Religious and moral 
 characteristics: Superior beings ; spirits; future life; chastity; 
 modesty ; general character. 
 
 Language. — Altliougli dispersed from Andaman to the 
 Philippines, the Negrito tribes have preserved in a remark- 
 able vs^ay all their external and osteological characters. It 
 is otherwise with their language. This has at times almost 
 completely disappeared at the touch of superior popula- 
 tions, even when some Negrito groups, still numerous and 
 enjoying a certain independence, have preserved a relative 
 purity of blood. 
 
 This fact has been recognised at the Philippines from 
 the beginning of the Spanish occupation. Even in that 
 island, which owes its name to them, our little blacks 
 speak the Bisaya — that is to say, a local Malay dialect "^ — 
 but they mingle with it many foreign words. It seems to 
 me probable that these last are so much evidence preserved 
 of the primitive language. 
 
 At Luzon it must be even more truly the same. The 
 evidence given upon that point by de la Fuente has been 
 fully confirmed by the researches of Dr. Montano, who has 
 kindly placed his unpublished notes at my disposition with 
 
 144 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 145 
 
 a liberality which I here gladly acknowledge. This author, 
 who speaks Malay fluently, and is familiar with several of 
 its dialects, has discovered in the language of the Aetas not 
 only grammatical forms but a vocabulary almost exclu- 
 sively Tagaloc. He has verified one by one an hundred 
 and four words collected by Meyer in the dialect of Mari- 
 veles ; he has noted those which have seemed to him for- 
 eign to the Malay languages, and found but seventeen. 
 He even believes it necessary to make reservations regard- 
 ing some of those.* 
 
 Montano has not been able to collect as precise infor- 
 mation regarding the language of the Mamanouas or Ne- 
 gritos of Mindanao ; but he has seen them make them- 
 selves understood by his guides, who spoke a corrupt, or 
 rather simplified, Bisaya. There also, without doubt, the 
 original language has disappeared. 
 
 Has it been the same in the Malay peninsula ? Mon- 
 tano considers himself unable to answer this question. 
 
 * Montano counts, moreover, thirteen non-Malay words in the 
 same vocabulary translated into the Negro dialect of Zambales. He 
 has also obtained with difficulty from Aetas, with whom he found 
 himself in contact, one couplet of a song, which I here reproduce : 
 Makaalis ako ina, 
 
 I leave (oh, my) loved one, 
 Makpaka bait, ka, ina. 
 Be very prudent, thou loved one. 
 Ta ! ma papaka sayou, ako ina, 
 Ah I I go very far, my loved one. 
 
 Into ka man a bibing ianmo. 
 While thou remainest in dwelling thine. 
 Hanag banuan dolipatan mo. 
 
 Never (thy) village will be forgotten (by) me. 
 The Negritos of the province of Albay (southeast of Luzon) speak 
 the Bicol fluently. But they are mixed with Malay. The Bisaya, 
 the Tagaloc, the Bicol, the Pampango, etc., are merely dialects of 
 Malay, more or less modified. — Montano. 
 
146 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 He understood his Manthra * guide readily when he spoke 
 Malay, but could scarcely pick out words here and there 
 when the same individual spoke with his savage compatri- 
 ots. He believes that the Manthras have at least a pe- 
 culiar accent, which may be due to several causes. 
 
 The Father Pouget, long located at Malacca, who has 
 visited all the tribes of the interior, told Montano that 
 these savages had neither language nor dialect of their 
 own, and that their speech is a mixture of altered Malay 
 and Siamese. 
 
 Yet, in his curious work upon the Binouas of Johore,f 
 Logan considers it demonstrated that this tribe, evidently 
 much more mixed with Malay than the Manthras, for- 
 merly had its own language, and supports his opinion by 
 many arguments. °^ In the special language, which these 
 indigenes employ when they go into the forest to look for 
 camphor trees J the same author has discovered a certain 
 number of non-Malay words. I have compared some of 
 them with words contained in two vocabularies from Siam 
 and Laos, published by Latham,*'^ and could detect no re- 
 semblance. A comparison of these same vocabularies with 
 that which M. de la Croix collected among the Sakaies of 
 Perak* led to the same result. On hispart, de la Croix 
 
 * The Manthras are mixed breeds from the neighbourhood of 
 Kessang, province of Malacca, in the peninsula of that name. 
 
 f The most southern district of the Malacca peninsula. 
 
 I This language is called bdssd kdpor — " camphor language.'' 
 Logan found it in use, and among all the tribes who give themselves 
 up to the gathering of camphor. These tribes believe that they 
 could not discover camphor trees if they used any other language 
 on these expeditions. Montano, who speaks of it in his notes, calls 
 ii.bahasa hapour. 
 
 * The province of Perak, two or three degrees north of that of 
 Malacca, is located near the central western part of the peninsula. 
 We have no information regarding the Negrito-Malay tribes that 
 may live farther north. 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. I47 
 
 counts only twelve Malay words out of the ninety com- 
 posing his vocabulary. The Eussian traveller, Miklucho- 
 Maclay, had brought together from among the savage 
 tribes of Johore and of the interior one hundred and sev- 
 enty, which, when submitted to the judgment of several 
 Malays, had been regarded by them as not of their lan- 
 guage.* Finally, de Castelnau, on his part, arrived at 
 analogous conclusions.^' 
 
 From all these facts it seems to me certain that the 
 ancient Negritos of the peninsula of Malacca must have 
 had a language of their own, almost entirely forgotten by 
 one part of their descendants, a little less forgotten per- 
 haps by others, because all have been more or less mixed 
 with the Malays, Siamese, and, it may be, with other eth- 
 nologic elements. Is this language related to that of the, 
 Mincopies? There is only a theoretical reply, but the 
 relative proximity of the populations permits propounding 
 it. Perhaps Man and Temple will some day tell us how 
 much of truth there is in it.f 
 
 Perhaps, too, they will be able to recognise whether 
 the singular affinities claimed by Hyde Clark to exist be- 
 tween the different Mincopy languages and African and 
 American tongues are well founded.^' Finally, it would 
 be very interesting to learn whether the language of the 
 
 * '8 The Russian traveller established the identity of language 
 among these tribes, isolated and with no other connection between 
 them, from Johore at the south of the peninsula to Ligor in the 
 south of Siam. This result appears to have struck him with aston- 
 ishment, but there is nothing surprising in it for one who has oc- 
 cupied himself with the history of the Negritos, considered as a 
 whole. 
 
 f I think it would be very interesting in this connection to find 
 out what language is spoken by the Negritos recently discovered in 
 the little archipelago of Tenasserim. Their relative isolation might 
 lead us to hope that the primitive language is here less altered than 
 on the continent. 
 
148 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Puttouas, of the mountains of Amarkantak, which differs 
 from all the Dravidian languages in its neighbourhood,'" 
 is in any way related to those spoken in the Andaman 
 Islands or in the Malay Peninsula. 
 
 Social Condition. — The Mincopies are exclusively 
 hunters and fishermen. Living upon the shores of a sea 
 filled with fishes, close to great forests where boars run at 
 large, and which furnish them besides honey and fruits, 
 they have not felt the necessity of wringing by labour 
 from the soil a supplement to their food supply; and 
 this very luxuriance of food, perhaps, has been of influ- 
 ence in keeping them at the lowest point in the social 
 scale.* 
 
 Most travellers who have visited the Philippines have 
 spoken of the Aetas as never having passed this status, 
 although placed in much less favourable surroundings. 
 Father La Gironiere" and Meyer "^ are very emphatic 
 on this point, and Giglioli has accepted their statements 
 without hesitation.^"' ^° Eienzi himself, to whom we owe 
 information upon the more happy past of this population, 
 represents them as to-day living exclusively upon wild 
 fruits and the products of the hunt or fishing.'*^ 
 
 But it is evident that in the Philippines this inferior 
 social condition is the result of the persecution waged 
 against the Negritos by more powerful and vigorous races. 
 ISTo doubt, also, false information, interestedly given by the 
 petty chiefs of Tagal villages to travellers, has led to con- 
 sidering as general a state of affairs perhaps more or less 
 exceptional.! I believe I cannot better reply to such exag- 
 
 * Francis Day informs us that a very small tribe of Mincopies, 
 camped near the English establishments and receiving daily rations, 
 took besides, in a single year five hundred boars, one hundred and 
 fifty turtles, twenty wild-oats, fifty iguanas and six dugongs. — Proc. 
 Asiat. Soc. of Bengal. 
 
 \ Manuscript note from Montano. 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 149 
 
 gerations than by quoting almost literally some of the 
 notes kindly sent me by Montano : * 
 
 " The Negritos of the province of Bataan apppear to 
 fully appreciate the security which the just and enlight- 
 ened administration of the governor, Don Estanislao 
 Chaves, gives them. I have visited them in the moun- 
 tains. . . . The abode of the chief, very comfortable, was 
 situated upon a hillock surrounded by other eminences. 
 Several houses were built there, each in a clearing of 
 some arpents, where they raised bananas, rice, sugar-cane, 
 and, above all, yams. . . . The chief shouted ; immedi- 
 ately cries broke forth in every direction. Soon after the 
 whole tribe was about me. ... In the province of Albay, 
 where conditions must be much as in Bataan, I have seen 
 a considerable quantity of cacao collected 'by the Negritos 
 in the islands of the gulf." 
 
 Even among the Mamanuas of Mindanao, whose last 
 survivors are constantly pursued by the fierce Manobos, 
 the French traveller saw upon the east coast of Lake 
 Mainit " a timid tribe, excessively suspicious, but which 
 had nevertheless built houses, cleared a bit of the forest, 
 and planted bananas and yams." 
 
 Thus all that has been said about the uncontrollable 
 vagabond instincts of the Aetas is inexact. If these little 
 Negroes in some parts of the archipelago lead a wander- 
 ing life, build no huts, cultivate no land, the fault is that 
 of their persecutors. 
 
 The very rude agriculture of which we have Just spoken 
 is again met with among the mixed-breed Negritos of 
 India and the Malay Peninsula. Among all, the method 
 appears to be the same. The Gond, as the Manthra, 
 commences by destroying the trees, to which he sets fire 
 when they are half dry. Then he sows or plants in the 
 
 * These notes have been published now by this traveller in his 
 Voyages aux Philippines et en Malaisie. 
 
150 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 midst of the hollows among the interlacing trunks grain 
 and yams. When the underbrush springs up again he 
 leaves his hut, makes some slight wicker shelters of leafy 
 boughs, and begins again elsewhere. A dog, a few fowls, 
 some pigs, live as they can on these poor clearings. The 
 chase, fishing, roots, and wild fruits seem to furnish the 
 principal resources of these populations.* 
 
 Such is the present condition of things. But have not 
 these tribes, to-day half wandering and scattered, known 
 better days and a higher social condition ? One can only 
 reply to this question in a general way. 
 
 Excepting the implements of polished stone which I 
 have mentioned, there is nothing about the Mincopies 
 which indicates that they were ever higher than they are 
 to-day. Having, so to speak, in their hands all that is 
 necessary to the satisfaction of the needs of savage life, 
 without relations with foreigners, nothing has come to 
 arouse in them new aspirations ; and their intellectual 
 activity has simply spent itself in multiplying and per- 
 fecting the stock of utensils suited to their mode of life. 
 We have seen that in this direction they have given proof 
 of real energy. 
 
 On the contrary, in the Philippines it is more than 
 probable that the Aetas have been more advanced. Ei- 
 enzi, who has summarised, unfortunately in a very Con- 
 fused way, the traditions relative to these people, repre- 
 sents them as having formerly occupied the whole of 
 Luzon, and as having long resisted the Tagal invasions. 
 They then had a sort of government. A council of chiefs 
 and old men attended to the execution of the laws.f 
 It is difficult not to suppose that at that time the soil 
 
 * Unpublished notes of Montano ; also his book, loc. cit.; 
 also '". 93. 
 
 f Exactly as now exists among the Bhils, half-breed Negritos. — 
 Rousselet. "'' 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINOOPIES. 151 
 
 was cultivated at least to the degree described by Mon- 
 tano. 
 
 Much more probably is it the same of the more or less 
 crossed tribes of Malacca. Montano tells us that the Mau- 
 thras still recall the time when their ancestors were mas- 
 ters of the whole country. At that time they say they 
 possessed many writings traced upon tree leaves. This 
 fact supposes in itself a social condition, of which Mon- 
 tano seems to have found a trace in the very name of 
 his guide. This man was called, as his father, his grand- 
 father, and no doubt their ancestors, Pang-lima-dalan, 
 a word which our traveller translates " a lord wlio admin- 
 isters the palace of a sultan." '^^^•'^^^ This descendant of 
 some great dignitary to-day performs the function of a 
 coolie on the place of a Chinese planter. In the peninsula 
 of Malacca, as in India, the conquest has perhaps de- 
 stroyed states already considerable and flourishing, but 
 memory of which has gone completely ; it has crowded 
 back into the forests and mountains the more or less 
 negroid race which founded them. There this race has 
 fallen into savagery again. Just as the Dravidians have 
 done.* It is as if broken and crumbled down into tribes 
 or single families, and the hierarchy of chiefs which 
 Logan has made known among the populations of Bermun 
 is probably all that remains of its ancient social state.f 
 
 * Among others, the Bhils ; yet these still have permanent 
 dwellings, well constructed and grouped in villages. That which 
 can be considered only hypothetical so long as it concerns tribes 
 of Bermun, appears certain for their brothers the Binouas. Logan '' 
 tells us that these were governed by kings whose origin was super- 
 natural, and whose descendants still live. 
 
 f In hi.s memoir upon the Binouas of Johore, Logan gives some 
 details upon five tribes, to whom all this practically applies. They 
 are the Udais or Orang-Pagos, the Jakuns, the Sakaies, the Min- 
 tiras or Manthras, and the Besisis. These tribes inhabit the high- 
 land of Cunong-Bermun, one of the highest chains of the Malay 
 
152 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Everywhere it appears among the Negritos that the 
 family has resisted this disintegration of the race. The 
 assertions of a Sepoy deserter, too readily accepted by 
 some writers, represented it as somewhat loosely organised 
 at the Andamans. The evidence gathered by Lieutenant 
 Saint-John and Mr. Day had already shown how inexact 
 these first statements were. Those which we owe to 
 Mouat,^^^ and, above all, to Man, have finished enlighten- 
 ing us upon this point; and after what I have already 
 said I need not return to the subject. 
 
 At the Philippines, even in the unhappy and savage 
 tribe which he visited. Father la Gironi^re determined 
 some analogous facts. " The Aetas," said he, " are faith- 
 ful in marriage, and have but one wife." The young man 
 who has made his choice addresses himself to the parents, 
 who never refuse, but send the girl into the forest, where 
 before day she conceals herself. The young man must 
 find her. If he does not succeed he must renounce all 
 claim to her. One sees that in reality the whole matter 
 is settled by the girl. 
 
 The notes and work of Montano confirm and complete 
 those of Father la Gironi^re. Our traveller makes known 
 also the curious ceremony which sanctions marriage among 
 the Aetas of Luzon. The two parties climb two flexible 
 trees growing near together, which an old man then makes 
 to bend toward each other. When the head of the man 
 touches that of the girl they are legally married.^^^ A 
 great feast and warlike dances complete the festival occa- 
 sion. Family bonds are very close between these poor 
 
 Peninsula. Among the Manthras there exist some upper chiefs 
 (baiin), whose jurisdiction extends over definite regions. Each batin 
 has under his orders ajinang, a,jukra or ajorokra, and an indefinite 
 number of ^an^^iw! as and oi ulubalaiigs. At the death of a hatin 
 his successor is chosen from among the sons of one of his sisters. — 
 Logan ^. 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 153 
 
 savages. The afEection of parents for children is lively', 
 and they, in turn, have for their father and mother equal 
 love and respect. Adultery, theft, or murder are pun- 
 ished with death. But these crimes are extremely rare. 
 
 The Aeta does not purchase his wife ; he simply gives 
 a small present to his future father-in-law. This one 
 gives his daughter a dowry — some articles which remain 
 her personal property. "Thus," says Montano, "these 
 Negritos know ^ Mens paraphernaux.'' " 
 
 One cannot object to my quoting further the following 
 details from Montano relative to the Negritos of Min- 
 danao : 
 
 " Among the poor Mamanuas, those former masters of 
 the soil, who have been reported as so much like brutes, 
 I have found the same usages as among the Negritos of 
 Marivel6s, the same respect for the aged, the same love 
 for children, the same worship of the dead. In this popu- 
 lation, so soon to disappear, custom has the same undis- 
 puted power. These customs are no doubt simple, and 
 their performance easy, but still something. It is not 
 necessary to believe that every Mamanua acts as he likes, 
 regardless of every one else. The deceived husband kills 
 his wife, but only if the adultery is clear, in which case 
 the relatives of the guilty woman give their consent to 
 her death. Otherwise he would be considered an assassin, 
 and subject himself to the death penalty, pronounced by 
 the chief of the tribe upon complaint of the relatives of 
 the victim. 
 
 " Adultery is, moreover, as all crimes, excessively rare 
 among the Negritos of all these regions. The manners of 
 young girls are very correct ; the slightest suspicion on this 
 point would hinder their finding husbands. 
 
 " Property is perfectly established, and passes by sale 
 or inheritance. The cleared field is the incontestable 
 property of him who has made it and of his heirs. At 
 
154 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 the death of a father, if the mother still lives, the prop- 
 erty is divided into halves ; one goes to the mother, the 
 other to the children in equal shares. 
 
 " If the children are already grown, the -widow contin- 
 ues to occupy the house of her husband ; if the children 
 are little, she takes them with her to the house of her 
 people. 
 
 "All differences are settled by the chief of the tribe, 
 but he seldom has to intervene. His decisions are always 
 scrupulously obeyed." ^^^ 
 
 One readily admits that Montano gives us a very dif- 
 ferent idea of things from his predecessors. It is one 
 more example to be added to the many which show how 
 wrongly one does to depend upon superficial observation 
 of the more backward and savage peoples. 
 
 Although more or less mixed with other races, the Ne- 
 gritos of Malacca would no doubt present analogous fea- 
 tures of customs if one knew them better. Montano tells 
 us that they never make war ; * that parents watch care- 
 fully over their young, at need depriving themselves of 
 food for their sakes. Logan tells us that among the Man- 
 thras adultery is punished by death, but only — as among 
 the Mamanuas — if proved by evidence. Arrest, pro- 
 nounced by the chief (iatin), is executed by the panglima. 
 The two guilty ones are laid in a stream, and their heads 
 held under water by a fork. The husband who is con- 
 vinced of his wife's infidelity, but who cannot prove it, 
 may leave her, on condition of giving her the house and 
 its surrounding fields, a certain quantity of stuffs, some 
 rings, and a little sum of money. The children remain 
 with their mother ; she cannot marry again until her di- 
 vorced husband has taken another wife. 
 
 M. de Saint- Pol Lias talked for a long time with To- 
 
 * Logan had already mentioned this very remarkable fact on the 
 part of savage and hunting tribes.'^ 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 155 
 
 lilo, chief of a tribe of S^kaies, before Malays who could, 
 if there had been reason for it, have denied his statements. 
 The information, then, is probably correct. In the Sakaies 
 tribes the family is fully organised. The man marries 
 two women, and ordinarily gives the father ten rmgguits 
 (fifty francs). If he is himself a chief, he gives as much 
 as thirty ringguits for a wife. Divorce is allowed, but is 
 very rare. Adultery is considered criminal, but can be 
 atoned for by money payments to the husband — of thirty 
 ringguits from each of the two guilty persons. Murder, 
 theft, are unknown in these tribes. Whoever is in need 
 of food asks of the first one met, who never refuses.^** 
 
 Industries. — I have already stated how the different 
 Negrito populations support theipselves. I should add 
 that none of those of whom I have spoken are canni- 
 bals.* This accusation has rested upon several among 
 them, particularly the Mincopies. But, far from seeking 
 human flesh, the Andamanese regard it as a deadly poison. 
 
 All Negritos boil or roast meats ; all but the Mincopies 
 know how to make fire, and very probably all employ the 
 same method, by friction of two bits of wood ; but even 
 for savages this is a painful and sometimes long labour. 
 Thus the Manthras, for example, who employ two pieces 
 of dry bamboo for the purpose, take much care of their 
 fireplace. This is, in fact, their chief piece of furniture, 
 and consists of a mass of earth enclosed in a frame of 
 
 * The Negrito-Papuans, mixed with the Papuans of New Guinea 
 and the neighbouring archipelagoes, may have yielded to the influ- 
 ence of example and gone over into anthropophagy, but from lack 
 of precise information it is not possible to decide upon this matter. 
 The confusion which has long existed in reference to these two 
 races, and which some recent travellers more or less maintain, ren- 
 ders any study of either of them alone very difSoult. Examination 
 of skulls enables us to refer to one or the other any given popula- 
 tion, but it does not enlighten us upon distinctive characteristics 
 in other relations. 
 13 
 
156 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 wood, where one takes care to keep the fire constantly sup- 
 plied with fuel. Some vessels in coarse clay, for cooking 
 roots and yams, and some baskets, complete the furniture. 
 Moreover, a little basket containing lime and betel-nut, 
 which these savages use in the same way as Malays do, is 
 almost always present. 
 
 In climates cold or temperate the most urgent needs, 
 after food, are those of lodgment and clothing. It is quite 
 otherwise in tropical regions. Here clothing is really a 
 question of luxury; it is often more inconvenient than 
 useful. It is much the same with lodgment ; and, in any 
 case, the simplest shelter, capable of giving shade in the 
 daytime, of preventing radiation at night, and of protect- 
 ing against rain, fully suffices. This is too often forgotten 
 by travellers, writers who see in extreme simplicity of cos- 
 tume or habitations a sign of intellectual inferiority and 
 lack of industry. 
 
 The Aetas are not more clothed than their brothers of 
 the Andamans. Moreover, those of their tribes who are 
 constantly pursued by relentless foes do not even build 
 temporary shelters, and lie down in trees or roll them- 
 selves in the warm ashes of a great fire kindled to keep 
 off the chill of the night. But we have seen that, placed 
 in more regular conditions of life, they raise huts and can 
 settle down. 
 
 The photographs of de Saint-Pol Lias show us the 
 Sakaies wearing a simple girdle knotted loosely in' front, 
 with the ends hanging down upon the thighs. Montano 
 has described the hut of a Manthra family living alone 
 in the midst of the woods. It is certainly anything but 
 luxurious; yet it presented this peculiarity — a flooring 
 two feet above the ground. Most peasant houses here 
 have only bare earth for floor. The poor savage of Ma- 
 lacca has been able to place himself in better hygienic 
 conditions than the European. 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 157 
 
 We have seen that among the Mincopies industries 
 of daily application are at times remarkably perfected. 
 Their bows, arrows, canoes, potteries and the like, place 
 them on the level of the most advanced savages, who are 
 far ahead of them in some respects. It is different with 
 the tribes of Aetas, whom persecution keeps constantly on 
 the move, which is not surprising. Among them the arms 
 for hunting anti war are reduced to a short lance, the bow, 
 and a single kind of arrows. But these last are poisoned, 
 and the slightest wound produces, if not death, at least 
 long and terrible sufferings, of which La Gironi^re has 
 drawn a picture from his own experiences.* 
 
 The poison is also used by the Manthras, the Sakaies, 
 and the other tribes of Bermun. But these Negrito mixed 
 breeds, although they are acquainted with the bow and 
 arrows, have replaced them by the sarlacane.^ One easily 
 recognises in this fact, as in many others, the Malay in- 
 fluence. 
 
 The Negrito half-breeds of Malacca know also how to 
 
 * The Father la Grironiere was hurt in the thumb by one of 
 these arrows as the result of digging up an Aeta skeleton, the first 
 brought to Europe, and now in the museum collections. He scarcely 
 noticed the wound, which he thought a scratch made by some spine. 
 After three days of incubation the effect of the poison became no- 
 ticeable by frightful pains ; the entire arm swelled ; then the trouble 
 reached the chest. After a month of torture the patient appeared 
 to be near his end ; but he resisted. During more than a year, 
 however, he still suffered in his chest. This ensemble of symptoms 
 does not at all suggest that which travellers and experimenters tell 
 us of the effect of other known poisons. It would appear that that 
 which the Aetas employ is of a peculiar nature. But perhaps the 
 treatment pursued by the intrepid traveller may have had some 
 share in the sufferings undergone. 
 
 ■f Montano ; Bro de Saint-Pol Lias. The latter has seen a rifled 
 sarbacane. Was tliis an imitation of one of our perfected firearms, 
 or have these savages really independently discovered this method 
 of assuring correctness of aim 1 
 
158 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 set a dreadful trap for great game, in which they capture 
 even tigers. They place at the end of a long path, cut 
 artificially through the underbrush, a strong lance at- 
 tached to a tree bent and held in place by a snap or catch. 
 The animal in passing sets the catch free and falls pierced 
 through.^^ 
 
 In India to-day, as in the time of Ctesias, the bow is, 
 so to speak, the characteristic weapon of the Dravidian 
 populations. The Gonds alone, it appears, have given it 
 up, adopting the hatchet and pick."* 
 
 EELIGIOUS AND MORAL CHARACTERISTICS. 
 
 Belief in Superior Beings. — As many other savage 
 populations, the Negritos, who form the principal subject 
 of this chapter, have many times been described as abso- 
 lutely without religion. It is not at all so. Only in un- 
 derstanding their rudimentary beliefs we must not start 
 with the ideas which instructed Europeans hold upon 
 religious matters, even such as declare themselves un- 
 believers. 
 
 One knows already of this matter in reference to the 
 Mincopies. One knows how these reputed atheists have 
 a complete mythology, where exist side by side singularly 
 spiritual conceptions and childish and bizarre ideas. 
 When the other Negritos shall have been studied as 
 thoroughly as the Andamanese, equivalent beliefs may 
 perhaps be found ; but such study has not yet been made. 
 
 We are indeed less informed in regard to the Aetas. 
 Montano in his notes reports that he found no sign' of re- 
 ligion ; but, enlightened by a personal experience, he has 
 guarded himself against concluding that they have no 
 belief.* La G-ironi^re, while stating that these little Ne- 
 
 * Montano had been told that the Bagobos had no religion. 
 Aided by circumstances, he has found among them a perfectly defl- 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINOOPIES. I59 
 
 groes have no religion, informs us that they adore, at least 
 temporarily, rocks or tree trunks, in which they find a re- 
 semblance to some animal. It appears to me probable 
 that the homage is addressed to something superior to 
 these material objects — may be to spirits or genii of the 
 mountains or forests ; for Eienzi tells us that these sav- 
 ages believe in bad spirits called nonos, and ofEer them 
 sacrifices. 
 
 This belief in spirits and genii reappears among all the 
 tribes of Bermun, and consequently among the Sakaies, 
 the Manthras, etc. Here it has for official representative 
 a body of priests — or, better, of sorcerers — called poyand 
 or pawang. After having given upon this point details 
 which I cannot reproduce here, Logan summarises his 
 opinion in almost the following terms : " We find in 
 these tribes a pure Shamanism with its accompaniment 
 of charms and talismans. This is a living faith, dating 
 from the remotest times in Asia, which has preserved its 
 original simplicity and vigour, unspoiled by either Bud- 
 dhism or Mohammedanism." 
 
 It is hardly necessary to recall that among the greater 
 part of the Dravidian tribes, among even those which 
 have attained a high degree of civilisation, one recognises 
 a foundation of beliefs analogous to the preceding, under- 
 lying the facts borrowed from the various Hindoo sects 
 and from Islam. 
 
 Beliqf in a Future Life. — The Negritos all believe that 
 the spirit survives the body ; that it feels needs analogous 
 to those of the living, and wishes that one should show it 
 attention.* I have previously summarised what Man has 
 
 nite religious conception, not at all rudimentary, which he has 
 made known in one of his communications to the Geographical 
 Society. 
 
 * The Sakaie questioned by de Saint-Pol I;ias stated that he 
 had no idea of superior beings or of another life ; but can this re- 
 
160 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 told us regarding the Andamanese. The so precise de- 
 tails which we owe to him have, moreover, confirmed in 
 general the conclusions which I had drawn in my Etude 
 sur les Mincopies from the facts already mentioned by 
 Day.*" 
 
 The Aetas have a great veneration for the dead. La 
 Gironiere says : " During several years they go to deposit 
 a little tobacco and betel upon their graves. The bow 
 and arrows which belonged to the deceased are hung, the 
 day when he is buried, over his grave, and every night, 
 according to the belief of his comrades, he comes forth to 
 go to the chase." ^'^ 
 
 The Negritos of Malacca appear not to have such pre- 
 cise ideas. Logan says that the tribes of Bermun light 
 a fire for several nights in succession upon the tomb, in 
 order to prevent the spirit from crying. Montano adds, 
 that among the Manthras the tomb is placed far from the 
 houses, " in order that the dead may not hear the crowing 
 of the cock." But neither of them speak of offerings in- 
 tended for the spirit of the dead man, although among 
 the Manthras the tomb is evidently the object of peculiar 
 cares. 
 
 Chastity, Modesty. — Montano has given us informa- 
 tion relative to the chastity of young Aeta girls, Man 
 upon those of young Mincopies. Symes had already rec- 
 ognised this virtue among these latter, and adds a very 
 significant fact. Two young Mincopy girls, prisoners on 
 an English vessel, soon became reassured in regard to all 
 other dangers ; but although they were lodged in a room 
 
 salt of a short conversation invalidate the circumstantial and pre- 
 cise information given by Logan? Evidently not. It is probable 
 that Totilo did not care to reply upon a subject touching npon the 
 most sacred sentiments. Any one who has attempted to draw out a 
 Basque or Breton peasant upon the superstitions generally received 
 in his region will readily admit this. 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 161 
 
 by themselves, they never slept at the same time. They 
 watched alternately over their honour. 
 
 Let us add that no one who has so far visited the Anda- 
 mans has made the slightest allusion to facts or scenes 
 analogous to those which the discoverers of the Pacific 
 archipelagoes so frequently describe. So far as chastity is 
 concerned, the Andaman women appear incontestably 
 superior to the Polynesian women. 
 
 Among the accusations usually made against a crowd 
 of savage tribes, one of the most frequent is that of lack 
 of modesty. But one already knows that travellers have 
 often been mistaken in this matter, so far as to have con- 
 sidered as a refinement of immodesty exactly that which 
 in the mind of the natives was only an act of the com- 
 monest decency. 
 
 We lack precise information upon this point for the 
 greater part of the Negrito populations ; but at the Anda- 
 man s, where the dress is as scanty as possible, we know, 
 thanks to Mr. Man, that this clothing exists, that it has a 
 particular name, and that to show one's self unclad is re- 
 garded as indecent by the natives. Although showing 
 itself in other ways than among us, modesty exists no less 
 among these islanders. 
 
 Moreover, the history of a Mincopy brought to Europe 
 shows how much these islanders are affected by the senti- 
 ments of which we speak. When one wished to photo- 
 graph John Andaman standing naked, he took off his 
 garments with visible reluctance ; he put them on again 
 with evident satisfaction. This man, almost a savage, 
 blushed at the thought of being seen naked. 
 
 General Character. — From the entirety of the facts 
 here presented, it appears that the Negritos are far from 
 meriting the accusations of which they are too often the 
 object. 
 
 The Mincopies, so long looked upon as dreadful can- 
 
162 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 nibals, when seen near by have become a sort of spoiled 
 children, a little capricious, but good in character. Mouat 
 paints this people as gay, laughing, fond of singing and 
 dancing. Far from being intractable and fierce, it has 
 shown itself humane and hospitable as soon as it has 
 ceased to fear. 
 
 The English traveller adds : " It is courageous, hard- 
 ened to toil, adroit, extremely active, and under tlie in- 
 fluence of civilisation it would become intelligent and 
 industrious." We have seen that Man confirms all these 
 opinions. 
 
 Montano tells me, in one of his notes : " Not only are 
 the Negritos not fierce, they are truly humane. They care 
 for the sick with much devotion, even when they do not 
 belong to their family." 
 
 The same traveller writes : " The Manthra does not 
 lack intelligence, but his thoughtlessness and idleness bar 
 his progress." At the same time he attributes to this peo- 
 ple mild manners — as we have already seen. Montano is 
 here entirely in agreement with Logan. There are, how- 
 ever, found among the tribes of Bermun generally a cer- 
 tain inconstancy and a ready susceptibility to emotion. 
 " It is necessary to treat them like children,'' said he. This 
 is precisely the expression employed by Saint-John in 
 speaking of the Mincopies. The two populations resem- 
 ble each other. One sees it in moral as in physical char- 
 acter, and to deny them fundamental ethnic identity is 
 evidently impossible for any one who has at all studied the 
 question. 
 
 Conclusion. — There results from this study, it seems 
 to me, one conclusion, evident and easy to formulate. 
 Almost unanimously the populations we have been con- 
 sidering have been regarded as very low in the scale of 
 humanity. In regard to the Mincopies particularly, some 
 savants, of great merit otherwise, seem to have believed 
 
NEGRITOS OTHER THAN THE MINCOPIES. 163 
 
 that here finally one had placed his hand upon the miss- 
 ing link between man and the ape. We have just seen 
 that this is not so ; and that where they have lived most 
 outside of movement and mixture — which alone elevate 
 societies — the Negritos show themselves true men in all 
 things and for all things. 
 
CHAPTEE VI. 
 
 THE NEGKILLOS, OK PYGMIES OF AFRICA. 
 
 Ancient travellers; modern discoveries. — Western Negrillos : M'Bou- 
 lous ; Baboukas ; Akouas. — Eastern Negrillos : Cincalles ; Mazo ; 
 Maleas. — Negrillos of the Welle ; Akkas. — Stature ; features ; 
 colour ; proportions. — Tebo and Chairallah. — General observa- 
 tions. — Primitive migrations. — Importance of traditions and of 
 legends. 
 
 The little men of Africa, interviewed by the ancients, 
 and whose very real existence has given rise to so many 
 fables, have been rediscovered only very recently by the 
 moderns. 
 
 In 1625 Battel first made known certain facts col- 
 lected by him in Loango.* At eight days' journey to the 
 east of Cape Negro f is located, according to him, the ter- 
 ritory of Mani Kesock, and to the northeast of this "dwells 
 a nation of pygmies who call themselves Matinibas, of the 
 height of a boy of twelve years, but of extraordinary big- 
 ness. Their food is the flesh of beasts, which they shoot 
 
 * Andrew Battel. English sailor, made prisoner by the Portuguese 
 in 1589, was taken to the Congo district, where he remained a cjip- 
 tive nearly eighteen years. His adventures were published in the 
 collection of Purehas. Walckenaer "'' has given a detailed synopsis 
 of them, after having shown the evidences of truthfulness in the 
 narrative. 
 
 ■f Not the Cape Negro at 16° 3' south latitude and 9° 34' east 
 longitude, on the south of Benguela, but Cape Negro at the western 
 limit of the Bay of Mayomba — perhaps at 3° 30'. 
 
 164 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 165 
 
 with arrows. They pay Maui Kesock a tribute of ele- 
 phants' tusks and tails. Although there is no great fierce- 
 ness in their characters, they do not wish to enter the 
 houses of the Marambas, nor to receive them into their 
 villages. . . . Their women use the bow and arrows with 
 as much skill as the men. They are not afraid to go alone 
 into the woods with no other protection than their poi- 
 soned arrows." ■**' 
 
 Without making known the sources of his informa- 
 tion, Dapper^' gives analogous details about the Mimos 
 or Bakke-Bakhes, whom he seems to place a little farther 
 south, in the heart of Loango. 
 
 Some very recent observations, of which the oldest 
 does not appear to date back beyond 1861,"°' '* have come 
 to confirm these old statements. The members of a Ger- 
 man expedition have rediscovered in Loango, under the 
 name of Baionkos, the Bakke-Bakkes of Dapper, and have 
 brought back some portraits, and some photographs.* "^' '^ 
 Dr. Touchard has reported the recent disappearance of a 
 Gaboon population, the Akoas,^^^ of which one small group 
 was yet settled, in 1868, in the woods to the north of the 
 Eiver JSTazareth. The Admiral Fleuriot de Langle was 
 able to photograph one of its representatives (Fig. 21). 
 This Akoa was a veritable dwarf. It is the same of the 
 M'Boulous, Chekianis or Osiekanis, visited by Touchard 
 and Marche.^" Wedged in between the Fans and the 
 Pongoues, they are likely to disappear like their brotheis- 
 the Akoas. 
 
 In grouping together the various information derived 
 from these photographs and descriptions, Hamy has been 
 able, to trace a very nearly complete portrait of some of 
 
 * 188, 15 1 borrow from Hamy's work these references, as also the 
 greater part of the following ones relative to the history of the west- 
 ern Negrillos. 
 
166 THE PyaMIES. 
 
 these dwarfs of Africa. The Akoa studied by Admiral 
 Flenriot " appeared about forty years of age, and meas- 
 ured 1"39 to 1"40. He was admirably proportioned, 
 He had a very little head, hairs well planted and less 
 woolly than those of Negroes properly so called, a straight 
 nose, the commissure of the lips well marked without dis- 
 playing anything of that brutal muzzle which some types 
 of African Negroes present." * The photograph justifies 
 these expressions. The head is round but relatively strong ; 
 its height, as compared with the total height of the figure, 
 would be pretty nearly in the same proportion already re- 
 ported by Hamy in a Babongo — one sixth, f The face is 
 scarcely a little prognathous. The muscular masses of 
 the thorax and the upper members have outlines at once 
 rounded and firm, but the lower members are thin, the 
 feet are plainly flat soled, and the heels project a little 
 too much. 
 
 Marche attributes to his M'Boulous a dirt-brown col- 
 our.]; The Admiral Flenriot confines himself to saying 
 that these dwarfs are less dark than their taller neigh- 
 bours. 
 
 One has just seen that the admiral has spoken of the 
 stature of his Akoa only approximately. Marche also lim- 
 its himself to saying that the M'Boulous do not exceed 
 I'PCO. Dr. Falkenstein has been more precise. The adult 
 Babouko photographed by him was about forty years old, 
 and measured l'?365.* The mean of these four numbers 
 
 * Letter from the admiral, quoted by Hamv. 
 
 f This proportion is the greatest yet reported in a human race. 
 In this particular the Negrillos outdo the Negi'itos. 
 
 'I; These M'Boulous are generally lean and scrawny, in place of 
 being robust as the Akoas. Marche saw in this the result of the un- 
 wholesome environment within which they are confined. 
 
 * The other was a youth of fifteen years, whose stature was only 
 
'''''''■''IIP 
 
 Fig. 21. — Azoa. (After Admiral Fleuriot de Langle.) 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 167 
 
 at our disposition is 1-439, but as two of the numbers 
 were maxima, it is almost certain that this figure is too 
 large. So far as stature goes, these little western Negroes 
 are slightly inferior to the ISTegritos, and approach the 
 Bushmen, whose mean stature is l-^STO. But we shall see 
 that there are other Negrillos whose stature descends 
 even lower. 
 
 Moreover, the Negrillos differ from the Bushmen in an 
 anatomical character of even greater importance. The 
 latter are clearly dolichocephalio or subdolichocephalic* 
 On the contrary, the Akoas, the Bongos, etc., are brachy- 
 cephalic, or at least subbrachycephalie.f The measures 
 taken on the skulls brought back by de Langle, Marche, 
 etc., have placed this fact beyond question ; moreover, it 
 is apparent from a simple inspection of the photographs 
 (Figs. 21, 25). 
 
 Hamy has not contented himself with recognising and 
 characterising the Negrillo type among the tribes, remained 
 more or less pure, in the Gaboon, lower Ogowe, and Lo- 
 ango regions. He has pursued it further, and shown that 
 this type has played a very real and important ethnologic 
 rdle in the formation of several populations of those coun- 
 tries and neighbouring districts ; populations all of which 
 are related, moreover, to the Negro type properly so called. 
 Making use of information of every kind, he has shown 
 that crossing between dolichocephalic and brachycephalic 
 Negroes could alone account for the mixture of characters, 
 and especially for the morphological differences of the 
 head established from individual to individual among the 
 various tribes of the basins of the Ogow6, of Fernand Vaz. J 
 
 * Index, 77-45. f Ibid., 83-23. 
 
 J I ought to recall here, among other studies, that made by Hamy 
 of the eranioraetric results obtained by Owen upon a collection of 
 skulls brought back from this region by Du Chaillu. The learned 
 Englishman presented the measurements themselves. Prom them 
 
168 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 On their return from the perilous voyage which was 
 crowned by the discovery of the Alima and of the Li- 
 coma, Brazza and Ballay collected in an island of the 
 upper Ogowe four skulls and one complete skeleton — to- 
 day in the anthropological gallery of the museum. But, 
 of these five skulls, two have a mean horizontal index of 
 82'24:, and are therefore almost truly brachycephalic ; '^ 
 the other three are dolichocephalic. The former are the 
 heads of Negrillos, the latter of Negroes. 
 
 Let ITS add that observations gathered by Marche 
 among the N'Javis, the Apindjis, the Okotas, and the 
 Akoas show that among these populations with relatively 
 round heads the stature is, moreover, notably reduced.* 
 Among the N'Javais it does not reach IfGO. Among the 
 Akoas the mean stature of men is l^SO to lf53, that of 
 women from 1"40 to 1?43.*'" At the same time the colour 
 pales, the forms are elegant — above all, among the women, 
 whose figure, a little plump, is very agreeable. Evidently 
 the Negro type proper is here modified in places by a dis- 
 tinct ethnological element, and we may consider all this 
 region as having formerly been, as even now being in a 
 
 our countryman calculated the indices, and showed that, among 
 ninety-three skulls in the collection, forty-nine only were dolicho- 
 cephalic or subdolichocephalic, thirty-three were mesatieephalic, 
 eleven subbrachycephalic, two brachycephalic. The intervention of 
 an ethnic element pertaining to this last type appears very clearly 
 from this discussion, which has been for Hamy the beginning of all 
 his works upon the subject.'' 
 
 * Hamy connects the Obongos met with by Du Chaillu near 
 Niembouai in the land of the Ashangos (1° 58' 54" south latitude 
 and 11° 56' 38" east longitude). But the dirty-yellow color, and, 
 above all. the hair growing in little tufts tightly coiled, have led to 
 connecting these dwarfs with the Bushmen. Yet the traveller did 
 not observe, in any of the women seen, either steatopygia or tablier. 
 Some uncertainties, then, are possible relative to the ethnic affinities 
 of the Obongos which cranial measurements alone can remove.''' 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OF AFRICA. 169 
 
 degree, a centre of Ifegrillo population. I shall later re- 
 turn to this distinction to be made between the past and 
 the present. 
 
 I believe that the Tenda Maie, country of small area 
 included within a bend of the Rio Grande, should be con- 
 sidered as another centre of the same nature, but located 
 more to the north and west. Behold what MoUien said 
 of it, who visited these countries in 1818 : " There is little 
 uniformity in the general character of the physiognomy 
 of these ; but the inhabitants of the village of Faran are 
 remarkable for the littleness of their stature, the slight- 
 ness of their limbs, and the gentleness of their voice. 
 They are truly the pygmies of Africa." * "* In spite of 
 the incompleteness of this brief notice, it is easy to see 
 that the Tenda Male supports a mixed population, of 
 which the Negrillos are an element. 
 
 Although the Tenda Maie is very distant from the 
 spot where the Nasamones of Herodotus were taken pris- 
 oners, it is difficult not to connect the little men of whom 
 the Greek historian speaks with the pygmies of MoUien. 
 The upper basins of the Eio Grande and the Niger cannot 
 be very distant from each other, and it is easy to admit 
 that they formerly supported the same races of men. 
 
 The Gaboon, the Ogowe, the Loango, are very distant 
 from the Tenda Maie, and between the two extreme 
 points one has as yet reported no Negrillos. I am dis- 
 posed, however, to admit that these different populations 
 of little stature are related. We know that the whole 
 Guinean region has been the theatre of successive inva- 
 sions, which have led to the seacoast conquerors coming 
 from the interior. The direction in which these swarm- 
 ing tribes marched, their murderous habits, of which the 
 Dahomans still give ' to-day an example only too well 
 
 * The village of Faran is situated at about 14° 15' west longitude 
 and 10° + north latitude. 
 13 
 
170 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 known, easily explain how a relatively feeble race might 
 — must necessarily — have disappeared over a considerable 
 area. We have just seen this disappearance taking place 
 in our days, under our eyes, among some of these tribes. 
 It is doubtless one of the last scenes of a drama whose 
 earlier acts go far back into the past. 
 
 I believe we may, from the entirety of the facts, con- 
 clude that the Negrillos of the Rio Grande and those of 
 the Gulf of Guinea district are near relatives, and that 
 both are related to the little men reported to Herodotus 
 by the pilgrims of Gyrene. 
 
 Almost directly east of the Gaboon pygmy group, in 
 Central Africa, there probably exists a great Negrillo cen- 
 tre of population, of which the ancients could hardly 
 have known. The information gathered by Stanley from 
 Ahmed, son of Djoumah, seems to me too precise not 
 to have a basis of truth. ^^ This ivory dealer had seen 
 the little men of whom he spoke ; he had fought with 
 them ; he admitted that he had been beaten by them ; 
 and his accounts agree with all the other information 
 gathered by the great American traveller. From all evi- 
 dence it appears that towards the centre of the region 
 comprised in the great bend of the Livingstone theie 
 dwells a numerous population of dwarfs called Vouatouas, 
 spread over a great area, and perfectly independent.* On 
 his journey to Ikoundou (2° 53' south latitude) Stanley 
 captured an individual belonging to this tribe or a neigh- 
 bouring one. This Vouatoua was 1°41 ; he had a large 
 head, a face surrounded with an uneven growth of beard, 
 and a light chocolate colour. Like the little Negroes of 
 
 * Upon Stanley's great map this region is placed at about 3° 
 south latitude, and at 19° east longitude. The trader adds that the 
 Vouatouas are also called Vouahouaangas, Vauakoumas, and Voua- 
 koumous. 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 171 
 
 Battel, these Vouatouas are hunters of the elephant and 
 users of poisoned arrows. 
 
 Dr. Wolff, in betaking himself to LouUengo, king or 
 chief of the Bahoubas, met with a population which is 
 no doubt related to Stanley's Vouatouas. These Batotias, 
 as he calls them, are evidently of the same colour — a yel- 
 lowish brown, lighter than that of the Negroes of greater 
 stature. Yet the traveller asserts that they have no 
 beard. These Batouas, moreover, would be the smallest 
 race known if the information given by Dr. WolfE is 
 exact. None of them, according to him, surpass l'?40, 
 and the mean stature would be I'fSO. The Batouas are 
 numerous in the region, but they do not for that mix 
 with the rest of the population. They live by themselves 
 in villages scattered over the Bahouba territory.^^ In 
 spite of the meagreness of our information relative to the 
 Negrillos of Central Africa, the ensemble of their physical 
 and social characters plainly connects them with those of 
 whom we have already spoken. We are now about to 
 find entirely similar features among their brothers, the 
 descendants of the pygmies of Homer and of Pomponius 
 Mela. 
 
 The tradition relative to these latter has never been 
 lost. It has been preserved particularly among the Ara- 
 bian geographers, who have placed a River of the Pygmies 
 to the south of Abyssinia. Leon d'Avanchers thinks he has 
 identified this river with a stream which rises in the Anko 
 Mountains, a little north of the equator. It is in this re- 
 gion and under the thirty-second degree of east longitude 
 that the eminent missionary placed his Wa-BeriMmos," 
 called also CincallSs, which is equivalent to What a marvel ! 
 The eminent missionary himself saw in the kingdom of 
 Gera several of these " dwarfs, beings deformed, short, 
 big-headed, at most four feet in height " (1"30 circa).^ 
 The information collected by d'Abaddie from Amace, 
 
172 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 ambassador of the King of KuUo, and from a woman, na- 
 tive of Kaffa (near 6° north latitude and 34° east longi- 
 tude), confirm the preceding fact. The Malas or Maze- 
 Maleas were a little over 1"50 in height ; they are black, 
 and rarely reddish {taym).* The information kindly 
 supplied to me by d'Abbadie appears to locate these 
 small Negroes a little farther to the north. But this very 
 fact would suggest that here, as in western Africa, they 
 are dispersed over a more or less extended area, and that 
 their tribes bear diEEerent names. Everything suggests, 
 then, that there exists south of the country of the Gallas 
 a centre of Negrillo population, and I believe I am not 
 rash in connecting these eastern tribes with the pygmies 
 of Pomponius Mela, just as I have identified with the lit- 
 tle men of Herodotus the dwarfs of Senegambia. 
 
 As modern travellers have advanced farther and farther 
 up the Nile, they have gathered new testimonies relative 
 to populations of very little stature. The existence of 
 true pygmies thus became more and more probable, so 
 much so that in the Instructions, drawn up by a commit- 
 tee of the Academy of Sciences, for the expedition pro- 
 jected by d'Escayrac de Lauture "■ ^^ it was deemed neces- 
 sary to call especial attention to the subject. But, one 
 knows it, the Europeans met no little men in ascending 
 the Nile to its sources. Speke alone saw at the court of 
 Kamrasi a deformed dwarf, whose portrait he gives us. 
 But this design and the details accompanying it show 
 that Kymenia, far from belonging to a pygmy race, did 
 not even know of the existence of these little blacks."" 
 
 It is Schweinfurth who has had the honour of demon- 
 strating what truth the myth of Homer concealed, and of 
 justifying the words of Aristotle. But to do so he was 
 obliged to quit the Nile Valley, to gain the valley of the 
 
 * Manuscript communication from M. d'Abbadie; also '. 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. I73 
 
 "Welle, to pass through the country of the Niam-Niams, 
 and to penetrate to that of the Monbuttos, whom he first 
 visited. It was at the court of Munza that he discovered 
 the dwarf race still called in the country by the name of 
 Ahhas which Mariette has read by the siie of a portrait 
 of a dwarf upon a monument of the ancient Egyptian 
 empire. 
 
 From information given to the eminent traveller by 
 Adimokou, chief of the little colony supported by Munza 
 near his royal residence, it appears that the country of the 
 Akkas or Tikki-Tikkis, is situated at about 3° north lati- 
 tude and 35° east longitude.* This country is probably 
 great. Tolerated by the surrounding populations and 
 protected by their powerful neighbours, the Akkas appear 
 to occupy a continuous area and number nine distinct 
 tribes, each with its own chief or king.f ^'^ At the time 
 of Schweiuf urth's visit these tribes had submitted, at least 
 in part, to Moummeri, one of Munza's vassals, who had 
 come to render homage to his sovereign at the head of a 
 veritable regiment of these little Negroes, so that the 
 European traveller had at once under his eyes several 
 hundred of these dwarf warriors.*'^ 
 
 In exchange for one of his dogs Schweinf urth obtained 
 
 * Munza employed the word Akka to designate these little blacks ; 
 Moummeri, their ruler, called them Tikki-Tikkis. 
 
 f This journey is one of the most remarkable among those which 
 have so rapidly increased our knowledge of the interior of Africa. 
 It lasted from July, 1868, until the first part of November, 1871. 
 The greater part of it was in countries absolutely unexplored pre- 
 viously by Europeans. The explorer had gathered rich collections 
 of every kind, numerous observations, notes, drawings, maps. Al- 
 most all these scientific treasures perished in a fire. One can appre- 
 ciate the profound grief of a sava?ii compelled to recount his journey 
 almost entirely from his memory. His work is, nonft'the less, the 
 most precious for a knowledge of regions until then entirely un- 
 known. 
 
174 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 from Munza one of these Akkas, whose portrait he has 
 given.* He intended bringing him back with him to 
 Europe, but the poor Ns6voue died of dysentery at Berber, 
 to the south of Khartoum. Perhaps his skeleton, found 
 by some traveller, will figure some day in one of our mu- 
 seums, and will furnish to science the anatomical facts 
 which now are lacking to it. 
 
 In fact, the information which we have regarding the 
 Akkas has all been collected upon living individuals, and 
 but few of them. The measurements and notes taken by 
 Schweinfurth perished in the fatal fire which devoured 
 the fruit of three years of travels and studies, and it was 
 very difficult to make up this loss even in part. However, 
 Marno had the good fortune in his travels to meet with 
 two female Akka slaves, a young girl and an adult.*"'' ''*• '^ 
 Another adult female, Saida, sent to Italy by Gessi Pacha, 
 has been hastily studied by Giglioli.'^ Chaille-Long Bey 
 also saw a woman who came from the country of the 
 Niam-Mams in company with a sister of Munza.^'' "° I 
 reproduce her picture here (Fig. 22). Vossion, vice-con- 
 sul of France at Khartoum, has briefly described a male 
 adult in an unpublished letter, which he has permitted me 
 to consult. But although these pieces of evidence confirm 
 and supplement each other in some points, they would 
 have left much to be desired if a most fortunate circum- 
 stance had not supplied European anthropologists the op- 
 portunity of studying for themselves the curious human 
 race of whom we speak. 
 
 * Since Munza has learned the value of the Akkas as an object 
 of curiosity, he has given some of them from time to time to the 
 great merchants of ivory who visit him each year. Thus an indi- 
 vidual of this race reached Khartoum, sent as a present to the Gov- 
 ernor of Soudan by Emin Bey (Dr. Sohnitzer). This is the one 
 briefly described by Mr. Vossion, vice-consul of France, in a letter 
 from which I present an extract farther along. 
 
Fig. 22. — Akka Woman placed beside a Man of Avekage Height. 
 (After Chaill^-Long-Bey.) 
 
THE NEGEILLOS, OR PYGMIES OF AFRICA. 175 
 
 A traveller more courageous than wise, Miani, had 
 followed in Schweinfurth's footsteps, and had arrived 
 among the Monbuttos. Less for- 
 tunate than his predecessor, he suc- 
 cumbed to the fatigues of the jour- 
 ney and died, bequeathing to the 
 Society of Italian Geography two 
 young Akkas whom he had got in 
 exchange for a dog and a calf. 
 After some vicissitudes, Tebo and 
 Ohairallah were received by a man 
 of science and of heart — Count 
 Miniscalchi Erizzo — who had them 
 brought up under his own eyes.*" 
 They could thus be followed and 
 studied at leisure, while their photo- 
 graphs, liberally distributed by tjie 
 Geographical Society, went to arouse 
 everywhere the observations of an- 
 thropologists (Figs. 23, 24, 25). 
 
 This mass of data has had for 
 first result the dissipation of certain 
 doubts which had been expressed 
 upon the subject of the reality of 
 Schweinfurth's discovery. Some 
 persons regarded the first individ- 
 uals measured by travellers as chil- 
 
 • Already, on their arrival at Cairo, 
 Tebo and Chairallah had been examined 
 by Colucci Pacha, Regny Bey, Dr. Gaillar- 
 dot, and by Messrs. Sohweinfurth, Owen, 
 Cornalia, and Panoeri, whom chance had 
 brought together in the capital of Egypt. 
 Their observations have appeared in the Bulletins de I'lnstitut 
 Bgyptien in 1873 and 1874. These little Negroes have also given 
 occasion for many publications.-'^- 1''. ''». '»■ "«■ «^' '«^' »'■ '" 
 
 Fig. 23. — Tebo, Side 
 View. (After photo- 
 graph of Count Min- 
 iscalchi.) 
 
176 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 dren, and wished to consider Tebo and Chairallah chil- 
 dren destined to grow larger.* The precise observations 
 
 24 2S 
 
 Fio. 24. — Tebo, Front View. Fig. 25. — Chairallah, Front View. 
 
 (After photographs of Count Minisoalohi.) 
 
 of Marno, those of Giglioli and Chaille-Long, upon three 
 women, those of Vossion upon a man, have replied to the 
 
 * Panizza ;"' also the Anthropological Society of Madrid. 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OF AFRICA. 177 
 
 first hypothesis ; and the growing old of at least one of 
 the Akkas of Miani, without his passing, without even 
 reaching, the maximum stature suggested by Schwein- 
 furth, has refuted the second.* 
 
 The Kussian traveller measured six men ; none, he said, 
 exceeded l"oO. Vossiou's man, aged thirty-two, was only 
 1"31. Tebo, the older of Miani's Akkas, had taken on the 
 characteristics of manhood, and appears to have stopped 
 growing at the height of l'?42, very nearly the mean of 
 the three numbers. The woman of twenty to twenty-five 
 years old, measured by Marno, was l'?36 ; that of Chaille- 
 Long, l'?216 at most; Saida, 1?34; giving a mean of 
 l^SOS. The mean of the two sexes would be lf356. 
 These numbers place the Akkas in the matter of stature 
 below the Mincopies, or even below the Bushmen. But 
 the number of measures taken upon African pygmies is 
 yet much too small for us to regard the result as satis- 
 factory. This reservation is so much the more justifiable 
 as no traveller has yet found an Akka presenting a 
 stature so short as that of the Bushman woman, measured 
 by Barrow, of 1"14, or that individual of the same race 
 
 * Some doubt has arisen upon the purity of blood of the Akkas 
 of Miani, and Hamy has made formal reservations on the subject. 
 These reservations, perhaps, have some foundation in the case of 
 Chairallah. On the one hand, his cephalic index is very low (77-52) ; 
 on the other hand, in their beautiful work upon the Akkas, Mante- 
 gazza and Zannetti, founding the prediction upon the presumed ages 
 of the two subjects and upon the laws of growth, stated that Tebo 
 would cease growing at a lower stature than Chairallah. The result 
 has confirmed this prediction. Chairallah, still growing, was already 
 l';41 ; Tebo, with all the characteristics of an adult, and whose 
 growth appeared to have ceased, had stopped at 1"42 (Giglioli). 
 Moreover the latter had a very high cephalic index (80-23). Even 
 then, if one should have some doubts about Chairallah, and believe 
 that he had perhaps some little blood from the Negro race, it would 
 not be the same regarding Tebo. 
 
178 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 to which Dr. Weisbach attributes 1? only. Yet the ob- 
 servations of Dr. Wolff, which I have above recalled, 
 appeared to confirm the general conclusion resulting from 
 these measures. One might indeed say that these African 
 Negrillos, evidently all of the same stock, were in reality 
 the smallest human race. 
 
 Schweinfurth attributed to the Akkas a very large 
 head and a large and almost spherical skull. This last 
 detail is certainly exaggerated. Tiie highest index accu- 
 rately made is that resulting from the measurements of 
 Marno ; it is only 8285 — equal to about 80'8o upon the 
 dry skull. The mean for three young subjects is 78'03, 
 or more than 76 on the dry skull.* We are far from the 
 true dolichocephaly of the Negroes, and find again the 
 figures which we found to characterise the Negrillos. 
 
 The colour of the Akkas, according to Schweinfurth, 
 recalls the colour of coffee slightly roasted. The obser- 
 vations upon Tebo and Chairallah confirm this opinion ; 
 but Count Miniscalchi has noticed that this colour is 
 deeper in summer, paler in winter. The hair is almost 
 the same colour, lighter in Chairallah than in Tebo. In 
 both it is distinctly woolly and tufted. The beard, which 
 has appeared in Tebo upon the chin and the upper lip, is 
 of the same character. 
 
 Schweinfurth has represented Nsgvoue as very prog- 
 nathous with an aquiline nose in profile, but the end of 
 which is as if immersed in the thickness of the upper lip. 
 In him the chin protrudes. On the contrary, it is very 
 retreating in Bombi, whose nose is also more detached. 
 The photograph of Tebo is in these two points more 
 like the latter than the former type. The lips are, more- 
 
 * Hamy, taking into consideration the slight development of the 
 temporal muscles in young subjects, diminishes the index obtained 
 from measurements made upon the living by one unit only, in order 
 to secure that of the dry skull. He would call this, then, at least 77. 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. I79 
 
 over, not so thick as in Negroes, and are even described as 
 thin by Vossion and Schweinfurth. 
 
 All the descriptions agree in attributing to the Akkas, 
 men and women, an extreme abdominal development, 
 which causes the adults to resemble the children of 
 Arabs and Negroes. In the photographs of Tebo and 
 Chairallah this feature is most pronounced. Panizza, 
 making an anatomical examination of the causes of this 
 development, attributed it to the unusual size of the left 
 lobe of the liver and the spleen, as well as to the large 
 amount of fat accumulated in the mesentery. 
 
 This exaggeration of the contents of the abdomen en- 
 tailed anatomical consequences which have also attracted 
 the attention of all observers. The chest, relatively nar- 
 row and flattened above, is dilated below in order to con- 
 tain this enormous paunch. On the other hand, this pro- 
 jection of the abdomen demands, for maintenance of the 
 equilibrium, that the lower portion of the spinal column 
 should also project forward. Hence results among the 
 Akkas the remarkable hollowing which has led to com- 
 paring the curve of the spinal column to an S.* 
 
 * This conformation has given rise to a singular misunderstand- 
 ing, which has led to many discussions. In a communication made 
 to the Egyptian Institute (December 5, 1873) Schweinfurth com- 
 pared the curvature of the spinal column to. a C. The eminent 
 traveller was apparently speaking only of its lower portion, and 
 meant that the concavity of the C should face backward. But 
 under the influence of preconceived ideas, and in the hope of find- 
 ing in the Akkas that link between man and the apes for which 
 search has so long been niade, some adventurous spirits thought 
 that the whole column was in discussion, that the concavity of the 
 C turned forward, and that consequently the Akkas resembled in 
 this respect anthropomorphic apes. Before having seen the photo- 
 graphs I combated, at the Society of Anthropology and elsewhere, 
 this idea as incompatible with the mode of locomotion in man and 
 with the agility which all evidence attributed to the Akkas. Broca, 
 
180 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 But it is evident that the abnormal development of the 
 abdomen is not, among the Akkas, a true race character- 
 istic, and that it is largely due to their manner of life, to 
 the quality of the food, perhaps also to the general con- 
 ditions of their habitat. This fact results from some 
 observations of Count Miniscalchi, who has seen, after 
 some weeks of regular and wholesome diet, " the extreme 
 development of the abdomen disappear and the vertebral 
 column resume its normal state." The same change was 
 wrought in Saida. 
 
 In order to terminate this physical sketch of the Ak- 
 kas, it remains to speak of the limbs. The upper are long, 
 and terminate in hands of great delicacy (Schweinfurth).* 
 The lower limbs are short relatively to the trunk, and 
 curve in somewhat. The feet also are bent in the same 
 direction, rather more than those of other Africans. 
 
 The Akka women seem to greatly resemble their hus- 
 bands. Giglioli speaks of Saida as having a thick figure, 
 short neck, arms neither slim nor long, hands rather large 
 than small. The colour of this Akka was like that of 
 Chairallal], very like that of a mulatto. The hair, of a 
 sooty black, formed little balls less clearly isolated than his; 
 prognathism very pronounced. This description agrees 
 very well with the pictures of Chaille-Long. This last 
 authority adds that in his Tikki-Tiklci the breasts hung 
 down markedly, although she asserted that she had had 
 no children. He says, too, that she had very little hands 
 and feet (Pig. 22). 
 
 The physiological characteristics of the Akkas are 
 those of most savage races. Their senses are very acute, 
 
 as well as Mantegazza and Zannetti, later developed the same argu- 
 ments in support of an opinion common to us all, and which all the 
 facts now acquired justify. 
 
 * The photographs of Tebo and Chairallah and the cast taken 
 upon Tebo do not justify these praises. 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 181 
 
 and Schweinfurth on several occasions insists upon their 
 extraordinary agility. According to the Monbuttos, these 
 little Kegroes leap about in the high herbage like grass- 
 hoppers. Nsevoue partly preserved this little habit dur- 
 ing his stay with Schweinfurth, and could never carry a 
 plate without spilling more or less of its contents. 
 
 The Akkas are very courageous. " They are men, and 
 men who know how to fight," said Moiimmeri, in speaking 
 of those who- accompanied him. They are great elephant 
 hunters ; they assault them with very short bows, and 
 with lances hardly longer than themselves.* Long Bey 
 confirms all these details, and adds that the women are 
 as warlike as the men — which recalls in every particular 
 the facts given by Battel.^'' "» 
 
 Schweinfurth gives a very sad picture of the character 
 and intelligence of NsSvoue. He represents him as lov- 
 ing to see men and animals suffer, as being unable to 
 learn Arabic or any of the dialects of the country. Count 
 Miniscalchi, on the other hand, found in Tebo and Chai- 
 rallah affectionate pupils, appreciative, and disposed to 
 learn. Both, but especially Tebo, had a real fondness for 
 music. Two years after their arrival in Europe these 
 two Akkas could read and write. Their father by adop- 
 tion placed under the eyes of his colleagues, in 1879, two 
 letters written and composed by them without any aid, a 
 facsimile of which was inserted in the transactions of the 
 congress. They had not, on that account, forgotten their 
 own language. Miniscalchi has been able to gather frortl 
 them several hundred words, and to prepare with their 
 help a grammar of their tongue, which he considers the 
 same as the idioms of the Niam-Niams.f 
 
 * See the portrait of Bombi. Schweinfurth does not say that 
 the arrows are poisoned. 
 
 f Miniscalchi used with them the Arabic language, which they 
 spoke fluently. 
 
182 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 What have these Akkas become under the influence of 
 European climate and of an education applied for the 
 first time to representatives of this ancient race, always 
 savage, and found two or three degrees south of the 
 equator? One understands how much interest attaches 
 to this question, and we owe much to Giglioli for having 
 replied to it in detail.* 
 
 Tebo has always perfectly stood the usually cold win- 
 ters of Verona. Chairallah has had fevers, had much 
 coughing, and suffered with rheumatism during his first 
 two or three years. Both are now entirely acclimated. 
 It is the same with Saida. 
 
 Tebo has been modelled, and his bust is in the museum. 
 In comparing it with his photograph taken in 1874 it is 
 seen that he has lost his childish air. His forehead is less 
 full, without, however, being as retreating as Nsevoue. In 
 this respect he is more like Bombi. His prognathism 
 is somewhat more marked. His other features are little 
 modified.f 
 
 The general character of the two Akkas has remained 
 sensitive, impulsive, and recalls that of our children. They 
 love to play ; their movements are quick ; when they walk 
 they naturally go at quickstep. J 
 
 Tebo is more afPectionate, more faithful to his duties ; 
 
 * *' This memoir was written in 1880, consequently five years later 
 than Count Minisealehi's. 
 
 f Giglioli thinks he can recognise with the eye some slight elon- 
 gation of the head. An examination of the bust and the measure- 
 ments, necessarily only approximate, which I have taken upon the 
 plaster, do not give me such an impression. 
 
 J All the preceding might also apply to Sa'ida, yet she has not 
 been dealt with as her fellow-countrymen. She has remained a serv- 
 ant, without learning either to read or write. She speaks Italian 
 fluently, and a little German, which is the language of her mis- 
 tress. She is at times capricious, and she loves to play with children 
 (Giglioli). 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 183 
 
 his conduct has always been excellent. Chairallah, more 
 intelligent, has shown at times some instincts of hatred 
 and revenge. Yet they have never had quarrels with their 
 young companions, and they love each other tenderly. 
 
 Both have been baptised, and show a certain amount of 
 devotion in religious exercises, yet their spiritual director 
 does not regard their convictions 9,3 very deep. 
 
 Both of them have forgotten their mother tongue, and 
 have almost forgotten Arabic. They speak Italian per- 
 fectly, but had at first much difficulty in pronouncing 
 words where two z's occur — bellazza, carezza. 
 
 Both experience very strongly the sentiment of emula- 
 tion. In class they have shown themselves superior to 
 their European schoolfellows of ten or twelve years old. 
 The grades which their teacher placed before Giglioli 
 prove that they have stood remarkably well in the tests 
 they have passed through in composition, arithmetic, 
 grammatical analysis, and in dictation.* 
 
 The Countess Miniscalchi gave music lessons to Tebo. 
 Giglioli has heard him play upon the piano, with some 
 sentiment and much exactness, two quite difficult pas- 
 sages, f 
 
 One sees, in spite of their little stature, their long 
 arms, their pot-bellies, and their short legs, that the Akkas 
 are indeed really men ; and those who have thought to 
 find in them half apes should by this time be fully dis- 
 abused. 
 
 * Chairallah had obtained ten (perfect mark) for dictation and 
 penmanship ; Tebo, ten for dictation. The other grades are eight 
 and nine in all subjects except arithmetic, where Chairallah falls to 
 seven and Tebo to six. One finds here again the general fact that 
 savages are inferior in the direction of scientific aptitudes. 
 
 t Unfortunately the education of Tebo and Chairallah has been 
 interrupted. Both to-day perform service in the Miniscalchi family 
 (Giglioli). 
 
 14 
 
184: THE PYGMIES. 
 
 The totality of facts just presented leads me to general 
 considerations, which I shall state briefly. And, first, in 
 going from Senegambia and the Gaboon towards the 
 country of the Gallas and Monbuttos, we have established 
 the existence of several human groups which are charac- 
 terised by little stature, by a head relatively large and 
 round, by a colour less dark than that of the Negroes 
 proper, by instincts and manners almost similar. With 
 Hamy, we would recognise in these groups so many rep- 
 resentatives of a special race — the race of Negrillos — who 
 in Africa correspond to the Negritos of Asia and Melanesia. 
 
 It is evident that the ancients have had concerning 
 these Negrillos— as concerning the Negritos — some more 
 or less precise knowledge, and that they have made from 
 them their African pygmies ; but they have placed them 
 in three geographical localities where they do not to-day 
 exist ; one must go farther from Europe in order to find 
 them. Moreover, these pygmies appear to us as forming 
 centres of population isolated and widely separated. Fi- 
 nally, at one of these centres at least, we witness the 
 decadence of the race and its fusion with neighbouring 
 populations of greater size and strength. 
 
 All these facts recall too strongly what we have seen 
 has taken place, and is now taking place, among the Ne- 
 gritos for us not to refer it to the same causes. Every- 
 thing unites to make us believe that the Negrillos were 
 formerly more numerous ; that they formed populations 
 denser and more continuous ; that they have been crowded 
 back, separated, divided, by superior races. Their history, 
 if we could only know it, would certainly present resem- 
 blances to that of their Eastern brothers. 
 
 But we have seen that in the Orient everything sug- 
 gests that the Negritos have preceded, on the soil where 
 we find them, the races which have oppressed, dispersed, 
 and almost annihilated them. As to the Negrillos, anal- 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 185 
 
 ogous facts lead to a similar conclusion. We are thus 
 led to admit as very probable that the little brachy- 
 cephalic Negroes have occupied at least a large part of 
 Africa prior to the Negroes properly so called, who are 
 characterised by a greater stature and by dolichocephaly. 
 These last are the Papuans of Africa, as the Negrillos 
 are its Negritos. 
 
 These comparisons do not result from a superficial 
 examination of the African and Indo-Melanesian blacks ; 
 they are justified by a detailed study of their skulls. 
 This study places in evidence extremely striking resem- 
 blances between the two great anthropological formations 
 which represent the Negro type at the two extremities of 
 our continent.* ^^' 
 
 Whence can come this close relationship between popu- 
 lations separated by such vast spaces and by so many and 
 such diverse races ? Are these resemblances and agree- 
 ments due to a community of origin? These questions, 
 and many others, had been formulated even before the 
 discovery of the Negrillos, which causes their still more 
 imperious presentation. There have been many replies. 
 
 Logan has sustained with much wisdom, and in exam- 
 ining the question from various points of view, the idea 
 that the Negroes, originating in Africa, have penetrated 
 into Asia and into Melanesia by a slow infiltration taking 
 place over the sea. He makes them play an important rdle 
 among the populations of Madagascar.'*' '^ Flower is dis- 
 posed to admit that the little black race, developed in the 
 southern part of India, has spread east and west, peopling 
 Melanesia and Africa. It is from it that have come the 
 Negroes of large stature. ^^ Allen also derives the African 
 Negroes from Asia, and seeks to show that they have left 
 some traces of their passage upon several points in the in- 
 
 * De Quatrefages and Hamy. 
 
186 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 termediate countries.' Prof. Seeley claims that the Negro 
 race formerly occupied a belt of land stretching from 
 Africa to Melanesia, which is now submerged.' 
 
 The authors whom I have just cited have considered 
 only the origin of the black races. I have shown long 
 since in my courses, and suggested in one of my books, 
 that one cannot separate the history of these races from that 
 of their yellow and white sisters.* I have returned to a de- 
 tailed study of the subject in another work.^'* Behold, in 
 a few words, the solution which I believe I have given to 
 the general problem. Mankind originated in Tertiary 
 times, somewhere in northern Asia. Migrations began at 
 that period ; and without doubt from that moment the 
 species commenced to differentiate itself on account of 
 the differing conditions of existence which its tribes en- 
 countered. The Glacial period caused a great migration, 
 radiating out in every direction ; yet either then, or ear- 
 lier, the various populations grouped themselves about, or 
 in the interior of, the central highland of Asia. There 
 the three fundamental, physical, and linguistic types of 
 mankind arose. All are yet represented in this region. 
 No other point on the globe shows anything similar, and 
 this fact justifies, I believe, the conclusions I have drawn. 
 
 The black type appeared in the south of Asia, between 
 the highland and the sea. Its representatives, pressed be- 
 tween the yellow peoples on the north and the whites on 
 the west, could not, like their brothers, extend over vast 
 continental areas. Very early they had to seek by sea a new 
 country — above all, when invasions, which the existence 
 of mixed races clearly proves, came to dispute with them 
 the possession of a domain relatively narrow. To escape 
 the invaders, there was no resource but flight by sea ; and, 
 in consequence of difference in habitat, they migrated, 
 
 * The Human Species. 
 
THE NEGRILLOS, OR PYGMIES OP AFRICA. 187 
 
 some east, others west. Thus they were the first to peo- 
 ple the eastern archipelagoes and the islands of the Bay 
 of Bengal. They arrived in Africa by crossing the Strait 
 of Bab-el-Mandeb and the Gulf of Aden. Everywhere, 
 moreover, the Negritos and the Negrillos preceded the 
 Papuans and the true Negroes. This fact is proved by 
 the geographical distribution of these different races, as I 
 have shown on various occasions. 
 
 The study of the little Negro races will suggest one 
 last thought. 
 
 In speaking of their pygmies the ancients have mingled 
 very true facts with exaggerations and fables. Modern 
 science, sometimes misled by its rigidity, has long consid- 
 ered only that which was impossible in the tradition rela- 
 tive to the little men of Asia or of Africa, and has there- 
 fore rejected the whole at once. We have just seen where- 
 in it was wrong, and from that even we may draw a lesson. 
 
 When we are dealing with traditions or legends of 
 people less learned than ourselves, and above all with 
 those of savage peoples, however strange or bizarre they 
 may appear to us, it is well to study them carefully. A 
 good number of these legends enclose interesting and very 
 real facts, concealed by superstitions, misunderstandings, 
 habits of language, errors of interpretation. The task of 
 the man of science should be like that of the miner who 
 separates gold from the rock. Very often he may, with a 
 little study and wise criticism, bring out some important 
 truth from this mass of errors. 
 
ClfAPTEE VII. 
 
 RELIGIOUS BELIEFS OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND THE 
 BUSHMEN. 
 
 Hottentots and Bushmen.— Hottentots : physical characters. — Role 
 of the woman. — Poetry. — Language. — Place of origin of the 
 race. — Age of stone at the Cape. — Religious beliefs of the Bush- 
 men ; dualism ; superstitions. — Religious beliefs of the Hot- 
 tentots; old information on the subject. — Good gods. — Tstii-goa, 
 supreme god. — The strife against Gaunab. — Profound faith of 
 the Hottentots in Tsiii-goa — Absence of religious edifices and 
 of idols. — Great religious festivals ; hymn to Tsui-goa. — A mar- 
 tyr of Tsui-goa. — Heitsi-eibib. — His tombs. — His births.— His 
 strife against the lion and against Gama-gorib. — One of his 
 deaths, followed by resurrection. — Khab (the moon). — The le- 
 gend of the hare. — Manub (the storm-cloud); Gurub (the thun- 
 der) ; Nabas (the lightning). — Hymn and chanted dialogues. — 
 Khunuseti (the Pleiades). — Bad gods. — Gaunab, the great god 
 of evil. — The Mantis Gaunab. — The vassals of Gaunab. — Refu- 
 tation of an hypothesis of Mr. Hahn. — Gurikho'isib, the first 
 man. — His combat with the lion. — The future life. — Spirits of 
 the dead, bad and good. — Spirits of ancestors. — Worship; 
 priests ; sorcerers. — Various superstitions. — Mythological theory 
 of Mr. Hahn. 
 
 When the Dutch, under the leadership of van Rie- 
 beek, founded Cape Colony, in 1653, the southern end 
 of Africa was occupied by two populations very similar 
 in some respects,' but distinguished nevertheless by cer- 
 tain physical characters and of very dissimilar modes 
 of life. The first, the more important, and whom the 
 Europeans already knew, inhabited only the coast and the 
 
 188 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 189 
 
 fertile plains. It was of somewhat tall stature, attaining 
 a mean of If-eeS. The features of the face were anything 
 but beautiful (Fig. 26). To a skull narrow and elongated 
 from in front backward, to the characteristic hair of the 
 Negro, this type joined a yellow-brown colour, more or 
 
 Fig. 26. — Bust of Swoon, Hottentot. (From a bust modelled upon the 
 living subject. CoUeetion of the Museum.) 
 
 less dark and often ruddy — so much so that even to-day 
 these natives call themselves red men (Fig. 27).* These 
 Africans were essentially herders, possessing numerous 
 herds of cattle, of sheep, and of goats, knowing how to 
 
 *Ava Khnib. "This word," Hahn says, "is synonymous with 
 Kh(fl-Kho1. The Hottentots call the Europeans JJri Khoin (white 
 men), and the Bantus Nu Khoien (l)lack men)." " 
 
190 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 work iron and copper, and acquainted with the art of pot- 
 tery. At the time of Kolbe they formed sixteen distinct 
 nations, each designated by a special name, but divided into 
 petty tribes.* They dwelt in tem- 
 porary villages, the huts of which 
 were easy to take down and trans- 
 port, convenient for the mode of 
 life of a nomadic, pastoral people. 
 These kraals usually contained 
 three to four hundred souls, and 
 at times even five hundred. Some 
 customs, having the force of laws, 
 regulated these little communities, 
 placed under the direction of hie- 
 rarchised chiefs. 
 
 When the Europeans penetra- 
 ted into the interior of the con- 
 tinent they found there another 
 population, characterised by a still 
 lighter yellow tint, but quite as 
 homely as the preceding (Pigs. 38, 39). Although having 
 hair of the same sort, these men had a skull relatively broad- 
 er and shorter (Figs. 30, 31) ; but their most striking feature 
 was their little stature. As we have already stated, the 
 stature of these pygmies of the Cape descends to a mean 
 of 1"37 among the men and 1"33 among the women. 
 They are, however, vigorous and remarkably agile. These 
 little men live exclusively by hunting ; they scarcely erect 
 the simplest temporary shelters, and their industry is lim- 
 ited to the making of a bow, arrows, and a coarse pottery. 
 
 Fio. il. — Skull of Hottett- 
 TOT FROM Cape Colony. 
 (Museum collection.) 
 
 * 80 Walckenaer admits seventeen nations. Bat he does not 
 recognise that " the Bushies " are only hordes of dispersed Hotten- 
 tots who have adopted the mode of life of the Bushmen. Perhaps, 
 too, he meant these latter themselves, who were not then distin- 
 guished from the Hottentots. 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 191 
 
 Always wandering in little bands of from fifteen to fifty 
 persons, and having no bond of union, these typical sav- 
 ages, driven back into the most frightful deserts, were in- 
 cessantly warring with all the other inhabitants of the 
 country, who hunted them and killed them like wild 
 beasts. 
 
 Fia. 28. — ^BusT or YmfKA, Bushman. (From a mould made upon the liv- 
 ing. Collection of the Museum.) 
 
 These last are those who are habitually called Bush- 
 men, Bosjesmans, Boschismans. Those of whom I spoke 
 first are the Hottentots. These names are purely Eu- 
 ropean in origin. The first are easily understood ; no one 
 has discovered the etymology of the second. Until very 
 recently no one knew what the Bushmen called them- 
 selves, and even Hahn says nothing in this matter. But 
 Arbousset and Daumas have discovered that they call 
 
192 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 themselves among themselves 'Khuai.^ The Hottentots 
 call them Sdn,* an expression which may be translated by 
 aborigines, and style themselves Khoi-Khoi, literally men- 
 men or THE men.f 
 
 FiQ, 2S. — Best of Soaetje Bartmann, called the Hottektot Venus. 
 (From a mould taken after death. Collection of the Museum.) 
 
 * In the singular, Sab (Hahn).^' The official documents of the 
 Cape call them Sonqua. One also finds them called by the names 
 Batuas, Baroas, Bushies, Bosmanneken, Housouanas. ... It is neces- 
 sary not to confound with the San those Khoi-Khoi whom persecu- 
 tion has driven back into the deserts, where they lead the same life as 
 the true Bushmen. This is an error into which Levaillant and other 
 authors have fallen. It may be that we can thus explain the con- 
 tradiction in the narrative of Captain F. Alexander and the reflec- 
 tions that Hahn makes upon it. 
 
 * ^'' Various authors or travellers have written Choi-Choin,^Koe- 
 Kaeh, Quaiqua, Quaqiia, etc. 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 193 
 
 Fig. 30. — Skull of Bushman. (Col- 
 lection of the Museum.) 
 
 From this very fact one might draw the conclusion 
 that the Bushmen have at first occupied the whole region, 
 that the Khoi-Khoi are conquerors. All the studies made 
 to the present time sup- 
 port such a conclusion ; 
 they even permit us to go 
 further. Already some 
 travellers and anthropol- 
 ogists have regarded the 
 Bushmen as representing 
 the local pure race, and 
 the Hottentots as being 
 the result of a crossing 
 of this race with various 
 Negro populations. The detailed examination of skulls 
 has fully confirmed this result, which may be considered 
 a definite acquisition to science.^" 
 
 The Sdn and the Khoi-Khoi 
 are far from being to-day what 
 they were at the time of the dis- 
 covery. Here, as in so many parts 
 of the globe, the so-called civilised 
 and Christian European has ac- 
 complished the dreadful work with 
 which he seems to be charged. 
 Over a vast region he has substi- 
 tuted himself for the local races, 
 after having exterminated them. 
 He has shown himself as cruel, as 
 cravenly fierce, as any band of 
 savage heathen. Of the sixteen 
 nations of Hottentots enumerated 
 by Kolbe, the greater part have 
 disappeared. The survivors are more or less modified by 
 contact with the whites and as the result of the influence 
 
 Fig. 31. — Skull of Soaetje 
 Baetmaith-, Bushman 
 "Woman. (Collection of 
 the Museum.) 
 
194 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 of the missionaries, yet some tribes have preserved intact 
 the manners and beliefs of their ancestors. To save from 
 oblivion these remnants of the past of one of the most 
 curious human races is evidently to render a service to 
 anthropology.* 
 
 This is the work which Mr. Hahn seems to have un- 
 dertaken. His authority seems to me incontestable. He 
 has lived for nine years among the Khoi-Khoi, and knows 
 their language perfectly ; he is interested in them, but not 
 to the degree that sympathy gets the better of his judg- 
 ment ; he guards himself against the sources of error, 
 which he enumerates ; generally he first simply presents 
 the facts, reserving their discussion until afterwards. If 
 he has gone further than his predecessors in the examina- 
 tion of the question specially considered in his book, I 
 can see no reason for doubting the new facts which he 
 teaches us. 
 
 Hahn devotes his first chapter to making the SAn and 
 the Khoi-Khoi known to us, but this chapter is very short. 
 The author only aims to give a summary idea of the de- 
 gree of industry attained by the different tribes of the 
 Khoi-Khoi, and of the good qualities he has met with 
 in them. This double purpose is sufficiently attained. 
 
 The Hottentots were apparently a valiant population, 
 who made much of military courage, and had instituted a 
 sort of order of chivalry to honour individuals who distin- 
 guished themselves by military exploits. Their customs 
 were pure and their impulses honest. Unfortunately all 
 their good qualities were connected with an extreme 
 filthiness. The Khoi-Khoi were perhaps the dirtiest 
 
 * In colour the Khoi-KhoT, and above all the SSn, are connected 
 with the yellow type ; by their hair both are essentially Negroes. 
 Among the San the horizontal cephalic index is almost exactly the 
 same as that of the south Chinese (SSn, 77 45 ; Chinese, 77-22). 
 Among the Khoi-Khoi the index is lower. 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 195 
 
 people on the globe. Kolbe and many other travellers 
 have given details on this subject, which it is useless for 
 us to repeat here. 
 
 Without insisting upon the manners and customs of 
 this curious people, I ought to mention what Hahn tells 
 us jof the condition of the women. All travellers have 
 made them out a kind of slaves, charged with the heaviest 
 burdens of labour, and badly treated by their husbands, 
 whose task was confined to hunting and caring for the 
 animals. It is, in fact, so outside ; but indoors, Hahn tells 
 us, the positions are reversed. Here the woman (taras) 
 reigns supreme mistress. She controls and owns every- 
 thing, and the husband cannot, without her permission, 
 take a bit of meat or a drop of milk. If he thinks to 
 infringe the law, the neighbours punish him by taking 
 away a certain number of sheep and cows, which go to 
 increase the personal property of the wife. More : at the 
 death of a chief whose son is under age it often happens 
 that his wife inherits his power and becomes gau-tas, 
 " queen of the tribe." Some of these women chiefs have 
 left honoured names in the native traditions. 
 
 The oldest daughter has also great privileges. She 
 alone milks the cows, and it is to her that one applies for 
 a little milk, as is shown in the short song, of which Hahn 
 gives text and translation : " My lioness, art thou afraid 
 that I will bewitch thee? Thou hast milked the cow 
 with thy gentle hand. Embrace me. Turn me out some 
 milk, my lioness, daughter of a powerful man." 
 
 I find another custom mentioned by Mr. Hahn which 
 I have not seen described elsewhere. Children take the 
 names of their parents, but by a sort of exchange, the 
 girls bearing that of their father, the boys that of their 
 mother, the last syllable showing the sex. The son of a 
 woman named Arises is named Ariseb ; the daughter of 
 her husband, Xam-hab, takes the name of Xam-has. 
 
196 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 The religious chants and profane songs of the Hotten- 
 tots are generally accompanied by dances, and sometimes 
 by pantomimes. Further on I will give some examples 
 of the former. The latter are often satirical. An un- 
 popular chief is often sung by the girls, who compare him 
 with the ravenous hyena and the cowardly jackal. An 
 unequal marriage, or the slightest incident, may become 
 material for couplets. Behold an example of them : 
 
 The poor young Kharis is much frightened ; 
 She suffers with colics, 
 
 And rolls herself on the ground like a hyena which has eaten poison. 
 The town runs to assist at the scene. 
 Everyone is terrified ! 
 But they become calm, and one says, 
 " Oh, that is nothing ! " 
 
 Hahn discusses the question of language at some length. 
 I limit myself to mentioning an interesting fact. The Sdn 
 and the Klioi-Khoi occupy almost the same area, yet the 
 last have a common language, the dialects of which resem- 
 ble each other so closely that the most widely separated 
 tribes understand each other at once. On the contrary, 
 the S4n languages differ from Khoi-Khoi as much as the 
 English from the Sanscrit, and have no relationship among 
 themselves. Yet these Sin languages and the Khoi-Khoi' 
 spring from the same stock, as is shown by their common 
 possession of the series of clicks. The vocabularies them- 
 selves have preserved numerous resemblances. Linguistic 
 facts agree, then, with the results drawn from the exami- 
 nation of the physical characteristics, and lead us to admit 
 again the fundamental unity of that human race which has 
 originally populated the Cape regions. As to the diver- 
 sity of languages spoken by the Sdn, it is easily explained 
 by the disintegration and isolation of their tribes. 
 
 We may also remark that the Sdn can count only to 
 two, or at most to three. A single tribe forms an excep- 
 
EELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 197 
 
 tion to this rule ; it counts to twenty. Hahn thinks it 
 has received its numerals from some other tribe. The 
 Khoi-Khoi, however, all have a complete decimal system 
 of numeration. Hahn gives them the credit of this in- 
 vention, which he ascribes to the necessity of counting 
 their cattle when they gave up their hunting for a pas- 
 toral life. It is much more probable that their domestic 
 animals and the means of knowing their number came 
 to them equally from the Negro tribes whose blood flows 
 in their veins. 
 
 On difierent occasions Hahn makes allusion to the 
 separation of the Khoi-Khoi into two branches, to a great 
 migration having for its point of departure the tomb of 
 their ancestor Gurikho'isib ; but he does not define him- 
 self in the matter. He speaks of their first home, but 
 nowhere does he locate it. Without doubt he has ex- 
 plained these matters in some publication which I do not 
 know. In any case there can exist no doubt either as to 
 the fact of the migration or its general direction. Living- 
 stone, in summarising the information gathered by himself 
 and that scattered through the writings of other travellers, 
 expressed himself thus regarding the Hottentots : " The 
 race of cattle which they raise come probably from the 
 north-northeast, a part of the continent from which the 
 natives all make the first emigrations of their ancestors 
 start."* It is in that direction, in the mountains of 
 Abyssinia, that Negroes are yet found whose language 
 presents certain analogies to those of the Hottentots. 
 The importance of these analogies may be exaggerated, but 
 
 * " The sheep of the Cape, like those of Senegal, are covered 
 with stiff hair, and not with wool. This fact also seems to indicate 
 that the race came from the hottest parts of Africa. Our Eu- 
 ropean sheep have perfectly preserved at the Cape their fleece 
 of wool, which they owe to their domestication in the temperate 
 regions. 
 
198 ■ THE PYGMIES. 
 
 they are none the less very real.* It is also to the north- 
 northeast of the Cape that was located the Land of Punt 
 of the old Egyptians ; and whoever has seen the queen of 
 that country figured by Mariette in the paintings of the 
 Exposition of 1867, will admit the extreme resemblance 
 between her and the Hottentot Venus whose cast is at 
 the Museum. These facts, added to some others, into the 
 details of which I cannot here enter, teach us, at least 
 approximately, at once regarding the ancient habitat of 
 one of the elements of the race, the origin of its indus- 
 tries, and the extent of the migrations which it must have 
 accomplished in order to reach the Cape regions. Perhaps 
 tradition had preserved some remembrance of those great 
 journeys among the nations which flourished before the 
 coming of the Europeans ; but one readily understands how 
 the extermination of some, the dispersion of others, must 
 have caused the historical legends to be forgotten." 
 
 Yet one may certainly affirm that none of these legends 
 dates back to the time when the first ancestors of the 
 Khoi-Khoi came to take possession of extreme South Af- 
 rica, no more than our most distant memories mention 
 the time when man in our land dwelt side by side with 
 the elephants and rhinoceroses. Like the rest of the world, 
 the Cape districts have their ages of stone, of which the 
 most ancient was contemporaneous with our Paleolithic 
 epoch. The discoveries of some English investigators™' *° 
 prove it, and the beautiful work of Mr. Gooch, who, after 
 
 * The celebrated missionary Robert Moflat relates that, having 
 one day given a Syrian an idea of the Hottentot languages, this one 
 told him that he had seen in the market at Cairo some slaves much 
 lighter in colour than the Negroes, who spoke such a language.'" 
 These could certainly not be Hottentots from the Cape. Alfred 
 Maury "' had admitted the existence of clicks among some Abys- 
 sinian tribes, but after a conversation with Schweinfurth he, was 
 much less certain, although still holding that clicks occur among 
 some Kaffir and Nubian peoples. 
 
KELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 199 
 
 having described and figured the geological structure and 
 the physical geography, summarises in the following terms 
 the result of his researches upon this important point : 
 " All these terraces, all these levels, yield instruments of 
 stone in their Quaternary deposits."* Thus from that 
 epoch man was at the Cape as well as on the plateaus of 
 Brazil and in the pampas of Buenos Ayres. 
 
 The religious beliefs are much better preserved. It is 
 to these that Mr. Hahn's book is specially devoted. In 
 treating of this subject, in showing that there is among 
 the Khoi-Khoi anything more than a rude Shamanism, 
 the author has to fear lest persons shall attribute the rela- 
 tively high conceptions which he makes known to an in- 
 filtration of Christian doctrines. He has foreseen the 
 objection. He declares that, to avoid such an interpre- 
 tation, he has omitted every legend or myth which could 
 be subject to it, even though he has felt sure of its purely 
 indigenous character. 
 
 Truly, one can only approve of such scruples ; but may 
 Mr. Hahn not have carried them too far ? No one was 
 more capable than he of discriminating between what was 
 original and what was added on later. The result of this 
 labour would have enabled the reader to form a more com- 
 plete idea of the sum total of beliefs to which this people 
 had attained, and would perhaps have justified some con- 
 clusions on the subject, to which I shall later have to make 
 some reservations. 
 
 * 56 The author divides the age of stone of South Africa into five 
 periods. The first alone belongs to Quaternary times, and corre- 
 sponds to our Palffiolithio : the four others are contained within the 
 Recent Epoch of the geologist. These four periods are characterised 
 at once by the nature of the rock employed and by the progressive 
 development of industries. In the discussion to which the above 
 cited memoirs have given rise one has several times remarked the 
 great resemblance existing between certain objects collected at the 
 Cape and others which have been found in Europe and in India. 
 15 
 
200 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 It is difficult to see how the populations here consid- 
 ered can have been represented, even in these days, as 
 without religion and materialistic. Long have I, in my 
 courses and elsewhere, shown how little foundation such 
 statements have,* and how very much all the testimony 
 collected upon points the most remote, by travellers the 
 most different, confirm the general statement made by 
 Livingstone" : " However degraded these peoples may be, 
 there is no need of telling them of the existence of God or 
 of a future life. These two truths are universally admit- 
 ted in Africa. All the phenomena which the natives can- 
 not explain by an ordinary cause are attributed to the 
 divinity. ... If we speak to them of a dead man, they 
 reply, ' He is gone to God.' " 
 
 Mr. Hahn, wishing, no doubt, to keep strictly to the 
 special fact which he aimed to make clear, speaks only 
 of the Khoi-Khoi or Hottentots proper, and considers 
 the beliefs of the Sdn or Bushman only very incidentally. 
 Since he contrasted the two branches of the South African 
 race in social and industrial matters, it is singular that he 
 did not show how they resemble or diverge from each other 
 in reference to the matters specially treated in this work. 
 Perhaps he has not himself collected the necessary mate- 
 rials. We must not forget that the Bushmen are most 
 difficult to study. For a long time travellers only knew 
 them by hearsay ; meetings have been rare, interviews 
 have been short, and usually disturbed by mutual dis- 
 trust. In such circumstances it is very difficult to inform 
 one's self regarding the beliefs which refer to what is most 
 sacred in the human heart, and of which the savage speaks 
 only with the greatest reluctance. What we can state of 
 ourselves will illustrate the matter. It is not in tarrying 
 at an inn that a Parisian would obtain from a Brittany 
 peasant the slightest detail regarding hori'gans or the 
 
 * The Human Species, 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 201 
 
 laveuses de nuit. Three months of residence and inti- 
 mate relations with a Basque family with whom I lodged 
 was necessary before I could obtain some incomplete no- 
 tions regarding superstitions which still exist at the gates 
 of Bayonne. 
 
 Yet, as the Europeans have gone in greater numbers 
 and farther into these lands, the Bushmen have become 
 better and better known. At the end of his first jour- 
 ney (1812) Campbell knew that these natives had a con- 
 fused idea of a great Being to whom they attribute all 
 that which is beyond human power. But, in spite of 
 his friendly relations with Makoun, Bushman chief of 
 Malalarin, he could find out nothing about the future 
 life. He was more fortunate on his second voyage.^^^ 
 He learned that the Bushmen believe in a sort of resur- 
 rection, and place a spear by the side of the dead, that 
 they may hunt and defend themselves. Having found 
 Makoun again, he learned from him with difficulty some 
 details concerning a male god named Golia, who lives 
 above them, and concerning a female god named Ko, 
 who lives below. The name of the former singularly 
 recalls that of the great god of the Khoi-Kho'i, and I shall 
 later speak again of this point. They also told Campbell 
 of a kind of spirits or nymphs who come at times to 
 mingle in the dances of the natives. 
 
 Later, Arbousset and Daumas, favoured by circum- 
 stances, obtained some more precise details regarding 
 the religious ideas of the Bushmen who live in the Blue 
 Mountains. These savages say that there is in heaven 
 a haang, or chief, to whom they give the title of Kue- 
 Akengteng, " the master of all things.'''' This kaang 
 makes to live and to die ; he gives or withholds rain and 
 game. One prays to him at times of famine and before 
 going to war, while executing the dance of the mokoma 
 during an entire night, " In the words of the natives. 
 
202 THE PyaMIES. 
 
 ' he cannot be seen with the eyes, but one knows him with 
 the heart,' " says Arbousset.^ These Bushmen also be- 
 lieve in another life, and haye a proverb : " Death is but 
 a slumber." 
 
 If the SAn have a good god, they have also a bad one 
 (ffa«wa)." Thus even among the savages — unquestion- 
 ably the lowest among mankind — we find again this con- 
 ception of the two principles which under one form or 
 another recurs in all religions. We shall see further on 
 that it is the same among the Khoi-Khoi, and that the 
 spirits of good and of evil recognised among the two sister 
 races are identical. 
 
 These same Bushmen also venerate certain antelopes, 
 among them the blesbok {Antilope pygarga), and adore 
 a species of caterpillar, which they call ri'go. This crea- 
 ture constructs for itself from straws, etc., a little tube, 
 much like the case of a caddis- fly larva, from which it 
 only extends its head and the first pair of legs, in order to 
 seek food and to move from place to place. When the 
 Bushmen go hunting they try to find one of these cater- 
 pillars and address it a veritable prayer, that it may guide 
 their arrows to the prey, which shall nourish them.* 
 
 Thus we see united in these Bushmen the grossest 
 fetichism and some notions, vague, no doubt, but touch- 
 ing upon the most lofty conceptions. Yet Arbousset says 
 these tribes have far less superstition than the blacks. 
 Their very precarious mode of life and their social dis- 
 integration have no doubt dwarfed among them the de- 
 velopment of mythological conceptions. From the same 
 
 * Arbousset ^ : 'Kaang ta, ha a ntanga e ? 'Kaang ta, 'gnou a 
 kna a se ge. Itanga 'Jcogou'koba hou ; i'konU, i Jcage, itanga, i'Tcogou 
 'koba hou ; 'kaang ta, 'gnou a kna a se ge. " Lord, do you not love 
 me ? Lord, a male gnu bring me. I love to fill my stomach. My 
 older son, my older daughter, love to fill their stomachs. Lord, lead 
 a male gnu under my arrows."' 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 203 
 
 causes there has not been able to form itself among these 
 wandering populations anything like a class of men spe- 
 cially charged with presiding over religious manifesta- 
 tions. Nowhere have I found mention among the Bush- 
 men of any one who directs the dance of the mokoma, who 
 plays any role in the preliminaries of marriage, etc. It 
 seems that among them pure fetichism has' placed itself 
 side by side with those fundamental instinctive beliefs 
 common to all the other South African tribes. 
 
 It is different with the Hottentots. Among them trav- 
 ellers have always found, and still do find, those surri, who 
 play alternately the part of master of ceremonies and 
 priest — those doctors,* those makers of rain, whom so 
 many voyagers have described, and whom Livingston 
 has made to speak so strangely *' — that is to say, that 
 here superstitions are definite and numerous. At the 
 same time the principal events of life are celebrated by 
 festivals and ceremonies having, at least in a degree, a 
 religious character. I shall refer for the details — often 
 revolting — to the travellers who have collected them, and 
 principally to Kolbe. 
 
 One knows that the facts given by Kolbe have been 
 declared untrustworthy by a certain number of those who 
 have followed him, and have bitterly assailed him even 
 when they have done naught but to quote him. Walck- 
 enaer has already warmly protested against these attacks, 
 and has shown their origin. Among others, he has well 
 shown how our celebrated astronomer La Caille was led 
 into error by the employees of the Cape Company, which 
 Kolbe had made too well known.'" This rehabilitation 
 of the old German voyager is fully confirmed by the tes- 
 timony of Mr. Hahn. Every traveller well acquainted 
 
 * 8° Kolbe distinguishes the priest (surri) from the doctor, and 
 ascribes to this latter a superior rank in the olan. 
 
204 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 with the manners and customs of the Bergdamaras * could 
 endorse the greater part of the book of Kolbe upon the 
 Hottentots. One may, then, with confidence consult these 
 data collected before Europeans had been able to disperse 
 or transform the local populations. 
 
 But I have already stated that these coarse supersti- 
 tions are not all of the religion of the Hottentots. Even 
 the first travellers who explored their territory have been 
 able to see this. These have recognised their belief in 
 a great chief, called by them the supreme regulator 
 {Kliourrou), the Lord {Khuh),^^^ and also a devil {Dan- 
 goh or Damoli) ; they have mentioned homage rendered 
 to the moon. Kolbe confirmed by new observations and 
 fuller details all that his predecessors had said. He made 
 known the ceremonies performed at the different phases 
 of the moon, the general sense of the prayers addressed to 
 that luminary, and saw, in the ensemble of the practices, 
 all the characteristics of a true worship. At about the 
 same period George Smith reported the festivals cele- 
 brated in honour of the Pleiades ; he summarised in a few 
 words the prayer which the Khoi'-Khoi chanted in chorus 
 to the supreme god, and which I shall reproduce fur- 
 ther on. 
 
 These citations suffice to put the general fact beyond 
 doubt. Before any theological notion, derived from Eu- 
 rope could have modified the conceptions of the Khoi- 
 Khoi, these peoples admitted the existence of superior 
 beings able to influence their destinies for good or ill ; 
 they addressed prayers and homages to them ; they had 
 a religion and a worship. But we had no details regard- 
 ing these good or bad beings, concerning their number or 
 their hierarchy ; we knew nothing of their legendary his- 
 
 * Tribe of Negro origin, located in the country of the Grand 
 Namaquas, ■whose customs and language it has adopted, and which 
 It preserves better than the Khoi-Khoi themselves (Hahn). 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 205 
 
 tory. It would have been strange, however, if the Hot- 
 tentots had not possessed a mythology, at least rudiment- 
 ary, for traces of one have been found even among the 
 Australians. Mr. Hahn has filled up this gap. He makes 
 known the names of the gods of the Khoi-Khoi ; he 
 teaches us regarding their relationship and their adven- 
 tures ; then he tries to trace back to the beginning of 
 these fables. Let us see, then, what he teaches us on the 
 subject. 
 
 Tsui-goa* — The supreme god of the Hottentots is 
 Tsiini-goam, Tsui-goa, Tsui-goab, whose name is found 
 more or less altered or modified in the narratives of various 
 travellers. One legend collected by Hahn recounts that 
 this god was differently named formerly. It described 
 him as having been a great chief, from whom were 
 descended all the Khoi-Khoi tribes. He declared war 
 against another chief called Gaunab.] This one had at 
 first the advantage in several conflicts ; but at each new 
 combat his adversary felt his strength increase, while he 
 (Gaunab) felt his own decrease. Finally Gaunab was 
 conquered and killed, but in his death agony he struck 
 his enemy in the knee. From that time the conqueror 
 took the name of Tsui-goa, " the wounded knee." 
 
 In this legend the god assumes certain human charac- 
 teristics, but at the same time he is represented as capa- 
 ble of accomplishing marvellous things. According to 
 the old man who informed Mr. Hahn, Tsiii-goa foresaw 
 the future ; he died and rose again a number of times ; 
 he has reappeared a number of times among his children, 
 and his coming has been celebrated with festivals and 
 dances. He it is who has given men abundance of sheep 
 and of cattle ; it is he who collects the clouds and sends 
 
 * This is the title Mr. Hahn usually employs, 
 f One will see further on that this Gaunab is nothing else than 
 the bad god. 
 
206 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 rain ; it is he who renders the cows and the ewes fertile. 
 All good things come from him. He lives in a beautiful 
 heaven, all red ; his enemy, Gaunab, dwells in a dark 
 heaven, all black. 
 
 It is easy to see that this narrative reproduces, in a 
 form and with details inspired by the mode of life of the 
 Khoi-Khoi, that idea of the strife between the spirit of 
 good and the spirit of evil which has given birth to so 
 many mythological stories. We shall see later that Gau- 
 nab is in fact the name which these peoples give to a bad 
 divinity. Yet the superior role played by Tsui-goa in the 
 belief of these people is not very plainly marked. But 
 informations more precise will complete our enlighten- 
 ment on this point. Those which Kolbe collected, either 
 himself or from other writers, show us that the Hottentots 
 believed in a supreme being, Gounia-Tiquo'ia, "God of all 
 the gods," regarded by them as creator of the world and 
 living things, and as governing all things.^' 
 
 One finds this belief again in the words of Harisimab, 
 present chief of the pagan tribe of the Habobes, and sworn 
 enemy of the missionaries. Interrogated by our author 
 regarding the origin of his people, he replied : " All things, 
 the Habobes also, have been made by Tsui-goa in this 
 country ; and the Lord {Ehub) * has made us and given 
 us the country ; he gives us rain and makes the grass 
 grow." This agreement between the words of the old 
 traveller and the Haboba chief should settle all doubts. 
 Tsui-goa was, and is still, among the unconverted Khoi- 
 Khoi, the creator of all things, the dispenser of things the 
 most precious to pastoral tribes. Much other evidence 
 comes to the support of this conclusion. 
 
 It is nevertheless unfortunate that Hahn has not in- 
 sisted more strongly upon this point, especially in so far 
 
 * This word was also used with the same meaning at the time of 
 Valentyn.»' 
 
EBLIGflON OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 20? 
 
 as it relates to the creation of man. It is incidentally, and 
 in a note that he calls Ts1ii-goa the creator of the Khoi- 
 Khoi, and makes known the tradition of the Koranas. 
 According to the old men of that tribe, Tsui-goa, after 
 having made a man and a woman, Kanisnia (" the ostrich 
 feather") and Hau-na-maos ("yellow copper "), gave them 
 cows, whose milk they should drink, a jackal's tail to dry 
 the sweat from their brow, a stick for a Iciri, a quiver, 
 arrows, a bow, and a shield. It is from Tstii-goa that they 
 expect all that good fortune which is to come to them. 
 Moreover, Hahn calls the Khoi-Khoi Adam, Eixalkhana- 
 hiseb, or Gurikho'isib, and identifies the latter with the 
 god Heitsi-eibib, of whom I shall speak later. Perhaps 
 the tradition is silent on this point ; perhaps here also 
 the author is influenced by a theory which I shall later 
 discuss. 
 
 However that may be, the Hottentots speak and act as 
 if they saw in Tstii-goa a beneficent father, all-powerful 
 and omniscient. The sentiments which this belief inspires 
 singularly resemble those which the firmest Christians gain 
 from their convictions. Halm does not say so in just those 
 v^ords ; he does better — he proves it by examples. The 
 interjection Ts4i-goatse! {Thou, Tsui-goa!) is equivalent 
 to our " Great G-od ! " Stricken by some misfortune which 
 he deems unmerited, the Hottentot cries, " Tsui-goa, 
 what have I done to be so severely punished ?" Unjustly 
 accused, and unable to prove his innocence, he calls on 
 his god, " Tsui-goa, thou alone knowest that I am not 
 guilty ! " Exposed to some grave danger, he counts upon 
 the help of Tsui-goa, and, escaping from it, he gives him 
 the credit of his deliverance. So much Hahn has been 
 able to establish for himself. He traversed the Kalahari 
 Desert in a wagon. The heat was frightful ; in conse- 
 quence of an unexpected delay the supply of water was 
 exhausted, and they were very far from the nearest spring. 
 
208 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 The night came ; they were lost. The caravan was threat- 
 ened with death by thirst, and the traveller, filled with 
 rage, began to vent it on the guide, who was a hardened 
 pagan Haboba. " What have you done ? To-morrow we 
 shall be eaten by jackals and vultures ! Who will help us 
 in this danger ? " he cried. The Hottentot coolly replied, 
 " Tsui-goa will come to our help." — " What foolishness ! 
 You and your Tsui-goa are two stupid fools." — " Cer- 
 tainly, master, he will help us." In the morning they 
 found water, and when each had refreshed himself the 
 guide said to Mr. Hahn : " My dear master, yesterday you 
 were on the point of killing me, but the Lord prevented 
 you ; and now are you convinced that the Lord has come 
 to our help ? " 
 
 What would the most fervent missionary have thought 
 and felt ? 
 
 The Khoi-Khoi raise neither temples nor shrines, 
 either for Tsui-goa or others of their divinities. They 
 simply have some sacred places, which they never pass 
 without depositing some little offering and accompanying 
 it with invocations. I shall return later to this subject. 
 But they have great religious festivals, accompanied by 
 dances and chants, connected almost always with some 
 celestial phenomenon. The first annual rising of the 
 Pleiades, among others, is sacredly celebrated. As soon 
 as the constellation, impatiently looked for, appears, all 
 the mothers ascend an elevated place, carrying their 
 babies in their arms, and teach them to extend their little 
 arms towards the friendly stars. The population then 
 gathers for the dance, singing a hymn in honour of Ts1ii- 
 goa.*" 
 
 Mr. Hahn here reproduces the narratives of George 
 Schmidt, who, sent out by the Moravians in 1736, first 
 attempted to introduce Christianity among the Hotten- 
 tots."' The invocation which the old missionary heard. 
 
RELIGIOX OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 209 
 
 but of which he gives only a brief resume, was really then 
 a product of the native inspiration, with no possible ad- 
 mixture of ideas borrowed elsewhere. But we know it to- 
 day. Hahn has been present at the sacred dance {gei) 
 which celebrates the return of the Pleiades. He has re- 
 covered the chant which accompanies it ; he has found 
 that it is everywhere the same among the different tribes 
 scattered over the various points of the area still occupied 
 by the Khoi-Khoi. He has given the text and translation : 
 
 Tsui-goatse ! 
 
 Thm, Tsui-goa ! 
 
 Abo itse ! 
 
 Thou father of the fathers ! 
 
 Sida itse ! 
 
 Thou, our father ! 
 
 Nanuba avire ! 
 
 Let stream the thunder-cloud ! 
 
 En xuna uire ! 
 
 Let please live {our) flocks ! 
 
 Eda sida fiire ! 
 
 Let us {also) live, please ! 
 
 Kabuta gum goroo ! 
 
 / am so weak indeed ! 
 
 Gas xao ! 
 
 From thirst ! 
 
 As xao! 
 
 From hunger ! 
 
 Ta xurina amre ! 
 
 That I may eat field fruits ! 
 
 Stats gum xave sida itsao ? 
 
 Art thou, then, not our father ? 
 
 Abo itsao ! 
 
 The father of the fathers ! 
 
 TsUi-goatse ! 
 
 Thou, Tsui-goa ! 
 
 Eda sida gangantsire ! 
 
 That we may praise thee ! 
 
 Eda sida khava khaitsire ! 
 
 That we may give thee in return ! 
 
210 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Abo itse ! 
 
 2'hou, father of fathers ! 
 • Sida Khutse ! 
 Thou, our Lord ! 
 Tsui-goatse ! 
 Thou, Tsui-goa ! 
 
 The Hottentots do not confine themselves to the great 
 public festivals. They have their domestic, or rather in- 
 dividual, worship. In the morning, at the first streaks of 
 dawn, they leave their huts and go to kneel down behind 
 some bush. There, with face towards the east, they 
 address their prayer to Tsui-goa, the father of the 
 fathers. 
 
 It is needless to emphasise the character of these prac- 
 tices and songs or the nature of the sentiments which 
 they attest. Whoever will consider these data will quite 
 understand the calm confidence of the guide of Mr. Hahn. 
 One can see also the source of the peculiar difiBculties 
 which Protestant missionaries, the only ones who have 
 laboured in this part of the pagan world, meet with in 
 the work of converting the Hottentots. The missionary 
 finds here no material symbol ; he cannot overturn tem- 
 ples or idols to demonstrate thus the helplessness of gods 
 of stone or wood ; he has to contend against ideas. But 
 missionary and subject have the same fundamental notion 
 in common — that of a supreme being, creator, and kind 
 father of his creatures, whom one should honour and to 
 whom one should pray. The Hottentot can then reply to 
 the missionary that he brings nothing new, and one can- 
 not be surprised that Tsui-goa has had his martyrs. Hahn 
 cites one example. A celebrated chief in the colony, 
 Nanib, surrounded by enemies and ordered to embrace 
 Christianity if he would save his life, replied : " Never ! 
 My Tsiii-goa is as good as your Christ." He at once re- 
 ceived the mortal blow. 
 
RBLIGIOX OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BCSHMEN. 211 
 
 We shall see later that Mr. Hahn identifies Tsti-goa 
 with some other divinities. It is the consequence of criti- 
 cism based upon a theory which I must make known. 
 The Khoi-Khoi do not appear themselves to have thought 
 of such a fusion, judging by what our author himself says. 
 Their supreme god seems to have his own independent 
 existence. It is to be regretted that our author is not 
 more explicit in this respect, and says nothing of the 
 ideas which these people hold as to the nature of the 
 father of fathers. The antliropolatry of which one finds 
 traces in the legend cited above, and in some others, at- 
 tains at times to conceptions remarkably spiritual. In 
 Polynesia, Taaroa, the Indonesian chief who discovered 
 the Tonga Islands, was regarded at first as a secondary 
 deity ; * then as a god of the first class ; f then, finally, was 
 declared to'ivi, having neither father, mother, nor descend- 
 ants, but having created all that exists. J 
 
 Has something similar taken place in the Cape dis- 
 trict? Perhaps Mr. Hahn could have told us. But he 
 always attributes to Tsui-goa neither father, mother, wife 
 nor son, and he never relates any story with reference to 
 him such as he tells abundantly in the history of the other 
 gods. Tsiii-goa seems, then, to inhabit his red heaven 
 alone, far beyond the moon, according to Kolbe *" ; beyond 
 the blue sky, as told by Hahn in another account. His 
 worshippers believe no less that he hears their prayers and 
 watches over them. They have, then, singularly purified 
 their conception, in so far as our first cited legend has 
 
 * At Tonga, which he fished up out of the sea, they showed Mari- 
 ner the rock upon which the flsh-hook of Taaroa caught. The fish- 
 hook itself was long preserved in the family of the Tui-Tonga, re- 
 garded as lineal descendants of the god.'°* 
 
 t At New Zealand Taaroa is one of the six first gods, son of 
 Ranari and of Papa — Heaven and Earth (Grey)." 
 
 X It is at Tahiti that Taaroa becomes the supreme god.'''. " 
 
212 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 been the point of departure for the beliefs found among 
 these tribes by Kolbe and Hahn. 
 
 Heitsi-eibib. — The Hottentots recognise another good 
 god, concerning whom the earlier travellers gathered some 
 incomplete information, but whom Hahn makes much 
 better known. All the great Namaqua tribes call him 
 Heitsi-eibib ; the Koras give him the name of Garubeb. 
 
 All the Namaqua questioned by our author gave him 
 identical information. Heitsi-eibib is their great-grand- 
 father. He was a very powerful and rich chief, who pos- 
 sessed cows and sheep in abundance. He conquered and 
 exterminated all enemies who attacked his people. He 
 was very prudent and wise. He dwelt in a land to the 
 east. Behold why the door of the hut of these people 
 faces east, why the pole of the waggon at rest is pointed 
 east, why the tombs open in that direction and the faces 
 of the buried dead are turned thither. 
 
 Until this point the story confines itself within the 
 limits of reason ; but it soon goes beyond them. Heitsi- 
 eibib foresaw the future ; he could assume all forms. Like 
 Tslii-goa — in fact, more frequently than he — he has died 
 and come to life again. At the end of each of these lives, 
 he has been buried, and his tombs are scattered over all the 
 lands formerly inhabited by the Hottentots. These are 
 heaps of stones, a kind of cairns, of no great size. That 
 described by Lichtenstein was only from twenty to thirty 
 metres in circumference. They are usually situated in 
 narrow defiles hemmed in by two mountains. Every Hot- 
 tentot who passes near these tombs deposits there, as an 
 offering, a piece of his garment, flowers, a branch of a tree 
 or bush, a stone which increases by so much the size of 
 the monument, or even a zebra dropping. Sometimes 
 also honey or mead is brought thither. The ISTamaqua 
 say that Heitsi-eibib walks at night in desert places, 
 and that he is only satisfied when, upon his return, he 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 213 
 
 finds that some one has shown him homage. He protects 
 those who honour him, procures for them good journeys, 
 preserves them from all danger, gives them good advice, 
 teaches them how to kill lynxes and other wild animals. 
 When they are hunting, the Namaqua habitually repeat 
 the following prayer under their breath : 
 
 Heitsi-eibib ! 
 
 Thou, our grandfather, 
 
 Grant me happiness ! 
 
 Give me game,, 
 
 Make me find honey and roots, 
 
 That I may bless thee again ! 
 
 Art thou not our grandfather, 
 
 Beitsi-eibib,? 
 
 Heitsi-eibib seems to have been reborn — several times, 
 perhaps. A virgin who sucked the sweet juice from a 
 grass stalk (hobega) bore a son, who rapidly grew to ro- 
 bust manhood. It was the grandfather, who returned 
 among his children. Another tradition is more singular. 
 A cow which was cropping a certain sort of grass gave 
 birth to a calf, which quickly grew to be a great bull. 
 The men of the tribe pursued it to kill it, but all of a 
 sudden it disappeared, and in its place they saw a man 
 busy making a tub. It was the god who had taken on 
 the human form. 
 
 Legends abound in the history of Heitsi-eibib. I shall 
 cite but a few, and these in abridged form. 
 
 The god lived on friendly terms with the lion, who at 
 that time had wings and dwelt in the trees. But the ani- 
 mal having profited by its advantage to surprise and de- 
 vour the cattle of the tribe of Heitsi-eibib, this one lay 
 in ambush for him and cut off his wings. From that time 
 dates the unceasing enmity between the descendants of 
 the two old-time friends. 
 
 Heitsi-eibib is also seen in combats with beings whose 
 
214 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 nature is not defined and who contend by magical means. 
 Here is an example : Gama-gorih, the lion, and he, lived in 
 the same country. One day Heitsi-eibib, separated from 
 his companions, sent after them; but he waited in vain, 
 and a roaring informed him that they could not come at 
 his call. He then set himself to find them ; and without 
 making himself known, as was his custom among the 
 Khoi-Khoi, he traversed the kraal of Gama-gorib. This 
 one sent him an invitation by the hare to come and see 
 him and to have a trial of strength with him.* But he 
 had a deep cavern, into which he hurled everyone who 
 came near his dwelling, and left them to die. Heitsi- 
 eibib could not escape the common lot. He was defeated^ 
 and hurled into the abyss. But he spoke to it, saying, 
 " Cavern of my ancestors, raise your floor and lift me up so 
 that I can leap out." The cavern obeyed, and the battle 
 began again. Heitsi-eibib was again thrown to the earth 
 and then hurled into the cavern, whence he escaped a 
 second time in the same way. For tlie third time he came 
 to blows with Gama-gorib. This one was at the end of his 
 powers, and his adversary killed him with a blow dealt be- 
 hind the ear. Then Heitsi-eibib, addressing the cavern 
 anew, said, " Cavern of my ancestors, raise your floor a 
 little that my children can come out." And the cavern 
 raised its floor, and all the children of Heitsi-eibib came 
 forth. Then the god cursed the hare : " Prom this day I 
 curse thee ! Thou shalt carry no more messages ; thou 
 Shalt eat no more by day ; thou shalt eat at night only ; 
 
 *The duel proper exists among the Hottentots. He who be- 
 lieves himself insulted challenges his adversary by offering him a 
 handful of earth. If the challenge is accepted the offender seizes 
 the hand and the dust falls to the ground. If it is not accepted, 
 the challenger throws the dust in his enemy's face. The duel 
 may take place by kicking, with clubs, or with the spear and 
 shield. 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 215 
 
 and only then shall one hear thy voice." The rabbit, thus 
 cursed, fled, and still runs. 
 
 Heitsi-'eibib is married. His first wife, or rather his 
 wife of first rank, is Urisis or Soris, the sun ; he has by 
 lier a son, Urisib, " the day." But he had also a second 
 wife,* whose name the legend does not give. These two 
 wives have their part to play in the events accompanying 
 one of the deaths and one of the resurrections of the god. 
 
 I reproduce this passage from the book, suppressing 
 some repetitions : 
 
 Heitsi-eibib, at this time very aged, travelled with his 
 family. Arrived in a valley where there grew a vine full 
 of ripe grapes, they ate of them, and were immediately in 
 great pain.f The old man called his wife Urisib and said 
 to her : " I feel that I cannot live long. When I am dead 
 cover me with stones. Observe what I order. Do not 
 eat the grapes of this valley, for if you do I shall give you 
 my sickness, and you shall die as I do." 
 
 Thus he died, and was covered with stones, as he com- 
 manded. The wife and son departed. While they were 
 busying themselves with their new camp they heard some 
 one who had eaten grapes singing : 
 
 I, father of Urisib, 
 Father of that poor boy, 
 I, who ate raisins and died, 
 I am a very lively dead man. 
 
 The young wife recognised that the noise came from 
 the direction where Heitsi-eibib had been buried, and said 
 
 * The Khoi-Khoi have often a first wife (ga-iris, " the older 
 wife,'' "the great wife") and a second wife (a-ri-s, "the young 
 wife")(Hahn). 
 
 t Mr. Hahn has himself experienced the bad results of the Cape 
 grapes. He was taken with dysentery after eating some of them. 
 He adds that the natives, not knowing how to treat the attacks, often 
 die from them. 
 16 
 
216 THE "PYGMIES. 
 
 to Urisib, " Go and look." The son went to the tomb, 
 found the footprints of his father there, and returned. 
 Then the young wife said to him : " It is he, and he alone. 
 Do as I command. Look out for the wind ; creep along, 
 keeping to leeward of him. Surprise him on the path to 
 the tomb ; and when you have seized him do not let him 
 go." So it was done. Heitsi-eibib, having seen them : 
 leaped from the tree to the earth and tried to escape them, 
 but he was caught near the tomb. Then he said to them : 
 " Let me go ! I am a man who has been dead, and I will 
 poison you." But the young wife cried out, " Hold the 
 rogue well ! " So they led him home, and from that day 
 he was healthy and well. 
 
 Many other legends relate to Heilsi-eibib. They 
 strongly resemble the preceding, and are always more or 
 less similar to our nursery tales. I find nothing in the 
 history of this god which recalls the lofty ideas which 
 exist — at least in the germ — in what the Khoi-Khoi say of 
 Tsui-goa. Such anyway is the impression resulting from 
 the texts. Yet in one very short passage, which I shall 
 consider later, Mr. Hahn, in assimilating these two gods 
 with one another, asserts that they are invoked in the 
 same way and that one gives them the same titles. But 
 then why not have placed alongside of these puerile fa- 
 bles, of which I have given examples, either some frag- 
 ments of a hymn where Heitsi-eibib is called the father 
 of fathers, or some tradition which represents him also as 
 living beyond the blue sky? If these hymns and tradi- 
 tions exist, why not have made them known ? This is 
 one of the places where one feels only too strongly the lack 
 of sufficient information, which I have already mentioned. 
 
 Klidin, Eliami, Khdb {the Moon). — This defect is 
 more noticeable, and even more regrettable, in regard to 
 Ehdh (the moon). The name signifies he who returns, 
 and well expresses the dominant thought which the ap^ 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 217 
 
 parent transformations of this luminary have raised 
 among the Hottentots. The importance attached by 
 them to its difPerent phases early attracted the attention 
 of travellers, and led them to suspect the existence of re- 
 ligious ideas. Kolbe has well shown that it is the object 
 of a veritable worship. At the new and full moon the 
 natives sacrifice animals and ofEer flesh and milk. These 
 offerings are accompanied by dances, prostrations, and 
 chants in which they salute the return of KhAb. They 
 ask him for good weather, pasturage for their herds and 
 flocks, and much milk. Kolbe has informed us, more- 
 over, that the moon was regarded as an inferior Gounia, 
 representing the superior god (god of gods, Gounia- 
 Tiquoia), as the visible image of an invisible deity. 
 When the moon disappeared they regarded him as dead ; 
 his return was considered a resurrection. Eclipses inspire 
 great terror. Hahn has seen a whole population at such 
 a time utter groans and cries of grief. 
 
 Unfortunately, our author speaks of Kh^b only inci- 
 dentally, so to say, and in order to identify him with 
 Tsui-goa and Heitsi-eibib. It appears probable that he 
 accepts Kolbe's views as true, and that things are now as 
 in the days of the old traveller. Witnesses are not lack- 
 ing on this point, but it would have been none the less 
 interesting to have had Hahn's ideas. Above all, it would 
 have been important to have known those religious chants 
 which are sung throughout entire nights, and to have 
 judged how far they support or oppose the identifications 
 proposed by Hahn. 
 
 The Namaqua, who have preserved many traditions 
 forgotten in the regions nearest the Europeans, preserve 
 a curious story which Hahn quotes from another traveller 
 and which he regards as authentic. They relate that the 
 moon wished one day to send a message to men. The 
 hare offered to carry it. " Go, tell men that they shall 
 
218 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 rise again, just as I die and rise again," said he. But the 
 hare attempted to deceive men, and said to them, " You 
 shall die, as I myself die." To punish him, the moon 
 cursed him.* Behold why, among the Namaqua, men 
 must abstain from eating the flesh of the hare, evidently 
 regarded an impure creature. f 
 
 Nanub (the Storm- Cloud); Gurub {the Thunder); 
 Nalas {the Lightning). — In a country vehere rain is 
 generally accompanied by terrific tempests it is not sur- 
 prising that electrical phenomena have strongly impressed 
 the native imagination. The Hottentots have distin- 
 guished and personified the cloud which bears the bolt, 
 the thunder, and the lightning. They make of them a 
 family. The storm-cloud is the father ; he is named Na- 
 nub, Nanum, or Nanu — that is to say, the pourer, the 
 filterer. One prays to him, saying : " Nanub ! Lord, 
 make rain now ! " 
 
 As the result of certain general ideas, which I shall 
 mention later, Hahn identifies the storm-cloud Nanub 
 and the thunder Gurub (the thatcher) with Tsui-goa. 
 But it plainly results from his own facts that the Hotten- 
 tots clearly distinguish these three gods from one another. 
 We have seen above that they pray Tsui-goa to permit 
 Nanub to make the rain to fall. They also incontestably 
 make of Gurub a distinct person, a male, of whom Nabas 
 (the lightning) is the sister. In fact, when they see a 
 great storm rising, and when the air trembles with the 
 roaring thunder, they gather together for one of those sa- 
 cred dances — gei — of which I have already spoken, and sing 
 
 * Captain James Alexander, who collected this story, had the 
 complete confidence of the Namaqua. An aged Namaqaa said to 
 Mr. Hahn, " That man has the odour of a red man," wishing thereby 
 to show how much this traveller had known how to fraternise with 
 these natives (Hahn). 
 
 f " A very similar legend exists in the Fijis. 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 219 
 
 the following hymn, given by Hahn. I retain the actual 
 name of the god in my translation. Hahn replaces it by 
 titles : 
 
 Curub di Oeis. 
 The Hymn op the Thunder. 
 
 Nanum oatse ! 
 
 Son of Namim ! 
 
 Gari Khoi Gurutse ! 
 
 Thou brave, loud-speaking Guru ! 
 
 Oiise gobare ! 
 
 I'allc softly, please ! 
 
 Havie t'am u-a-Tamao, 
 
 For I have no guilt. 
 
 Ubatere ! 
 
 Leave me alone ! {Forgive me f) 
 
 Outago x"ig6> 
 
 For lam become quite weak (quite stunned, perplexed). 
 
 Gurutse, 
 
 Thou, Guru, 
 
 Nanum oatse ! 
 
 Son of Nanum ! 
 
 Moreover, Hahn has been present at a dance and has 
 collected a song, which shows exactly what the lightning 
 is in the Hottentot mythology. A member of the tribe 
 has been struck by lightning. The inhabitants of the 
 kraal blame her for it in chorus, and she, represented by 
 a single person, replies in solo : 
 
 Nabas di Oeis. 
 The Dance Song of the Lightnino. 
 ohoeus. 
 Aibe iiuris Nanuse ! 
 
 Thou, daughter of Nanub, daughter-in-law of Alb !* 
 Ti gSda go gamse ! 
 Thou who hast killed my brother ! 
 Gaises gum ab na goeo ! 
 Therefore thou liest now so nicely in a hole ! 
 
 * The rainbow. 
 
220 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Gaise to go sa gaba a gam. 
 
 ( Yes), indeed, I have killed thy brother so well. 
 
 CHORUS. 
 
 Gaises gum ab ua goeo ! 
 
 [ Well] therefore thou liest (now) in a hole ! 
 
 Gorob Khemi go usense ! 
 
 Thou who hast painted thy body red like Goro ! 
 
 Som auba naba tam asse ! 
 
 Thou who dost not drop the " menses " ! 
 
 Bixalkhanabiseb aose I 
 
 Thou wife of the copper-bodied man ! 
 
 One sees by this song that Nabas is not only daughter 
 of the thundering cloud (Nanub), but also that she has 
 a husband. The imagination of the natives has made 
 of the lightning a female deity, and has given her as wife 
 to the Khoi-Khoi Adam, who figures here as the son of 
 the rainbow, and whose name, according to Hahn, means 
 the man with a copper lody. 
 
 Other Mytliological Personages. — Another divinity of 
 the Khoi'-Khoi, and perhaps of the S4-n, is Toosib, " the 
 old man of the waters." He is described as a great red 
 man, with white hair. Before drinking at certain rivers 
 one must throw in some little offering, saying: " grand- 
 father, son of a Bushman, give me food ! Give me flesh 
 of rhinoceros, of antelope, of zebra, and all that I desire ! " 
 Failure to perform these rites is to expose one's self to 
 the anger of the god. The guide of Captain Alexander,* 
 under the impulse of ardent thirst, forgot to comply with 
 these prescriptions. Taken with an attack of dysentery, 
 
 * Captain Alexander speaks of his guide as being a Bushman. 
 Hahn tells us that he belonged to a tribe of poor Naraaqua who are 
 at times so called because they have no cattle and live almost like 
 the San. 
 
RELiaiON OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 221 
 
 he did not fail to regard tlie disease as a punishment in- 
 flicted by Toosib. 
 
 Hahn has plainly not sought to make known all the 
 personages who figure in the mythology of the Hotten- 
 tots. There are some whom he simply mentions by 
 name, such are Tsavirub or A'ib (the rainbow), AmaV, 
 Oas, etc. He gives a little more detail in reference to 
 myths connected with astronomy. 
 
 The Khoi-Khoi appear to have distinguished a great 
 number of constellations and to have given names to sev- 
 eral stars. Naturally fable have drawn upon this field so 
 well adapted to stimulate the imagination. The stars are 
 for them the eyes or spirits of the dead. From this be 
 lief they have constructed a characteristic curse : " Thou 
 who art happy, may misfortune fall upon thee from the 
 star of my grandfather ! " 
 
 The Pleiades {Klianuseti) are the stars of rain ; their 
 return announces the opening of the rainy season, which 
 plays so important a part in the life of these pastoral peo- 
 ple. Thus are explained the festivals which greet their 
 appearance. In some myths they are represented as chil- 
 dren of Tsui-goa. They have for their husband Aldebaran 
 {Aob), or rather the constellation of which that star is 
 the most noticeable, and which includes a part of our 
 Hyades and of Orion. Unfortunately, misunderstanding 
 has crept into this household. The Pleiades one day said 
 to their husband : " Go, kill us those three zebras ; but if 
 you fail of them, do not dare to return to the house." 
 Aob took his bow and arrow ; he shot, and missed his aim. 
 As the lion was watching and guarding the zebras on the 
 other side, he could not regain his arrow. Fearing the 
 wrath of his wives, he seated himself, where he still re- 
 mains, suffering from hunger and thirst. It is almost 
 unnecessary to remark that the arrow, the zebras, and the 
 lion are so many other stars or constellations. 
 
222 TIIK I'YOMJKS. 
 
 (iauimh or (laima. — Tlio diviriiii(in of whom J have 
 so far spoken are all bonellcenL It is oLiioi'wiso with 
 Oaunab, Oaunam, or Oauna. lid is tlio .ni/irmiir. had bidnij, 
 as Tsdi-goa i.s the supreme good heiiKj. 11 is he who 
 causes all ills ; it is he who makes beasts [xalMh, who gives 
 men up to liorce 1)oiihLh, who makes tlidir best-laid plans 
 go awry, and sends thotn all sorLs of disoasos; his name 
 signifios the doxlroiicr, he who exli'/nidiuilcn. One saw 
 above how he fought with THfii-goa and was beaten. A 
 missionary haH cioilticted another v(U'si()ii of this legend of 
 the strife between the powers of good and evil; but it is 
 needless to rciprodiioo it here. It presonLs tiie same anthro- 
 pomorphic chiiriictei', and ends also with the defeat nf 
 (jaunab. 
 
 In thoHodilTorent combats Oaunab is reportcid as kiihtd 
 by his adversary, but evid(^ritly one admits that he re- 
 turns to life, since he iriha/H/,s a Mack heaven, as we have 
 seen. Mortiover, the worHlii[) which tlio Kiioi'-Klioi ren- 
 dered him at tlietime of Kolbo, and wiiicli still exists, 
 l(!ii,v(iH no (louliUn the niatl-er. Ilaim has been able to 
 HaUsfy himwilf (if the fai^t. One prays to him and offers 
 him sacrifice to avc^rt harm. It is a fiil.y tlud, the author 
 has not here {,'ono into some dctiiils, and has not made 
 known Uio terms of tiie invocations made, to the spirit of 
 evil. It would he. of interest to compare tiiom with l.iie 
 hymns cliiuitcd in honour of Tsfii-goa. 
 
 It is probably with this worship of (hiunab that one 
 muHf conncid; l,lic hornii|rc ii,c(!ord(!(l by the Hot ten tots to a 
 Hpccios of '/////w/m.* Kolbii f^iivc most exact dctiiils upon 
 tills point, lie saw the natives show a jirofoiind respect 
 
 • TliiH Hpi'cii'H hiiH tiol, ydl, i'i'i'civ(«l (I Hiii(ail,ill(', iiiirn(\ ho iiri i^mi- 
 Tiful i'r\U>mii\(it;\H\. \f\U irii;\ it Ih rani iil, tlio Oiipn, biU. '■ornttifin in 
 till) IhIob of (''raiirii and Boiirlioii. Jl, in vir.U liiiown lliii,!, iuiioiik 
 oiirncilvcK, in llii', Stmlli, Mm "priiying miiiitiH" (Mii/h/ih ri'l/U/iomi) \h 
 fti«o I III) oliji'cl, of viirioiiH popiiliir hiiihthI il',lon.H. 
 
RELIGION OP THE EOTTENTOTS AXD BUSILMEX. 223 
 
 for this orthopterous insect whenever they came upon one ; 
 he saw sacrifices made in its honour when it appeai'ed in- 
 side a kraal, and he conckided that the Hottentots con- 
 sidered it a beneficent divinity.* On the other hand, the 
 astronomer La Caille believed that it was, in their eyes, a 
 creature of ill omen. But Hahn has several times been 
 able to show that all the details given by Kolbe ai-e yet, 
 to-day, perfectly accurate. At the same time he has 
 leai-ned with surprise that this insect, greeted with such 
 joyous demonsti-ations, and which it is absolutely prohib- 
 ited to kill, bears among the Khoi-Khoi the name of the 
 bad principle, Gaunab. These apparent contradictions 
 are easily explained, if we admit that the mantis is to the 
 minds of this people a sort of incarnation of Uod. Fear 
 only will account for the manifestations which greet its 
 coming ; but perhaps they also imagine that its presence 
 is proof of the momentary appeasing of the sph'it of evil.f 
 
 However that may be, the Khoi-Khoi believe that 
 Gannab shows himself at times — now under the form of a 
 little humpbacked man, now under that of a deformed 
 monster covered with hair and clad in white. 
 
 Onis has seen that the rainbow (Tsan'rub or A'ib) is 
 the father-in-law of the lightning. An aged Xamaqua 
 gave Hahn another version relative to this phenomenon. 
 According to him, the rainbow is a fire kindled by Gaunab, 
 into which the god precipitates and causes to perish those 
 who have allowed themselves to be deceived by him. The 
 individuals who are supposed to have died in this way are 
 
 *La Vailljint has denied the .iccviraoy of the facts reported by 
 Kolbe ; but this traveller, who has known how to see many things 
 well, was little suited to the study of the relijrions of savago peoples, 
 and has absolutely not underetood that of the Hottentots. 
 
 fThe details given by Kolbe*" upon tlie veritable despair which 
 seized some Hottentots on seeinsr a little child about to kill one of 
 these sacred insects appears to me to justify this interpretation. 
 
224 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 called Gauna-6-Khoin (the dead people of Gaunab), 8au- 
 bo Kho'in (the people of the shadow), etc. The old men, 
 who were formerly allowed to die of hunger in a closed 
 hut, either because they could no longer take care of 
 themselves or because they were suspected of witchcraft, 
 took their place among these subjects of Gaunab. 
 
 If one will recall what I said above about the Bush- 
 men, he will see that we find again among the Khoi'-Khoi, 
 tinder names identical, or nearly so, the two divinities of 
 good and evil recognised by tho >S4n. This is one more 
 evidence of the very close relationship of the two peoples. 
 Hahn, speaking here only of Gaunab, sees in that fact a 
 proof that the worship of the bad god is older than the 
 division of the race. He goes yet further, and believes 
 that Gaunab alone was worshipped in those remote times, 
 and that the existence of Tsfji-goa was admitted later. 
 Then he extends this idea into a generalisation. Accord- 
 ing to him, man saw at first in Nature only infernal powers 
 The notion of a beneficent being would be the product of 
 a more advanced intellectual culture. 
 
 I cannot accept this theory; it is too much in con- 
 tradiction with facts establishf!d among a crowd of savage 
 peoples. Even among the lowest Australians one has 
 found the dualistic belief which is concealed within all 
 religions. 8chweinfurth is, I think, the only traveller 
 who, after serious investigation, admits thf, existence of 
 one people who know only bad spirits.* But, admitting 
 that this single exception really exists, it would be far 
 from favouring the ideas of Hahn. In fact, the Bongos 
 of whom Schweinfurth speaks are by no means at the 
 bottom of the scale of civilisation ; they are much above 
 
 * '" Bnrchell \\m\ said Homethiuiaf analogous of the Bachapins, a 
 fragment of the IVrhimwas. But Livingstone and Gazalis have 
 shown thiit he was ierl into frrnr and knew only a part of the re- 
 ligiouH beJififs of thene Kafflr tn'bcH. 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 225 
 
 not only the Bushmen but also the Hottentots. It is not 
 a people beginning, but, on the contrary, a people who are 
 advancing. They have passed the two lower stages of cul- 
 ture. They are essentially agriculturists. When they clear 
 a piece of woodland for agricultural purposes they careful- 
 ly leave the fruit trees. They plant in furrows, and they 
 reset the young plants. They are skilful metallurgists, 
 and their high smelting furnace is at once very ingenious 
 and very sensible. Their outfit is truly very rudimentary, 
 but they use it so well that several of their pi-oducts would 
 bear comparison with those of English workmen. They 
 work wood as well as iron, construct huts well supported 
 by tree trunks, and they adorn tomhs with carved figures 
 representing the dead. They are indeed, then, far from 
 that state of intellectual infancy during which, according 
 to Hahn, man already adored a devil, but had not arrived at 
 the notion of a god. K it is true that they do not now 
 know a god, it is probably because, affected by an idea 
 found among several African tribes, they have at last for- 
 gotten him.* 
 
 Gama-gorib. — Gama-gorib, Hahn says, is almost the 
 same as Gaunab. But, to judge from the legends, he is 
 very distinct, and seems to occupy the second place in the 
 army of evil. He is the adversary of Heitsi-eibib, as Gau- 
 nab is of Tsui-goa. I have given the story of one of the 
 conflicts, and it is needless to enter into further details, 
 which, moreover, would teach us nothing new. 
 
 To these upper demons are attached a crowd of spec- 
 tres and bad spirits greatly feared by the Hottentots. 
 
 Tlie First Man. — I have already said that Hahn gave 
 
 * Some Nejiro populations of West Africa, although admitting 
 the existence of a good god, say it is useless to offer saoriflces to him, 
 since he always does good, and keep homage for the bad gods whom 
 they have to swerve from their bad intentions. The long holding 
 of such a notion might lead to the loss of the idea of a good god. 
 
226 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 to the being whom he calls the Khoi-Khoi Adam the 
 name of Eixalkhanabiseb, which means the man whose 
 body has the lustre of copper. The same person is also 
 called Gurikho'isih, " the primitive man." The legend is 
 inconsistent, for this first man has a mother, whose name 
 the author does not give, and lives in a kraal where there 
 are maidens. 
 
 However that may be, one very detailed legend shows 
 us Gurikhoisib living in the midst of the animals. One 
 day he took a notion to play. The leopard, ape, hyena, 
 serpents, etc., were present at the party. The man lost 
 all his copper bracelets. Then he began to quarrel 
 with the lion, and they defied one another. Gurikhoisib 
 went home, poisoned his arrows, sharpened his spears ; 
 his mother anointed him with melted butter mixed with 
 a sweet buchu,* and encouraged him by improvising a 
 song in his honour (gare). The fight took place near a 
 pond where our author had been taken by his guide.f 
 The lion, attacked by the dogs and hindered by arrows 
 and dartg, fled, and was discovered by his mother, who 
 heard his last sigh and buried him, while Gurikhoisib 
 was received with a song of triumph. From that time the 
 descendants of the lion have tried to avenge their ances- 
 tors, and the Khoi-Khoi wage merciless war against them. 
 
 It is, moreover, easy to understand that Gurikhoisib 
 has taken a place in the native mythology ; he is regarded 
 as a sort of demigod, who protects the people against 
 harmful beings, and, above all, against the lions. 
 
 Future Life. — Prom some details occurring in what 
 precedes I think one will have already concluded that 
 
 * Perfumed powder obtained by pulverising a species of spiraBa. 
 
 f The pond of Khubirsaos, about 33° 29' south latitude and 16° 
 28' east longitude. Hahn was much impressed hy the interest and 
 exactness with which his guide told him all the movements and 
 actions of the combat. 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 227 
 
 the Hottentots believe in another life. It is a fact which 
 Kolbe had already placed beyond doubt, although it has 
 been denied by some of his predecessors as well as by 
 some of those who have come after him. The personal 
 observations of Hahn have upon this point fully confirmed 
 those of the old traveller.* 
 
 I have mentioned what the Hottentots say of the stars, 
 and one might conclude from that that they place the 
 dwelling of those who are gone in the sky ; but I have 
 nowhere found an explicit statement to that effect. On 
 the other hand, many facts show that tliey regard the 
 spirits of the dead as haunting, at least for a time, the 
 neighbourhood of their tombs. At the death of one of 
 its members, whatever the age or sex, the whole kraal 
 moves, taking pains to leave the hut of the deceased intact,, 
 together with all its contents — furniture, arms, and gar- 
 ments. To carry away the least thing would be to expose 
 themselves to be followed by the spirit of the dead.*" 
 
 One has already seen that certain spirits are, so to say, 
 vassals of Gaunab, the god of evil. To this category be- 
 long also spirits of all individuals who have not been 
 properly buried and whose bodies have been eaten by 
 hyenas or vultures. As consequence of this idea, crimi- 
 nals, victims of vendetta, slaves killed by their master, 
 enemies killed in combat, are given up to birds of prey 
 and beasts, in order that, after they have been devoured, 
 
 * Perhaps some missionaries most deserve reproach for these 
 misunderstandings, and among them Moffat "' in particular. It is 
 difiioult not to be surprised and pained in reading what he has 
 written upon the subject of the claimed atheism of the Hottentots. 
 One would say that he was afraid to find among these pagans any- 
 thing that resembled religious ideas. A faith too exclusive has evi- 
 dently misled " the Nestor of living missionaries." To him " man is 
 without conscience until the will of God has been declared to him." 
 Evidently, when a man holds such views he is poorly prepared to 
 understand the questions here considered. 
 
228 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 they may become so many Gauna-ora-Klio'in. Some of 
 these spectres, called by the special name of hausan, 
 wander during the darkest nights, and even enter kraals, 
 terrifying the inhabitants. 
 
 The spirits just mentioned are maleficent. Those of 
 persons who were always distinguished by wisdom and by 
 virtues, and who have been regularly buried, are, for the 
 Hottentots, so many good genii. Woods, mountains, 
 prairies rivers, are consecrated to such, called by Kolbe 
 heroes, or saints. Every person passing in the neighbour- 
 hood of such places stops to meditate upon the virtues of 
 the dead man and to implore his protection. One believes 
 in the power of their intervention, and if he escapes some 
 great danger it is to them that he should ascribe the 
 credit. Kolbe one day met a Hottentot who was danc- 
 ing and singing by himself, with devoutness, in a desert 
 place. Questioned by the traveller, he replied that, over- 
 taken there by a profound slumber, he had passed a re- 
 freshing night and had waked up only twenty feet away 
 from a great lion, who let him go unharmed. He said 
 the saint of the valley only could have protected him 
 against the fierce beast. 
 
 In each family the ancestors are considered almost as 
 household gods. One makes prayers to them and offers 
 them gifts. But in order to be heard it is necessary to go 
 to perform the ceremonies at the grave itself. Hahn tells 
 a characteristic anecdote in this connection. In one of 
 his journeys he met beyond the frontier of the Kalihari 
 Desert a party of Namaqua, under the lead of a great 
 woman of the country (Geiksois), whom he knew because 
 he had enjoyed her bountiful hospitality. He asked her 
 jocosely if she had come hunting in these barren deserts. 
 " My friend," she replied, " do not joke. I am iu great 
 distress. The drought and the Bushmen have destroyed 
 many of my goats and cattle. I go to my father's grave ; 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 229 
 
 I go to weep and to pray there. He will hear my voice, 
 he will see my tears, will give success to my husband, who 
 is hunting ostriches, so that we can buy again some fe- 
 male goats and cows, that our little ones may live." 
 
 " But your father is dead," replied the traveller ; " how 
 will he be able to hear you ? " 
 
 " Yes, he is dead," she replied, " but he only sleeps. 
 We Khoi-Khoi always, if we are in trouble, go and pray 
 to the graves of our grandparents and ancestors. It is an 
 old custom of ours." 
 
 I call the reader's whole attention to this paragraph. 
 It confirms with additional details all that Kolbe had 
 already said upon the belief of the Hottentots in the sur- 
 vival of a something from man after the earthly death, of 
 the influence which that something may exercise over the 
 destiny of the living, and of a sort of worship rendered to 
 it. If one remembers that the Khoi-Khoi address pray- 
 ers not only to their recently deceased parents but even 
 to Heitsi-eibib, the first ancestor of the race, it must 
 be seen that they believe in the immortality of that 
 something. 
 
 Controlled by certain conceptions of natures various 
 and even opposite, which I have often had to combat, one 
 perhaps will claim that we have here only the result of 
 contact of the natives with Europeans. But it is impos- 
 sible to explain matters at the Cape in this way. The 
 worship, or, if one prefers it, the honourification, of saints, 
 and faith in the power of their mediation is an essentially 
 Catholic belief, rejected by all Protestant sects. But the 
 Cape and its dependencies have been colonised only by 
 Protestants — by Hollanders, French who fied at the revo- 
 cation of the edict of Nantes, English. This fact explains 
 why these countries have been evangelised only by Protest- 
 ants. The first missionary who attempted the conversion 
 of the Hottentots was a Moravian, George Schmidt, who 
 
230 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 came to the Cape in 1736,* consequently several years 
 after the voyage of Kolbe.f The beliefs here discussed 
 then belong properly to the Khoi-Khoi. 
 
 The Hottentots, moreover, have no clear idea either as 
 to the nature of spirits or of their mode of existence. 
 Kolbe discovered nothing among them which corresponded 
 to heaven or hell. He concluded that they have no no- 
 tion of reward or punishment connected with good or bad 
 actions. Hahn is silent in this matter. Perhaps this is 
 one of the points upon which he has not cared to tell all 
 he knows. A people who consider the stars as the eyes of 
 some dead persons, but at the same time make of others 
 the people of Gaunab, have certainly at least a somewhat 
 confused idea of the rewards which await the good and 
 the bad. 
 
 Worship, Priests, Sorcerers. — I have already said that 
 the Khoi-Khoi have no sort of figures intended to repre- 
 sent their deities, and that they construct no building 
 consecrated to worship. One cannot give that name 
 either to the cairns regarded as tombs of Heitsi-eibib, or 
 to those which cover the bodies of some saints, and which 
 grow slowly in consequence of the accumiilation of stones 
 or branches of trees which are deposited there as offer- 
 ings. One cannot even regard as chapels those temporary 
 booths of green boughs and flowers under which men 
 alone eat flesh of cattle offered in sacrifice. Yet they 
 have sacred places which they never pass without praying. 
 These are, as I have stated, certain rocks, hills, rivers, etc. 
 The homage, moreover, is not addressed to the material 
 
 * Some Danish missionaries sent to the Indies by the King of 
 Denmark, Frederick IV — Plutsohau, Zeegenbal, Boving — were at 
 the Cape at the same time as Kolbe ; but they only touched there. 
 Hahn and Moffat agree in giving to George Schmidt the title of 
 first missionary to the Hottentots. "■ "' 
 
 t 1705 to 1713. 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 231 
 
 object, whaterer it may be, but to the god or spirit be- 
 lieved to reside therein. I do not anywhere find that 
 these places are the object of pilgrimage, or that numbers 
 of people betake themselves there to hold religious cere- 
 monies in common. These, rather, take place within the 
 kraal. It is there, in the round public place enclosed by 
 the huts, that one celebrates the return of the Pleiades 
 and of the new moon, or that, with eyes fixed upon the 
 Pleiades, they invoke Tstii-goa. 
 
 Among the Hottentots there exists nothing resembling 
 a sacerdotal caste. Each kraal has its priest (surri), whose 
 position is sufficiently modest. To begin with, he is elect- 
 ed, which seems to exclude all idea of a special character 
 resulting from his relations to the divinity. In the next 
 place, in the local hierarchy he holds only a fourth rank, 
 after the civil chief, the military chief, and the doctor. 
 He plays an important part in the ceremonies which ac- 
 company marriage and the passage of boys into manhood, 
 perhaps also in funerary rites. But he is not even men- 
 tioned in connection with the great religious ceremonies 
 addressed either to the good or the bad principle. He 
 makes no public prayer ; he gives no instruction to the 
 people in religious matters. He is, then, as Kolbe says, 
 a master of ceremonies rather than a priest, in the accept- 
 ance we give that word. 
 
 By the side of the surri, whose functions connect him 
 more or less with the worship of the good gods, are found 
 sorcerers, among whom Hahn places the makers of rain. 
 These receive their power from Gaunab, who teaches to 
 whom he pleases the diabolical art of enchantment and 
 bewitchment. We have no information upon the nature 
 of the relations which can be established between the evil 
 genius and men. There is no mention either of compact 
 or of oath, yet the sorcerers are, in a sense, ministers of 
 Gaunab. The Hottentots extremely fear their incanta- 
 17 
 
232 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 tions, and attribute to them almost all the misfortunes 
 which strike their persons or their cattle ; they have re- 
 course to a vast number of amulets and practices to pro- 
 tect themselves against them. 
 
 Various Superstitions. — One may consider the ideas 
 so far discussed as really belonging to the religion proper 
 of the Hottentots. There are others which are veritable 
 superstitions.* There are a number of ideas without ap- 
 parent relation to the mythology of these people, but 
 which are none the less accepted as articles of faith, and 
 give rise to special practices which one cannot neglect 
 without danger. Hahn devotes a long chapter to these ; 
 I will limit myself to quoting a few of them. 
 
 Fire appears to play an important role from this point 
 of view. At the birth of a child one must fire a little 
 faggot without employing either stove or metal, but by the 
 friction of two pieces of wood ; this must be kept burning 
 until the umbilical cord drops, and must not be used 
 for any domestic purpose. If these prescriptions are not 
 rigidly observed the child will die. When a Hottentot 
 goes forth to the hunt his wife lights a special fire, and 
 should do naught but attend to it until he returns. Should 
 it go out, the husband will bring back no game. At cer- 
 tain epochs one makes sheep pass through a fire fed with 
 green wood and giving much smoke. I have nowhere 
 seen a statement that the Hottentots submit themselves 
 to this ceremony, of which traces are found even in 
 France, especially in Brittany.*^' 
 
 Certain animals, particularly elephants and serpents, 
 can recognise guilty persons, and go into the midst of a 
 
 * I have long insisted, both in my courses and in my books, 
 upon the distinction that should be made between religion and su- 
 perstitions. I consider it as important to make this clearly in the 
 case of the lowest savages as in the case of the most civilised peo- 
 ples ; but this is too often forgotten."^. '"= 
 
RELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 233 
 
 crowd to kill them without attacking any of their com- 
 panions. The tribe of the Amaqua one day surprised 
 the Damara, and made a great carnage and carried away 
 much booty. One of the aggressors made himself con- 
 spicuous by his extreme cruelty, on returning home he 
 was attacked in his hut by a black lion, who tore him to 
 pieces. The Amaqua are still convinced that this lion 
 was really a Damara, who had taken this form to avenge 
 his tribe. 
 
 Hahn has gone to much trouble to find among the 
 Namaqua some trace of serpent worship, but with no 
 success. This creature figures largely, however, in the 
 superstitions of the Cape, as everywhere else in the world. 
 Here, as elsewhere, there exist charmers who fearlessly 
 handle the most dangerous species ; one of them procured 
 for our author all that he wished of them. The sorcerers, 
 of course, enjoy this privilege in the greatest degree. The 
 Hottentots say they only need to hiss to make all the ser- 
 pents of the neighbourhood run to them. Near every 
 spring there dwells a serpent ; if he departs or is killed 
 the fountain dries up. Serpents are very fond of milk ; 
 they Slick cows, and even women. Analogous superstitions 
 exist among ourselves. A particular species (huitsibis) 
 lives between the horns of the cana.* Finally, the na- 
 tives believe in the existence of serpents with human 
 virile organs, who seek women during their slumber 
 {ganin-gul). Hahn passed the night in a kraal where 
 the whole population were under arms and greatly excited 
 because a young girl believed she had seen one of these 
 strange incubi. 
 
 Mytliological Theory of ffahn.— Hahn is not content 
 only to make known the religious beliefs of the Hot- 
 tentots ; he has desired to explain them, and has thus 
 
 * Antilope areas, Pallas ; Oreas canna, Gray. 
 
234 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 been led to a theory which rests mainly upon linguistic 
 considerations. He seeks in etymology a rational inter- 
 pretation of the names of the divinities of whom he has 
 spoken, and believes he can thus follow back mythologi- 
 cal conceptions to their origin. 
 
 Our author, naturally, first occupies himself with Tsui- 
 goa. He recalls the fact, according to the legend, that the 
 two words mean the sich or wounded knee. But he thinks 
 it strange that the infinite being should be called by a 
 name which makes him only a simple person playing a 
 part in a common tale, and he proposes a very different 
 explanation. The root tsu, says he, signifies literally sick, 
 loounded ; but a recent wound is the colour of blood — it 
 is red. Ts1a, by extension, then, has the same meaning. 
 On the other hand, the verb goa means " to walh, to ap- 
 proach." Goah, goam, is '■'■he who walks, he who ap- 
 proaches." The first meaning can be very well applied 
 to the knee ; the second can be used in speaking of the 
 day, which is on the point of appearing. The words Tsiii- 
 goab, Tsui-goam, ought, then, to be translated by " he who 
 comes red." He is, says Hahn, the red morning, the rosy 
 dawn, the aurora. 
 
 The same line of thought conducts our author to iden- 
 tify with the night the god whom we have seen to be the 
 foe of Tslii-goa. From the root o, " to die," come the 
 words for " to sleep, death, slumber," etc. The night 
 kills, so to say, all the men whom it puts to slumber. 
 The male being who personifies it well merits, then, the 
 name of Oaunam — that is, " the destroyer." 
 
 Hahn considers it as demonstrated that, in their origin, 
 the words TsUi-goa and Gauna have been employed only 
 to express the succession of day and night. But the 
 primitive meaning is lost ; the religious sentiment and 
 mythology apply themselves to the task, and the legend 
 is born. Every evening man dies and the night envelops 
 
RELIGION OP THE HOTTENTOTS AND BUSHMEN. 235 
 
 him ; he relives at the break of day ; he turns his eyes 
 towards the east, aud sees the sky tinted with red ; he 
 concludes from that that a battle has taken place and 
 that blood has flowed. Thus has arisen the history of 
 the struggle between Gaunab, the inhabitant of the dark 
 sky, and Tsui-goa, who gains his victory at the price of a 
 wounded knee. 
 
 After having shown Tsui-goa to be only the personifi- 
 cation of the dawn, Hahn, by the employment of the same 
 method, and thanks to comparisons which seem to me at 
 times to be very forced, identifies with him the greater 
 part of the divinities of whom I have spoken. According 
 to him, Kh4b, Heitsi-eibib, Gurub, Nanub, etc., are all 
 the Infinite One, the lord of life and light. He hardly 
 makes one exception upon the subject of Gurikhoisib, the 
 first man. He seems to regard him as a distinct person- 
 age, admitting that here the worship of ancestors has 
 been fused with that of the supreme being. It is to be 
 observed that in this astronomical myth, as Hahn un- 
 derstands it, the sun Urisis plays only a subordinate role, 
 becoming the wife of the moon, Khdh, assimilated to 
 Heitsi-eibib. 
 
 In fact, one sees that Mr. Hahn belongs to that school 
 of mythologists which counts so many eminent adepts in 
 Europe, and in France itself. As Max Miiller,i^ as Alfred 
 Maury, **^ he seeks in the literal meaning of the names of 
 divinities the interpretation of the myths ; he traces back 
 all the personages of the Hottentot pantheon to a small 
 number of personified natural phenomena. According to 
 him, the Khoi-Khoi, in their religious development have 
 followed the same road as the Aryan peoples, and he 
 thinks that if they had not been stopped by the imper- 
 fection of their language they would have invented as 
 beautiful a mythology as that of the Iranians or the Greeks. 
 Such as it is, he says, this mythology has had for point 
 
236 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 of departure the belief m a supreme being whom all the 
 Khoi-Khoi, long before their separation invoked under 
 the name of Tsui-goab, and who has played among them 
 exactly the same role as Dyaus among the ancestors of our 
 own race. 
 
 Thus Hahn applies Hindoo theories to the mythology 
 of the Khoi-Khoi. I am not competent to follow him in 
 this field ; but the masters in linguistics whom I have 
 consulted have unanimously replied that the Hottentot 
 languages are not sufficiently known in their history and 
 their development for it to be possible as yet to pursue 
 such a method. I can only endorse this judgment. 
 
 Hahn summarises in the following terms the general 
 impression which his long studies upon the beliefs of the 
 Hottentots have given him: "If the word religion cor- 
 responds to a faith in a heavenly father, who is near his 
 children in their sufferings ; if it expresses a belief in an 
 all-powerful master, who sends the rains and good weath- 
 er; if it includes the idea of a father of lights, from 
 whom Cometh every good thing ; if this father is at the 
 sarne time a rewarder, who sees all things and who pun- 
 ishes the wrong and rewards the right; if religion trans- 
 lates the longings of the heart after the invisible, with the 
 hope of seeing it face to face in a better world ; if it im- 
 plies at once the feeling of human feebleness and the ac- 
 ceptance of a divine government, we ought not to hesitate 
 about placing the Khoi-Khoi on our own 'level." 
 
 I cannot here consider the many questions which these 
 conclusions raise, and confine myself to making a single 
 remark. Either our author exaggerates the loftiness of 
 the religious beliefs of the Koi-Koi, or he has not given 
 us all the data necessary for appreciating them. Without 
 doubt many of the facts — the so clear declaration of Arisi- 
 mab, the hymn to Tsui-goa, the conduct of the Haboba 
 guide, etc. — plainly show the belief of the Hottentots in a 
 
BELIGION OF THE HOTTENTOTS AND BDSHMEN. 237 
 
 god, creator and all-powerful, who watches over men as 
 over his children ; and the brave Nanib, in preferring 
 death to apostasy, has shown that they can die for him if 
 need be. Without doubt, also, the worship of ancestors, 
 dating back to Heitsi-eibib, shows a belief in a future life 
 which almost, if not quite, reaches immortality. But in 
 the facts given by Hahn I see nothing that warrants at- 
 tributing to the Khoi-Khoi that high longing towards an 
 intimate communion with the supreme G-od, nothing that 
 suggests even a little definitely a reward kept for the 
 good, a punishment awaiting the wicked. In this regard, 
 far from being equal to the Aryans, they are below many 
 peoples who have remained at a much lower social stage 
 than they have attained. In particular, the Mincopies 
 have made for their supreme god a far more spiritual 
 conception, and have arrived at far more definite and just 
 conceptions regarding the future destiny of man than the 
 Hottentots. But perhaps Hahn has written his opinions 
 after taking into consideration that material which he has 
 judged best not to give us. 
 
 In spite of these gaps Hahn's book possesses the 
 greatest interest. He makes us acquainted with a whole 
 new, rudimentary mythology, which brings together, as 
 those of so many other savage peoples do, very elevated 
 ideas and the most childish fables. Moreover, this my- 
 thology belongs to one of the oldest, perhaps the oldest, of 
 African races. For this reason it has a double interest. 
 The author has added an important chapter to the his- 
 tory of those little religions, too often neglected, and a 
 knowledge of which throws so sure a light upon some of 
 the problems which the study of their great sisters pro- 
 pounds to the mythologists.* 
 
 * Emile Biimouf recognises as great religions only Christianity, 
 Judaism, Mohammedanism, Brahmanism, Buddhism.^' They are 
 
238 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 the most important in the numbers of their adherents. Out of 
 1,392,500,000 souls in the population of the globe, these five religions, 
 according to Hubner, include 1,136,500,000. But the same author 
 estimates that the number of different religions in the world is 
 nearly 1,000. The little religions are certainly in the majority. To 
 neglect them in the study o£ comparative mythology would be like 
 a naturalist who, to gain an idea of the organisation of animals, 
 studied only the vertebrates. 
 
APPENDIX A. 
 
 LIST OF BOOKS, AKTICLES AND AUTHOES EEFEEEED TO 
 IN THE TEXT. 
 
 (The small numbers in the text correspond to the numbers in this list.) 
 
 1. d'Abiadie. Bui. Societe de Geographie, third series, vol. ii. 
 
 2. d'Alhertis. New Guinea : What I did and what I saw. 
 
 3. Allen, F. A. The Original Range of the Papuan and Negrito 
 
 Races, Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. viii. 
 
 4. Anderson. The Semang and Sakai Tribes of the Malay Penin- 
 
 sula, Jour. Indian Archipelago, vol. iv. 
 
 5. Anthropological Society of Paris. Bulletin, third series, vol. iii. 
 
 6. Arbousset et Daumas. Voyage d'exploration au Nord-est de la 
 
 colonic du Cap de Bonne-Esperance, entrepris en 1836. 
 
 7. Aristotle. History of Animals. 
 
 8. Avanchers, Leon des. Lettre a M. d'Abbadie, Bui. dc la Soc. de 
 
 Geograph., fifth series, vol. xii. 
 
 9. Avanchers, Leon des. Bsquisses geographiques des pays Oromo 
 
 ou Galla, dits pays Somali, et de la cote orientale d'Afrique, 
 Bui. de la Soc. de Geograph., fourth series, t. xvii. 
 
 10. Avezac. Notice sur les pays et le peuple des Yebous en Afrique, 
 
 Mems. de la Soc. d'Ethnol., vol. ii. 
 
 11. Baker, Samuel W. Discovery of the Albert Nyanza, New Ex- 
 
 plorations of the Sources of the Nile. 
 
 12. Banier. Memoires de I'Academie des inscriptions et belles- 
 
 lettres, 1729, vol. V. 
 
 13. Barrow. Vol. xvii of Walckenaer. 
 
 14. Beceari. Appunti etnografici sui Papua, Cosmos, 1877. 
 
 15. Blair. Selection of Records of Government of India, No. xxv, 
 
 The Andaman Islands, Appendix ii. 
 
 16. Bourgeois. Congres international d'anthrop. et d'areheologie 
 
 prehist., 1868. 
 
 17. Brander. Proc. Roy. Soc. of Edinburgh, 1878-79. 
 
 239 
 
240 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 18. Broca. Rapport sur les caracteres physiques des Mineopies, 
 
 Bui. de la Soc. d'Anthrop., 1861. 
 
 19. Broca. Les Akkas, race pygmee de I'Afrique Centrale, Rev. 
 
 d'Anthrop., 1874. 
 
 20. Brooke,, Capel. Voyage en Suede, en Norvege, en Fin mark et 
 
 au Cap Nord. 
 
 21. Brooke, Capel. Trans, of the Ethnological Society, vol. v. 
 23. Buffon. Complete works. 
 
 23. Burnouf. Revue des Deux Mondes, 1864. 
 
 24. Buslc. Description of Two Andamanese Skulls, Trans. Ethnol. 
 
 Soc, new series, 1866. 
 
 25. Campbell. The Ethnology of India, Journal of the Asiat. Soc. 
 
 of Bengal, vol. xxv, part ii. 
 
 26. Castelnau. Revue de Philologie, 1876. 
 
 27. Du Chaillu. L'Afrique Sauvage. 
 
 28. Choris. Voyage pittoresque autour du Monde, book vii. 
 
 29. Clark, Hyde. Notes on the Languages of the Andamans, Jour. 
 
 Anth. Inst., vol. iv. 
 
 30. Colebrook. On the Andaman Islands, Asiatic Researches, 
 
 vol. iv. 
 
 31. Comrie. Anthropological Notes on New Guinea, Jour. Anth. 
 
 Inst., vol. vi. 
 
 32. Cornalia. Lettre sur les Akkas de Miani, Archivio por I'Antrop., 
 
 etc., 1874. 
 
 33. Craivfurd. History of the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 34. Crawfurd. On the Malayan and Polynesian Languages and 
 
 Races, Journal of the Ethnol. Soc. of London, vol. i, 1848. 
 
 35. Ctesias. History of India. 
 
 36. Cunningham. Cited by Logan, Jour. Indian Archipelago, 
 
 vol. vii. 
 
 37. Cuvier. Le Regne animal. 
 
 38. Dalion. Descriptive Ethnology of Bengal. 
 
 39. Dapper. Description de la basse P3thiopie. 
 
 40. Day. Observations on the Andamanese, Proo. Asiat. Soc. of" 
 
 Bengal, 1870. 
 
 41. Distant. Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. viii. 
 
 42. Dohson. Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. iv. 
 
 43. Duheux and Valmont. La Tartaric. 
 
 44. Dumeril and Bibron. Histoire naturelle des Reptiles, vol. iii. 
 
 45. Earl. The Papuans. 
 
 46. Bulletin de I'Institut ijgyptien, 1873-'74. 
 
APPENDIX A. 241 
 
 47. Ullis. Report of Researches into the Language of the South 
 
 Andaman Island, from the papers of E. H. Man, appendix to 
 Man's book. 
 
 48. ElpMnston. Aboriginal Inhabitants of the Soil. 
 
 49 Feilden. Notes on Stone Implements from South Africa, Jour. 
 Anth. Inst., vol. viii. 
 
 50. Fichte. On Certain Aborigines of the Andaman Islands, Trans. 
 
 Ethnol. Soc, new series, vol. v. 
 
 51. Flower. On the Osteology and Affinities of the Natives of the 
 
 Andaman Islands, Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. ix. 
 
 52. Flower. Stature of the Andamanese (making known Brander's 
 
 work), Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. x. 
 
 53. Flower. Additional Observations on the Osteology of the Na- 
 
 tives of the Andaman Islands, Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. xiv. 
 
 54. Fryer. A Pew Words concerning the Wild People inhabiting 
 
 the Forests of the Cochin State, Jour, of the Royal Asiat. Soc. 
 of Great Britain and Ireland, second series, vol. iii. 
 
 55. Fychte. Trans, of the Ethnological Society, vol. v. Cf . No. 50- 
 
 56. Oaussin. Traditions religieuses de la Polynesie, ToUr du 
 
 Monde. 
 
 57. Congres international des Sciences Oeographiques, vol i. 
 
 58. La Gazette Geographique, 1887. 
 
 59. Giglioli. Viaggio intorno al globo della pirocorvetta Italiana 
 
 Magenta. 
 
 60. Giglioli. Studi suUa razza negrita, Archivio por I'Antrop. e la 
 
 Btnol., vol. V. 
 
 61. Giglioli. Nuove notizie sui popoli negroidi dell'Asia e special- 
 
 mente sui Negriti, Archivio por I'Antrop., etc., vol. ix. 
 G2. Giglioli. Gli Akka viventi in Italia, Archivio por I'Antrop., 
 etc., vol. X. 
 
 63. Giglioli. Alteriori notizie intorno ai Negriti ; gli Akka viventi 
 
 en Italia, Archivio por I'Athrop., etc., vol. i. 
 
 64. la Gironiere. Vingt annees aiix Philippines, 1853. 
 
 65. Gooch. The Stone Age in South Africa, Jour. Anth. Inst., 
 
 vol. xi. 
 
 66. Grey. Polynesian Mythology. 
 
 67. Hahn. Tsdi-goam, the Supreme Being of the Koi-Koi, 1881. 
 
 68. ffamy. La Nature, 1876, February 12th. 
 
 69. Mamy. Documents pour servir h. I'anthropologie de I'ile de 
 
 Timor, Nouvelles Archives du Mus. d'histoire naturelle de 
 Paris, vol. x. 
 
242 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 70. Hamy. Rapport sur I'anthropologie du C'ambodge, Bill, de la 
 
 Soc. d'Anth. de Paris, vol. vi. 
 
 71. Hamy. Sur les races sauvages de la peninsula malaise et en par- 
 
 tioulier sur les Jakuns, Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth. de Paris, sec- 
 ond series, vol. ix. 
 73. Hamy. Les Negritos a Borneo, Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth. de Paris, 
 second series, vol. xi. 
 
 73. Hamy. Note sur I'existence de Negres hraohycephales sur la 
 
 cote oocidentale d'Afrique, Bui. de la Soo. d'Anth., second 
 series, vol. vii. 
 
 74. Hamy. Essai de co-ordination des materiaux recemment re- 
 
 cueilles sur I'anthropologie des Negrilles ou Pygmees de 
 I'Afrique equatoriale, Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., 1879. 
 
 75. Hartmann. Die Negritier. 
 
 76. Heber. Travels in India, cited by Pritohard. 
 
 77. Hodgson. Jour. Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, vol. xxv. 
 
 78. Huxley, T. H. On Two widely Contrasted' Forms of the Hu- 
 
 man Cranium, Jour, of Anat. and Physiol., vol. i. 
 
 79. Journal of Anthropological Institute, vol. xi. 
 
 80. Kolbe. Description du Cap de Bonne Bsperance, in Walekenaer. 
 
 81. Lafonde. Jour, de I'lnstitut historique. 
 
 83. Laglaise. La Papouasie ou Nouvelle Guinee oocidentale, cited 
 in this work by Meyners d'Bstrey. 
 
 83. Lane-Fox. On Mr. Man's Collection of Andamanese and Nico- 
 
 barese Objects, Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. vii. 
 
 84. de Langle, Fleuriot. Croisieres k la cote d'Afrique, 1868. 
 
 85. Latham. Descriptive Ethnology, vol. ii. 
 
 86. Latham. Elements of Comparative Philology. 
 
 87. Latham. The Native Races of the Russian Empire. 
 
 88. de Lauti/re. Bui. de la Soc. de Geographic, fourth series, vol. xii. 
 
 89. de Lauture. Comptes rendus de I'Academie des Sciences, 1856. 
 
 90. Lawes, W. G. Ethnological Notes on the Motu, Koitapu, and 
 
 Koiari, tribes of New Guinea, Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. viii. 
 
 91. Livingstone. Explorations in South Africa. 
 
 93. Logan. The Orang Binua of Johore, Jour, of the Indian Archi- 
 pelago, vol. i. 
 
 93. Logan. The Binua of Johore. 
 
 94. Logan. The Ethnology of the Indian Archipelago, Jour, of the 
 
 Indian Archipelago, vol. iv. 
 
 95. Logan. Ethnology of Eastern Asia and the Indo- Pacific 
 
 Islands, Jour. Indian Arch., vol. iv. 
 
APPENDIX A. 243 
 
 9G. Logan. Ethnology of the Indo-Paoific Islands, Jour. Indian 
 Arch., vol. vli. 
 
 97. Logan. Physical Characteristics of the Mintira, Jour. Indian 
 
 Arch., vol. i. 
 
 98. Dialects of the Melanesian Tribes of the Malay Peninsula, Jour. 
 
 of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiat. Soc. 
 
 99. ChailU Long Bey, Central Africa. 
 
 100. ChailU Long Bey. Voyage au Lac Victoria Nyanza et au pays 
 
 des Niams-Niams, Bui. de la Soc. de Geog., sixth series, vol. x. 
 
 101. Man. On the Aboriginal Inhabitants of the Andaman Islands, 
 
 Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. vii, and in reprinted form. 
 103. Man. Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. xi. 
 
 103. Mantegazza. Studi antropologiei ed etnografioi sulla Nuova 
 
 Guinea, Archivio por I'Antrop., etc., vol. vii, 1877. 
 
 104. Mantegazza. Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth. de Paris, third series, 
 
 vol. iii, 1880. 
 
 105. Mantegazza. Nuovi studi craniologici sulla Nuova Guinea, 
 
 Archivio por I'Antrop., etc., vol. xi, 1881. 
 
 106. Mantegazza and Zanneiti. I due Akka del Miani, Archivio 
 
 por I'Antrop., etc., 1874. 
 
 107. Marche. Trois voyages dans I'Afrique ooeidentale. 
 
 108. Mariner. An Account of the Natives of Tonga Island. 
 
 109. Marno. Mittheilungen der Authrop. Gesel. in Wien, Bd. v. 
 
 110. Masson. Narrative of Various Journeys in Beluchistan, Af- 
 
 ghanistan, and the Penjab, cited in L'Univers. 
 
 111. Maury. Histoire de la religion de la Greoe antique, 1859. 
 113. Maury. La Terre et I'Homme, fifth edition. 
 
 113. Meyer. Die Philippinen und ihre Bewohner. 
 
 114. Meyer. Ueber hundert funf und dreissig Papua Schadel von 
 
 Neu Guinea und der Insel Mysore, Mittheil. aus dem Kais. 
 zool. Mus. zu Dresden, Bd. i, 1875. 
 
 115. Meyer. Anthropologische Mittheilungen iiberdie Papuas von 
 
 Neu Guinea, mit der anth. Gesel. in Wien, Bd. iv, 1874. 
 
 116. Micluho-Maclay. Ethnologische Excursionen in der Malay- 
 
 ischen Halbinsel, Archivio por I'antropologia e la etnolog., 
 vol. ix. 
 
 117. Moffat. Twenty-three Years in South Africa. 
 
 118. de Mofras. Exploration du Territoire de I'Oregon, des Califor- 
 
 nies et de la mer Vermeille, 1844. 
 
 119. Mollien. Voyage dans I'interieur de I'Afrique, aux sources du 
 
 Senegal et de la Senegambie. 
 
2i4: THE PYQiMIES. 
 
 120. Montana. Revue d'Ethnographie, vol. i. (See No. 121.) 
 
 121. Montana. Quelques jours chez les indigenes de la Province de 
 
 Malacca, Revue d'Ethnog., vol. i. 
 
 132. Montana. Voyages aux Philippines et en Malaisie. 
 
 123. Morenhout. Voyage aux lies du Grand Ocean (in Tour du 
 
 Monde). 
 
 124. Mouat. A Narrative of an Expedition to the Andaman Islands 
 
 in 1857. 
 135. Mouat. Adventures and Researches among the Andaman 
 Islands, 1863. 
 
 126. Mouat. Selection of the Records of the Government of India, 
 
 No. XXV, the Andaman Islands. 
 
 127. Mouat. A Pew Notes on Some Skulls of the Hill Tribes of 
 
 India, Trans. Ethnol. Soc, vol. vi. 
 
 128. Miiller, Max. Essays upon Comparative Mythology. 
 
 129. Bulletin de la Sooiete Normande de Geographie, 1886. 
 
 130. Owen. Oh the Osteology and Dentition of the Aborigines of 
 
 the Andaman Islands, Trans. Ethnol. Soc, new series, vol. ii. 
 
 131. Owen. On the Psychical and Physical Characters of the Min- 
 
 oopies or Natives of the Andaman Islands, Brit. Assoc. Rept., 
 1861. 
 
 133. Owen. Exaraen des deux NSgres pygmees de la tribes de 
 
 Akkas ramenes par Miani du fleuve Gabon., Bui. de la Soc. 
 d'Anth., 1874, with remarks by Brooa, Hamy, and De Quatre- 
 
 133. Panizza. Sur les Akkas, Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., 1874. 
 
 134. Pavie. Les heros pieux, les Pandavas, Revue des Deux 
 
 Mondes, 1857. 
 
 135. Pauthier. La Chine. 
 
 136. lePagedu Pratz. Histoire de la Louisiane, 1758. 
 
 137. Pickering. The Races of Men, edition of 1851. 
 
 138. Pliny. Histoire naturelle. 
 
 139. Pritchard. Researches into the Physical History of Mankind. 
 
 140. Pruner Bey. Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., 1866. 
 
 141. de Quatrefages. Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., vol. i, 1860. 
 
 143. de Quatrefages. Cours d'Anthrop. du Museum ; Negres asia- 
 tiques et melanesiens, Gazette medicale de Paris, 1862. 
 
 143. de Quatrefages, Rapports sur les progres de I'Anthropologie, 
 
 1867. 
 
 144. de Quatrefages. Jour, des Savants, 1879. 
 
 145. de Quatrefages. Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., 1881. 
 
APPENDIX A. 245 
 
 146. de Quairefages. Rapport sur le cononurs du prix Godard, 
 
 Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., second series, vol. iv. 
 
 147. de Quairefages. Bui. de la Soo. d'acclimatation. 
 
 148. de Quairefages. Etudes sur les Minoopies et sur le race ne- 
 
 grito en general, Revue d'Anthrop., vol. i. 
 
 149. de Quairefages. Note sur un Negrito de I'lnde centrale, Bui. de 
 
 la Soc. d'Anth., second series, vol. vii. 
 
 150. de Quairefages. Nouvelles Etudes sur la distribution geogra- 
 
 phique des Negritos et sur leur identificadon avec les Pyg- 
 mees asiatiques de Ctesias et de Pline. 
 
 151. de Quairefages. Thenay et les lies Andaman, materiaux pour 
 
 I'hist. nat. et prim, de I'homme, third series, vol. ii. 
 153. de Quairefages. Tableau des races de I'lnde centrale. Revue 
 d'Anthrop., vol. i. 
 
 153. de Quairefages. Observations sur les races naines Africaines 
 
 a propos des Akkas, Bui. de la Soo. d'Anth., 1874; also 
 Comptes rendus de I'Academie des sciences, 1874. 
 
 154. de Quairefages. Les Polynesiens et leurs migrations. 
 
 155. de Quairefages. Hommes fossiles et hommes sauvages. 
 
 156. de Quairefages. Introduction a I'etiide des races humaines, 
 
 1887. 
 
 157. de Quairefages and Hamy. Crania ethnica. 
 
 158. Quellien. Revue d'Ethnographie, vol. iv. 
 
 159. Queielei. Anthropometrie. 
 
 160. Baffles and Grawfurd. Description of Java. 
 
 161. Relaiion des voyages faits par les Arabes et les Persans dans 
 
 rinde et la Chine dans le IX' siecle de I'ere chretienne, 1849. 
 
 162. Rienzi. Oceanic. 
 
 163. Rousselei. Essai d'une carte ethnologique de I'lnde centrale. 
 
 164. Rousselei. Tableau des races d'Inde centrale, Revue d'An- 
 
 throp., vol. ii. 
 
 165. Rousselei. Note sur un Ho autochtone des forets de I'lnde cen- 
 
 trale, Revue d'Anth., vol. i ; also Bui. de la Soc. d'Anth., 
 second series, vol. vii. 
 
 166. Saint-Denis. Memoire sur le pays connu des anciens Chinois 
 
 sous le notn de Pou Sang, Comptes rendus des seances de 
 I'Academie des inscriptions et belles-lettres, 1876. 
 
 167. Saint-John. Notes on the Andaman Islands (arranged by Sir 
 
 Bd-sv. Belcher), Trans, of the Ethnol. Soc, new series, vol. v. 
 
 168. de Saint-Pol Lias. Sur le riviere Pluss, interieur de le pres- 
 
 qu'ile malaise, La Nouvelle Revue, 1883. 
 
246 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 169. Samuells. Jour. Asiat. Soo. of Bengal, vol. vii. 
 
 170. Sanderson. Notes in conneetion with stone implements from 
 
 Natal, Jour. Anth. Inst., Tol. viii. 
 
 171. Schmidt, George. Cited by Hahn. 
 
 172. Schweinfurth. In the Heart of Africa. 
 
 173. Semper. Die Philippinen und ihre Bewohner. 
 
 174. Smith, Hamilton. The Natural History of the Human Species. 
 
 175. Snelgrave. Relation de quelques parties de la Guinee in 
 
 Walokenaer, vol. viii. 
 
 176. Speke. Source of the Nile. 
 
 177. Stanley. Through the Dark Continent. 
 
 178. StoliezJca. Note on the Kjoekkenmoeddings of the Andaman 
 
 Islands, Proc. Asiat. See. of Bengal, 1870. 
 
 179. Symes. Relation de I'ambassade anglaise envoyee en 1795, 
 
 dans la royaume d'Ava. 
 
 180. Touchard. Notice sur le Gabon, Revue maritime et coloniale, 
 
 vol. iii. 
 
 181. Leschenault de la Tour. Relation abregee d'un voyage aux 
 
 Indes orientales, Mems. du Mus. d'hist. nat., vol. xi. 
 
 182. Traill. Statistical Sketch of Kamaon, Asiatic Researches, 
 
 vol. xvi. 
 
 183. Valentyn. Cited by Hahn. 
 
 184. Bibliotheque universelle des Voyages, vol. xxi. 
 
 185. Walckenaer. Histoire geuerale des voyages. 
 
 186. Wallace (cited by Lane-Pox). Jour. Anth. Inst., vol. vii. 
 
 187. Zannetti. Gli Akka del Miani, Arohivio por I'Antrop., etc., 
 
 1874. 
 
 188. Zeitsehrift fur Ethnologie, 1874. 
 
APPENDIX B. 
 
 Various articles relative to the little races discussed in 
 this book have appeared recently. References to the more 
 important are given below. These are mainly taken from 
 Prof. Mason's bibliographic lists : 
 
 Bartels, M. Beitrag zur Volksmediein der Kaffern und Hottentot- 
 ten, Verhandl. d. Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., Berl., 1893, vol. xxv, 
 133-135. 
 
 Bertin, O. The Bushmen and their Language, Jour. Koyal Asiat. 
 Soc, vol. xviii, 51-81. 
 
 le Clerc, Max. Les pygmees a Madagascar, Revue d'ethnog., Paris, 
 vol. vi, 333-335. 
 
 JJeniJcer, J. Les Hottentots au Jardin d'aeclimatation, Revue d'an- 
 throp., Paris, third series, vol. iv, 1-27. 
 
 F., J. Chimpanzees and Dwarf in Central Africa, Nature, London, 
 vol. xlii, 296. 
 
 Mower, W. S. Description of Two Skeletons of Akkas, a Pygmy 
 Race from Central Africa, Jour. Anth. Inst., London, vol. xviii, 
 8-19, 73-91. 
 
 Flower, W. M. The Pygmy Races of Men., Proc. Royal Inst. Great 
 Britain, London, vol. xii, 266-383. 
 
 Gillet de Orandmoni. Le steatopygie des Hottentots du Jardin 
 d'aeclimatation, Revue d'anth., Paris, third series, vol. iv, 
 194-199. 
 
 Hdlibv/rton, B. G. The Dwarfs of the Atlas Mountains, London 
 (David Nutt), 41 pp., 8vo. 
 
 Laborde, M. Etude experimentale sur les poisons de fleohe des Ne- 
 gritos (Sakayes) de la presqu'ile malaise, Bui. Soc. d'anth., 
 Paris, vol. xi, 194-196. 
 
 Lombroso, C. Ueber ein neues Muttersohaftsorgan und liber das 
 18 24? 
 
248 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Beoken des Hottentottenweibes, Wien. med. Wochenschr., xliii, 
 
 741, 786. 
 Ploix, C. Les Hottentots, ou Khoi-Khoi et leur religion, Revue 
 
 d'anth., 1887, 570-589 ; 1888, 370-289. 
 Sehils, &. Le race jaune de I'Afrique Australe, Le Museon, Louvain, 
 
 vol. vi, 334-331 ; 339-349. 
 Schlichter, Henry. The Pygmy Tribes of Africa, Scot. Geog. Mag., 
 
 Edinburgh, vol. viii, 389-301. 
 Sievers. Die ZwergvOlker in Afrika, Verhandl. der Oberhess., Ge- 
 
 sellsch. f. Nat. u. Heilk., Giessen, vol. xxviii, 114-117. 
 Stanley, Henry M. In Darkest Africa, 3 vols ; see indices for scat- 
 tered references to pygmies. 
 Stanley, Henry M, Les Pygmees de I'Afrique Centrale (extract). 
 
 Nature, Paris, vol. xviii, part ii, 67-69. 
 Topinard, P. La steatopygie des Hottentots du Jardin d'accli- 
 
 matation, Revue d'anth., Paris, third series, vol. iv, 194-199 ; 
 
 249-253. 
 Topinard, P. Presentation de quatre Boshimans vivants, Archiv 
 
 fur Anth., Braunschweig, vol. xviii, 387. 
 Werner, A. The African Pygmies, Pop. Sci. Monthly, New York, 
 
 vol. xxxvii, 658-671. 
 
APPENDIX C. 
 
 Stanley has not contributed so much to our real 
 knowledge of African pygmies as might have been ex- 
 pected. He gives some measurements, taken upon five 
 individuals, which are here reproduced for comparison : 
 
 Measurements taken Try Dr. Emin on Some Ahlcas 
 in Stanley^ s Company.'' 
 
 Name. 
 
 Height standing 
 
 Height to shoulder 
 
 Height to navel 
 
 Arm length, shoulder to finger 
 
 tip 
 
 Breadth between shoulders. . . 
 Circumference below nipples . 
 Circumference under armpits. 
 
 Length of head 
 
 Breadth of head 
 
 Breadth of nose 
 
 Circumference of skull 
 
 Length of foot 
 
 Tokbali, 
 
 Girl, 
 
 Woman, 
 
 ao years. 
 
 1.5 years. 
 
 35 years. 
 
 I'l'seo 
 
 1T340 
 
 1°365 
 
 1-"116 
 
 1"021 
 
 l^llO 
 
 0T835 
 
 0?735 
 
 0»785 
 
 0?707 
 
 0°571 
 
 Qi'SSO 
 
 O^SSO 
 
 0T304 
 
 0°29.5 
 
 0T710 
 
 o-peeo 
 
 0"'710 
 
 0"730 
 
 OTceo 
 
 0T710 
 
 0»300 
 
 0'?176 
 
 0'?180 
 
 0"147 
 
 0"150 
 
 0T145 
 
 0"060 
 
 oro60+ 
 
 0"065 
 
 0T530 
 
 O-PSSS 
 
 O'T'SIO 
 
 0»330 + 
 
 O^lSO 
 
 0?313 
 
 Boy, 
 15 years. 
 
 11'380 
 1T090 
 OT970 
 
 0"540 
 0»260 
 0'?640 
 
 o-^eso 
 
 0"175 
 O^UO 
 O'T'OCS 
 0"510 
 O-TIEO 
 
 Bodies covered with stiffish grey, short hair. 
 
 Measurement was also made upon a pygmy about 
 twenty-one years old captured at Avatiko (see In Darkest 
 Africa, vol. ii, p. 40). The figures recorded by Mr. Bonny 
 are: Height, 4 feet; head circumference, 30 J inches; 
 
 * In Darkest Africa, vol. ii, p. 164, note. 
 249 
 
250 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 from chin to top of head, 24^ mches ; circumference of 
 chest, 25^ inches ; of abdomen, 27f inches ; of hips, 22|^ 
 inches ; of wrist, 4^ inches ; of muscle of left arm, ?|- 
 inches ; of ankle, 7 inches ; of calf of leg, 7f inches ; 
 length of index finger, 2 inches ; of right hand, 4 inches ; 
 of foot, 6i inches ; of leg, 22 inches ; of back, 18^ inches ; 
 of arm to tip of finger, 19f inches. 
 
INDEX, 
 
 Adoption among the Mincopiea, 101. 
 
 Aetas, arms, 157 ; clothing and shel- 
 ter, 156; marriage, 152; measure- 
 ments, 64 ; physical characters, 
 IS. 
 
 Akayaba, custom of the Mincopies, 
 103. 
 
 Akkas, hrought to Europe, 175 ; 
 color, 178; discovered by Sohwein- 
 furth, 3 ; home, 173 ; known to the 
 Egyptians, 16 ; physiological char- 
 acters, 181 et seg. ; prominent abdo- 
 men, 179 ; stature, 177. 
 
 Akoas, 165, 
 
 d' Albertis, description of a Negrito, 
 29 ; Negrito type, 60. 
 
 Amuck among the Mincopies, 105, 
 
 Ancestor worship among the Hot- 
 tentots, 228. 
 
 Andaman Islands, 63, 72 ; languages, 
 94. 
 
 Anderson, description of a Negrito, 
 31. 
 
 Animal worship by Bushmen, 202; 
 by Hottentots, 222. 
 
 Annam, hlack tribes of, 36. 
 
 Aristotle, on home of the pyg- 
 mies, 2. 
 
 Astronomy, Hottentot myths con- 
 nected with, 221. 
 
 n'AvANOHEES, Leon, on the Negril- 
 los, 171. 
 
 Bandra-Loks, 10; ethnologic af- 
 finity, 38, 69. 
 
 Batotjas, 68. 
 
 Battel, Andrew, on pygmies at 
 Cape Negro, 164. 
 
 Becoaki, Negritos in New Guinea, 28. 
 
 Belcher, Sir Edward, marriage 
 among the Mincopies, 99. 
 
 Belutohis, a people of India, 55. 
 
 Bhils, stature of, 42. 
 
 BiNOHAS, a people in the Malay pe- 
 ninsula, 136. 
 
 Blair, Lieutenant, on the Minco- 
 pies, 105. 
 
 Boro-Boudour, bas-relief of, in Java, 
 26. 
 
 Bows of the Mincopies, 111. 
 
 Brahohis, a people of India, 9 ; de- 
 scription of, 55. 
 
 Brander, measurements of Minco- 
 pies, 65 ; intelligence of, 96. 
 
 Broca, arm proportions of Minco- 
 pies, 81. 
 
 Buefon, on pygmies of the an- 
 cients, 6. 
 
 Bushmen, language, 196; physical 
 characters, 190; stature, 67; wor- 
 ship of animals, 202. 
 
 Campbell, Justice, on aborigines of 
 India, 36 ; religious beliefs of the 
 Bushmen, 201. 
 
 Cannibalism among the Negritos, 
 155. 
 
 CiNCALLES, 12, 171. 
 
 CooRUMBAS, a Negrito people of the 
 Ganges basin, 40. 
 251 
 
.252 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Counting among the Mincopies, 95 i 
 Bushmen, 196. 
 
 Cbawfubd, description of the Ne- 
 grito-Papuans', 60. 
 
 Creation, ideas concerning, among 
 the Hottentots, 206; the Minco- 
 pies, 126. 
 
 Crossings, 48 et seq. 
 
 Ctesias, on pygmies of India, 9, 10. 
 
 Chtieb, opinion on the crocodiles of 
 the Niger and the Nile, 14. 
 
 Daltow, stature measurements, 70 ; 
 
 illustrations of Negritos, 37. 
 Diseases among the Mincopies, 85. 
 DoMs, a people of western India, 41. 
 Dka VIDIANS, extension of, 55 ; origin, 
 
 53, 93 ; stature, 42. 
 Dress and ornament among the 
 
 Mincopies, 119. 
 
 Eael, on the Negrito-Papuans, 61. 
 Elphinstone, on the Jauts, 54. 
 Ethiopians, Eastern and Oriental, 
 mentioned by Herodotus, 58. 
 
 Festivals of the Hottentots, 
 
 et 
 
 Fetiehism among the Bushmen, 202. 
 
 Fire among the Mincopies, 108 ; 
 among the Manthras of Malacca, 
 155. 
 
 Fleubiot de Langle, Admiral, de- 
 scription of an Akoa, 166. 
 
 Flowee, hair of the Mincopies, 77 ; 
 measurements of, 65 ; skulls of, 83 ; 
 original home of the Negroes, 185. 
 
 Funeral rites among the A§tas, 160 ; 
 Mincopies, 106 ; Negritos of Ma- 
 lacca, 160. 
 
 Gallas, 12. 
 
 Gama-gorib, a god of the Hottentots, 
 
 225. 
 Gaunab, a god of the Hottentots, 222 ; 
 
 origin of the name, 234. 
 Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire, opinion 
 
 on crocodiles of the Niger and the 
 Nile, 14. 
 
 Ghosts among Mincopies, 107, 129. 
 
 LA GiBONiEBE, Fatheb, funcral rites 
 among the Aetas, 160; marriage, 
 152 ; religion, 158. 
 
 Good and evil recognised by Bush- 
 men, 202 ; by .Hottentots, 224. 
 
 Guardian of youth among the Min- 
 copies, 99. 
 
 Gurub (the thunder), a Hottentot 
 god, 218. 
 
 Hahn, on the Hottentots, 194, 200 ; 
 chants of, 209, 219; gods, 205; 
 legends, 213 et seq, ; mythological 
 theory concerning, 233 ; summary 
 of religious beliefs, 236. 
 
 Hamy, on the Negrillos, 19, 167. 
 
 Hares, in Hottentot legends, 214, 217. 
 
 Heitsi-eibib, a god of the Hottentots, 
 212. 
 
 Heeodotus, on a small Libyan peo- 
 ple, 12 ; on the Ethiopians, 58. 
 
 Home, Evebabd, description of the 
 Negrito-Papuans, 61. 
 
 Homer, home of the pygmies, 1, 2. 
 
 Hospitality among the Mincopies, 
 104. 
 
 Hottentots, astronomical myths, 
 221; belief in future life, 226; 
 beneficent gods of, 205, 212, 218, 
 220 ; chants, 209, 219 ; doctors, 203 ; 
 evil gods, 222; language, 196; 
 legends, 213, 226 ; migrations, 197 ; 
 moon worship, 217 ; physical and 
 other characters, 189, 194; priests, 
 203, 2.31; religious beliefs, 199; 
 sorcerers, 231 ; superstitions, 232. 
 
 Jacts, a people of India, 54. 
 
 Kabons, or Karonis, a people of 
 
 New Guinea, 28. 
 Khara, Khab (the moon), 216. 
 KhoI'-Khoi. See Hottentots. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 263 
 
 Kholes, or CooLEES, peoples of India, 
 56. 
 
 Kjoekkenmoeddings of the Anda- 
 man Islands, 117. 
 
 KoLABi, a Negrito people, 30. 
 
 KoLBE, on the Hottentots, 203 ; wor- 
 ship of evil gods, 222. 
 
 Laplanders, stature of, 67. 
 
 Latham,- on crosses of the Negritos 
 in India, 50. 
 
 Livingstone, Hottentots' belief in 
 God, 200 ; cattle of the Hottentots, 
 197. 
 
 Logan, funeral rites of the Negritos 
 of Malacca, 160 ; on the Binouas, 
 136, 146 ; original home of the 
 Negroes, 185 ; Shamanism, 159. 
 
 Maget, Db., on Negritos in Japan, 
 27. 
 
 Mallas, or Mazb-Malleas, 12, 172. 
 
 Man, acquaintance with the Minco- 
 pies, 90 ; courage of, 123 ; food, 
 121 ; measurements, 65 ; on prop- 
 erty among, 104; religious ideas, 
 124 ; stone tools, 114 et seq. 
 
 Manthkas, a people of Malacca, 146, 
 151; huts of, 156. 
 
 Marche, measurements of Aetas, 64 ; 
 of the Negritos of Malacca, 67 ; 
 stature of the Negrillos, 168. 
 
 Marriage among the Aetas, 152 ; the 
 Mincopies, 98. 
 
 Mabbt, 5. 
 
 Meter, on the eastern blacks, 28; 
 Negritos of New Guinea, 60. 
 
 MiANi, an African traveller, 175. 
 
 Micluko-Maclay, measurements of 
 the Negritos of Malacca, 67. 
 
 Mincopies, 46 ; ability to count, -95 ; 
 belief in future life, 129 ; compared 
 with Negroes, 78 ; with Aetas, 79 ; 
 demons, 126 ; description ot, 75 ; 
 dress and ornament, 119; food, 
 121 ; funeral rites, 106 ; hair, 77 ; 
 
 hospitality, 104; ideas of sin, 122 ; 
 of creation, 131 ; industries, 108 ; 
 language, 90; measurements, 65; 
 naming children, 102; physical 
 similarity, 74; physiological char- 
 acters, 84 et seq.; property, 104; 
 shamans, 184 ; tribes, 97 ; utensils, 
 bearing on Tertiary man, 112 et 
 seq. 
 Mindanao., Negritos of, 158. 
 Modesty among the Mincopies, 99, 
 
 160. 
 Mohammedanism, advent in Malay- 
 sia, 52. 
 Mois, Negritos of the Annamitic 
 
 peninsula, 35. 
 MoLLiEN, on the Negrillos, 169. 
 Monogamy among the Mincopies, 99, 
 MoNTANo, character of the Negritos, 
 162 ; funeral rites among the Man- 
 thras, 160; language of the Negri- 
 tos, 144 et seq.; measurements of 
 the Aetas, 64 ; of the Negritos of 
 Malacca, 67 ; social condition of 
 the Negritos of the Philippines, 
 149 ; of the Negritos of Mindanao, 
 153. 
 MouAT, character of the Mincopies, 
 
 162; use of lire, 109. 
 Music among the Mincopies, 109. 
 Mythology of the Hottentots, 205 
 
 Nabas (the lightning), a Hottentot 
 god, 218. 
 
 Names among Hottentots, 195; Min- 
 copies, 102. 
 
 Nanub (the atorm-cloud), a Hotten- 
 tot god, 218. 
 
 Nasamones, explorations in Libya, 
 12 e< seq. 
 
 Necklaces of human bones, 107. 
 
 Negrillos, 19; centres of popula- 
 tion, 169; early notices of, 164; 
 original extension, 184; stature, 67, 
 168, 171. 
 
254 
 
 THE PYGMIES. 
 
 Negritos, belief in future life, 159 ; 
 cannibalism, 155 ; cause of etface- 
 ment in India, 53, 69 ; continental 
 group, 31 ; crossings, 29, 33, 49, 68 ; 
 descriptions, 32, 45; extension of 
 insular group, 25 ; general charac- 
 ter, 162 ; home, 24, 59 ; Industries, 
 loo ; language, 144 ; limit, 30 ; 
 measurements, 64 ; photographs, 
 70 ; physical characters, 20 ; pres- 
 ence in Annamitic peninsula, 35 ; 
 in Bengal, 40 ; in Gangetic penin- 
 sula, 36 ; in Japan, 21 ; religion, 158 ; 
 skill as sailors, 48 ; skull charac- 
 ters, 39 ; social condition, 148 ; two 
 groups, 24. 
 
 Negrito branch of eastern blacks, 18. 
 
 Negbito-Papuans, centre of popula- 
 tion in New Guinea, 46 ; confused 
 with true Papuans, 62 ; description, 
 60 ; limited to pelagic areas, 47. 
 
 Negboes, centre of dispersion, 51. 
 
 Niger, discovery and course of, 13 
 
 Oriental and Occidental Negri- 
 tos, 45 ; separation, 46. 
 
 Original home of mankind, 186. 
 
 Owen, Eichard, on a submerged 
 continent, 47. 
 
 Papuan branch of eastern blacks, 18. 
 
 Papuans, characters of, 20; home, 
 22. 
 
 Phthisis among the Mincopies, 85. 
 
 Pliny, on the home of the pyg- 
 mies, 4. 
 
 Poisoned arrows, 157. 
 
 Polynesia, languages of, 94. 
 
 PoMPONius Mela, on the home of 
 the pygmies, 11. 
 
 Pottery among the Mincopies, 111. 
 
 PoHGET, Father, on the language of 
 the Negritos of Malacca, 146. 
 
 Priests among the Hottentots, 203, 
 231. 
 
 Promiscuity among the Mincopies, 
 
 99. 
 Property among the Mincopies, 104 ; 
 
 among the Negritos of Mindanao, 
 
 153. 
 Peosians, pygmies in the mountains 
 
 of the, 8. 
 Puluga, the god of the Mincopies, 
 
 121, 124. 
 Puttouas, stature of, 70. 
 
 Eama, an Aryan hero, 52. 
 Keligious ideas of the Bushmen and 
 
 Hottentots, 196 ; of the Mincopies, 
 
 130 et seq. 
 KouLiN, on the home of the pygmies, 
 
 7,8. 
 Kousselet, on the Negritos, 69. 
 
 Saint-John, Lieutenakt, on the re- 
 ligious ideas of the Mincopies, 128. 
 
 DE Saint-Pol, description of the 
 Sakaies, 80. 
 
 Sakaies, clothing, 156 ; description 
 of, 76 ; photographs, 32. 
 
 San. See Bushmen. 
 
 ScHWEiNFURTH discovers the Akkas, 
 3, 173 ; on the shape of the head 
 of the Akkas, 178. 
 
 Semangs, a people of the Malacca 
 peninsula, 31 ; stature, 43. 
 
 Senses, acuteness of, in Mincopies, 
 84. 
 
 Shamans among Binouas, 137 ; Min- 
 copies, 134 ; other peoples, 140, ] 59. 
 
 Smith, Hamilton, Negroes in south- 
 ern Asia, 57. 
 
 Sorcerers among the Hottentots, 231. 
 
 Stokoe, Lieutenant, worship among 
 Mincopies, 128. 
 
 Stoliozka, Dr., on Kjoekkenmoed- 
 dings of the Andaman Islands, 
 117. 
 
 Stone tools among Mincopies, 113 
 et seq. 
 
 Storks, wars of pygmies with, 2, 4. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 255 
 
 Superstitions associated with reli- 
 gious ideas, 142 ; among Hotten- 
 tots, 232. 
 
 Syphilis among Mincopies, 85. 
 
 Taboo among Mincopies, -103, 121. 
 Tattooing among Mincopies, 120. 
 Temple, on the language of Min- 
 copies, 92. 
 Tertiary man, 112, 118. 
 Thenay, 118. 
 
 Trispithames, 5. 
 
 Tsui-goa, a god of the Hottentots, 
 205 ; origin of the name, 234. 
 
 vouatouas, 170. 
 
 Wa-Beekikimos, 12, 171. 
 
 W ars among Mincopies, 105. 
 
 Wolff, Dr., on the Batouas, 171 ; on 
 stature of Bushmen, 67. 
 
 "Women, influence of, among the Hot- 
 tentots, 195. 
 
 THE END. 
 
D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 P 
 
 IV\ 
 
 POPULAR ASTRONOMY : A General Description 
 of the Heavens. By Camille Flammarion. Translated from 
 the French by J. Ellard Gore, F. R. A.S. With 3 Plates 
 and 288 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, $4.50. 
 
 " M. Camille Flammarion is the most popular scientific writer in France. 
 Of the present work no fewer than one hundred thousand copies were sold 
 in a few years. It was considered of such merit that the Montyon Prize of 
 the French Academy was awarded to it. The subject is treated in a very 
 popular style, and the work is at the same time interesting and reliable. It 
 should be found very useful by those who wish to acquire a good general 
 knowledge of astronomy without going too deeply into the science." — From 
 Translator's Preface. 
 
 OMAN S SHARE IN RRIMITIVE CUL- 
 TURE. By Otis Tufton Mason, A.M., Curator of the 
 Department of Ethnology in the United States National Mu- 
 seum. With numerous Illustrations. i2mo. Cloth, $1.75. 
 
 This is the first volume in the Anthropological Series, edited by 
 Prof. Frederick Starr, of the University of Chicago. The series is under- 
 taken in the hope that anthropology — the science of man— may become 
 betterknown to intelligent readers. While the books are intended to be of 
 general interest, they will in every case be written by authorities who will 
 not sacrifice scientific accuracy to popularity. In the present volume is 
 traced the interesting period when with fire-making began the first division 
 of labor — a division of labor based upon sex — the man going to the field or 
 forest for game, while the woman at the fireside became the burden-bearer, 
 basket-maker, weaver, potter, agriculturist, and domesticator of animals. 
 
 ^HE FARMER'S BOY. By Clifton Johnson, 
 
 ■*■ author of ' ' The Country School in New England," etc. With 
 64 Illustrations by the author. 8vo. Cloth, $2.50. 
 
 The memories of the farm which are cherished by so many dwellers in 
 cities are preserved in this delightful volume in tangible form. Mr. Johnson 
 follows the work and play of farm life through the seasons, illustrating its 
 quaint and picturesque features, and presenting a volume which has, among 
 other merits, that of a truthful history of life. 
 
 ^ONGS OF THE SOIL. By Frank L. Stanton. 
 
 »^ With a Preface by Joel Chandler Harris. i6mo. Cloth, 
 
 gilt top, uncut, $1.50. 
 
 " Here is one with the dew of morning in his hair, who looks on life and 
 the promise thereof and finds the prospect joyous. Whereupon he lifts up 
 his voice and speaks to the heart : and lo I here is Love, with nimble feet 
 and sparkling eyes ; and here is Hope, fresh risen from 'his sleep ; and here 
 is Life made beautiful again."— Joel Chandler Harris. 
 
 New York : D. APPLETON & CO., 72 Fifth Avenue. 
 
/ 
 
 D, APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 'DLE DAYS IN PATAGONIA, By W. H. Hud- 
 son, C. M. Z. S., author of " The Naturalist in La Plata/' etc. 
 
 With 27 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, $4.cx). 
 
 "Of all modern books of travel it is certainly one of the most original, and many, 
 we are sure, will also find it one of the most interesting and suggestive." — Ne-w York 
 Tribune. 
 
 " Mr. Hudson's remarks on color and expression of eyes inman and animals are re- 
 served for a second chapter, 'Concerning Eyes.' He is eloquent upon the pleasures 
 afforded by ' Bird Music in South America,' and relates Eome romaniic tales of white 
 men in captivity to savages. But it makes very little difference what is the topic when 
 Mr. Hudson writes. He calls up bright images of things unseen, and is a thoroughly 
 agreeable companion." — Pkiladelphia Ledger 
 
 7-^IIE NATURALIST IN LA PLATA. By W. H. 
 Hudson, C. M. Z. S., author of " Idle Days in Patagonia,'' and 
 
 joint author of " Argentine Ornithology." With 27 Illustra- 
 tions. 8vo. Cloth, $4.00. 
 
 " Mr. Hudson is not only a clever naturalist, but he popsesses the rare gift of in- 
 teresting his readers in whatever attracts him, and of being dissatisfied with mere ob- 
 servation unless it enables him to philosophize as well. With his lucid accounts of 
 bird, beast, and insect, no one will fail to be dehghted." — Lofidcit Academy. 
 
 "A notably clear and interesting account of scientific observation and research. 
 Mr. Hudson has a keen eye for the pheiiomena with which the naturalist is concerned, 
 and a lucid and delightful way "of writing about them, so that any reader may be 
 charmed by the narrative and the reflections here set forth. It is easy to follow him, 
 and we get our information agreeably as he conducts us over the desert pampas, and 
 makes us acquainted with the results of his studies of animals, insects, and birds.'' — 
 New York Sun. 
 
 n^HE NATURALIST ON THE RIVER 
 -* A MAZONS. By Henry Walter Bates. F. R. S., late Assist- 
 ant Secretary of the Royal Geographical Society. With a 
 Memoir of the Author, by Edward Clodd. With Map and 
 numerous Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, $5.00. 
 *' This famous work is a natural history classic." — London Literary World. 
 " ^fo^e than thirty years have passed since the first appearance of 'The Naturalist 
 on the River Amazons,' which Darwin unhesitatingly pronounced the best book on 
 natural history which ever appeared in England. The work still retains its prime in- 
 terest, and in rereading it one can not but be impressed by the way in which the pro- 
 phetic theories, disputed and ridiculed at the time, have since been accepted. Such is 
 the common experience of those who keep a few paces in advance of their generation. 
 Bates was a ' born ' naturalist." — Philadelphia Ledger. 
 
 "No man was better prepared or gave himself up more thoroughly to the task of 
 studying an almost; unknown fauna, or showed a zeal more indefatigable in prosecuting 
 his researches, than Bates. As a collector alone his reputation would be second to 
 none, but there is a great deal more than sheer industry to be cited. The naturalist of 
 the Amazons '\%,par excellence, possessed of a happy literary style. He is always clear 
 and distinct. He tells of the wonders of tropical growth so that you can understand 
 them all." — New York Times. 
 
 New York : D. APPLETON & CO., 72 Fifth Avenue. 
 
D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 NEW EDITION OP PROP. HUXLEY'S ESSAYS. 
 
 COLLECTED ESSA YS. By Thomas H. Huxley. 
 New complete edition, with revisions, the Essays being grouped 
 according to general subject. In nine volumes, a new Intro- 
 duction accompanying each volume. i2mo. Cloth, $1.25 per 
 volume. 
 
 Vol. I.— method AND RESULTS. 
 
 Vol. II.— DARWINIANA. 
 
 Vol. III.— SCIENCE AND EDUCATION. 
 
 Vol. IV.— SCIENCE AND HEBREW TRADITION. 
 
 Vol. v.— SCIENCE AND CHRISTIAN TRADITION. 
 
 Vol. VI.— HUME. 
 
 Vol. VII.— MAN'S PLACE IN NATURE. 
 
 Vol. VIII.— DISCOURSES, BIOLOGICAL AND GEOLOGICAL. 
 
 Vol. IX.— EVOLUTION AND ETHICS, AND OTHER ESSAYS. 
 
 *'Mr. Huxley has covered a vast variety of topics during the last quarter of a 
 century. It gives one an agreeable surprise to luok over the tables ot contents and 
 note the immense territory which he has explored. To read these books carefully 
 and studiously is to become thoroughly acquainted with the most advanced thought 
 on a large number of topics." — Neiv York Herald. 
 
 " The series will be a welcome one. There are few writings on the more abstruse 
 problems of science better adapted to reading by the general public, and in this form 
 the books will be well in the reach of the investigator. . . . The revisions are the last 
 expected to be made by the author, and his introductions are none of earlier date 
 than a few months ago [1893!, so they may be considered his final and most authorita- 
 tive utterances." — Chicago Times. 
 
 " It was inevitable that his essays should be called for in a completed form, and they 
 will be a source of delight and profit to all who read them. He has always commanded 
 a hearing, and as a master of the literary style in writing scientific essays he is worthy 
 of a place among the great English essayists of the day. This edition of his essays 
 will be widely read, and gives his scientific work a permanent form." — Boston Herald. 
 
 "A man whose brilliancy is so constant as that of Prof. Huxley will always com- 
 mand readers ; and the utterances which are here collected are not the least in weight 
 and luminous beauty of those with which the author has long delighted the reading 
 world." — Philadelphia Press. 
 
 "The connected arrangement of the essays which their reissue permits briiigs into 
 filler relief Mr. Huxley's masterly powers of exposition. Sweeping the subject-matter 
 clear of all logomachies, he lets the light of common day fall upon it. He shows that 
 the place of hypothesis in science, as the starting |)oint of verification of thephenomei a 
 to be explained, is but an extension of the assumptions which underlie actioTis in every- 
 day affairs; and that the method of scientific investigation is only the method which 
 rules the ordinary business of life." — London Chronicle. 
 
 New York: D. APPLETOK & CO., 72 Fifth Avenue. 
 
T 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. 
 HE DAWN OF CIVILIZATION. (Egypt and 
 
 Chald^a.) By Prof. Maspero. Edited by the Rev. Prof. 
 
 Sayck. Translated by M. L. McClure. With Maps, and over 
 
 470 Illustrations. Quarto. Cloth. 
 
 This volume is an attempt, to put together in a lucid and interesting 
 manner all that the monuments have revealed to us concerning the earliest 
 civilization of Egypt and Chaldasa. The results of archasologlcal discovery, 
 accumulated during the last thirty years or so, are of such a vast and com- 
 prehensive character that none but a master mind could marshal them in 
 true historical perspective. , Prpf. Maspero is perhaps the only man in 
 Europe fitted by his laboj-ious researches and great scholarship tc undertake 
 such a task, and the result of his efforts will hz found herein. The period 
 dealt with covers the history of Egypt from the earliest date to the four- 
 teenth dynasty, and that of Chaldxa during its first empire. The book is 
 brought up to the present year, and d^als with the recent discoveries at 
 Koptos and Dahabur. 
 
 CHOOLS AND MASTERS OF SCULPTURE. 
 By A. G. Radcliffe, author of " Schools and Masters of Paint- 
 ing." With 35 full-page Illustrations. i2mo. Cloth, $3.00. 
 
 Those who know Miss Radcliffe's previous work will require no com- 
 mendation of the grasp of subject and thoroughness of treatment shown 
 in this. In addition to her popular but thorough survey of the history of 
 sculpture in all countries, Miss Radc'iffe sketches the various American col- 
 1 Ltions ot casts, and explains the opportunities for study which we have at 
 hind. 
 
 5 
 
 L 
 
 IFE OF SIR RICHARD O WEN. By Rev. Rich- 
 ard Owen. With an Introduction by T. H. Huxley. i2mo. 
 Cloth. 
 
 This most interesting bioprraphy of the famous anatomist offers a cUar, 
 popular account of his investigations in the fields of com arative anatomy 
 and physiology, zoClogy, paleontology, and transcendental anatomy and 
 physiology. In a sense this work offers a history of scientific discovery in 
 these departments for half a century, while in addition it has a constant 
 personal interest. 
 
 BAN BUCK LAND. The Life and Correspond- 
 ence of William Buckland, D. D., F. R. S., sometime Dean 
 of Westminster, twice President of the Theological Society, and 
 first President of the British Association. By his Daughter, 
 Mrs. Gordon. With Portraits and Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth. 
 
 The personal charm which invests this biography of the great geologist 
 enhances its interest for the general reader, while his relation to the discus- 
 sions of religion and science add a peculiar value to a notable biography. 
 
 D 
 
 New York : D. APPLETON & CO., ^2 Fifth Avenue. 
 
T 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 HE ICE AGE IN NORTH AMERICA, and Us 
 Bearings upon the Antiquity of Man. By G. Frederick 
 Wright, D.D., LL. D., F.G. S.A., Professor in Oberlin 
 Theological Seminary ; Assistant on the United States Geo- 
 logical Survey. With an appendix on " The Probable Cause 
 of Glaciation," by Warren Upham, F. G. S. A., Assistant on 
 the Geological Surveys of New Hampshire, Minnesota, and 
 the United States, New and enlarged edition. With 150 Maps 
 and Illustrations. 8vo, 625 pages, and Index. Cloth, $5.00. 
 
 '' Not a novel in all the list of this year's publications has in it any pages of more 
 thrilling interest than can be found in this book by Professor Wright. There is noth- 
 ing pedantic in the narrative, and the most serious themes and startling discoveries are 
 treated with such charming naturalness and simplicity that boys and girls, ^s well as 
 their seniors, will be attracted to the story, and find it difficult to lay it aside."— AVw 
 York youmal of CojnmeTce. 
 
 " One of the most absorbing and interesting of all tht: recent issues in the depart- 
 ment of popular science." — Chicago Herald. 
 
 " Though his subject is a very deep one, his style is so very unaffected and per- 
 spicuous that even the unscientific reader can peruse \t with intelligence and profit. In 
 reading such a book we are led almost to wonder that so much that is scientific can be 
 put in language so comparatively simple." — Neiv York Observer. 
 
 "The author has seen with his own eyes the most important phenomena of the Ice 
 a^e on this continent ffom Maine to Alaska. In the work itself, elementary description 
 is combined with a broad, scientific, and philosophic method, without abandoning for 
 a moment the purely scientific character. Professor Wright has contrived to give tlie 
 whole a philosophical direction which lends interest and inspiration to it, and which in 
 the chapters on Man and the Glacial Period rises to something like dramatic intensity." 
 — The Independent. 
 
 '*. . . To the great advance that has been made in late years in the acruracy and 
 cheapness of processes of phoio^iraphic reproduction is due a further signal advantage 
 that Dr. Wright's work possesses over his predecessors'. He has thus been able to 
 illustrate most of the natural phenomena to which he refer*; by views taken iri the field, 
 many of which have been generously loaned by the United States Geological Survey, 
 in some cases from unoublished material ; and he has admirably supplemented them by 
 numerous maps and diagrams." — 7 he Nation. 
 
 ]\/TAN AND THE GLACIAL PERIOD. By G. 
 
 lyj- Frederick Wright, D. D., LL. D., author of *' The Ice 
 Age in North America," " Logic of Christian Evidences," etc. 
 International Scientific Series. "With numerous Illustrations. 
 i2mo. Cloth, $1.75. 
 " It may be described in a word as the best summary of scientific conclusions con- 
 cerning the question of qiah's antiquity as aifecteJ by his known relations to geological 
 time." — Philadelphia Press. 
 
 " The earlier chapters describing glacial acdon, and the traces of it in North Amer- 
 ica—especially the defining of its limits, such as the terminal nioraine ,of the great 
 movement itself - are of great interest and value. The maps and diagrams are of much 
 assistance in enabhng the reader to grasp the vast extent of the movement." — London 
 Spectator. ^_^ 
 
 New York : D. APPLETON & CO., 72 Fifth Avenue. 
 
D. APPLETON & CO/S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 Z-^HE LAST WORDS OF THOMAS CARLYLE. 
 Including Wotton Reinfred^ Carlyle's only essay in fiction ; the 
 Excursion {^Futile Enough) to Paris ; and letters from Thomas 
 Carlyle, also letters from Mrs. Carlyle, to a personal friend. 
 With Portrait. i2mo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.75. 
 
 "The interest of * Wotton Reinfred' to me is considerable, from the sketches 
 which it contains of particular men and women, most of whom I knew and could, if 
 necessary, identify. The story, too, is taken generally from real life, and perhaps 
 Carlyle did not finish it, from the sense that it could not be published while the per- 
 sons and things could be recognized That objection to the publication no longer ex- 
 ists. Everybody is dead whose likenesses have been drawn, and the incidents stated 
 have long been forgotten." — James Anthony Froude. 
 
 ** * Wotton Reinfred ' is interesting as a historical document. It gives CarTyle be- 
 fore he had adopted his peculiar manner, and yet there are some characteristic bits — 
 especially at the beginning — in the Sartor Resartus vein. I take it that these are 
 reminiscences of Iiring and of the Thackeray cii cle, and there is a curious portrait of 
 f oleridge, not verj' thinly veiled. There is enough autobiography, too, of mterest in 
 its way." — Leslie Stephen. 
 
 "As a study of Carlyle these pages are of very great value; they were written 
 before he had acquired that peculiar mdividual literary style which we now know as 
 Carlylese; although here and there one may distinguish some of the odd and inflated 
 terms in which, in later years, so much of his work was expressed. The romance 
 abounds in passages of great beauty." — Neivark Daily Advertiser. 
 
 **No complete edition of the Sage of Chelsea will be able to ignore these manu- 
 scripts." — Pall Mall Gazette. 
 
 M 
 
 EN, MINES, AND ANIMALS IN SOUTH 
 AFRICA. By Lord RANDOLPH S, Churchill. With 
 Portrait, Sixty-five Illustrations, and a Map. 8vo. 337 pages- 
 Cloth, $5.00. 
 
 "The subject-matter of the book Is of unsurpassed interest to all who either travel 
 in new countries, to see for themselves the new civilizations, 01 follow closely the 
 experiences of such travelers And Lord Randolph's eccentricities are by no means 
 such as to make his own reports of what he saw in the new states of South Africa any 
 the less interesting than his active eyes and his vigorous pen naturally make them." — 
 Brooklyn Eagle. 
 
 "Lord Randolph Churchill's pages are full of diversified adventures and expe- 
 rience, from any part of which interesting extracts could be collected. ... A 
 thoroughly attractive book." — London Telegraph. 
 
 " Provided with amusing illustrations, which always fall short of caricature, but 
 perpetually suggest mirthful entertainment." — Philadelphm Ledger. 
 
 " The book is the better for having been written somewhat in the line of journalism. 
 It is a volume of travel containing the results of a journalist's trained observation and 
 intelligent reflection upon political affairs. Such a work is a great improvement upon 
 the ordinary book of travel. . . . Lord Randolph Churchill thoroughly enjoyed his 
 experiences in the African bush, and has produced a record of his journey and explora- 
 tion which has hardly a dull page in it," — New Vork Tribune. 
 
 " Any one who wishes to have a realizing sense of actual conditions in the southern 
 part of the Dark Continent should not fail to avail himself of Lord Rando'ph's keen, 
 incisive, good-humored observations." — Boston Beacon. 
 
 New York : D. APPLETON & CO., 72 Fifth Avenue.